tou= d' e)pigignome/nou qe/rous—the opening words introduced by de/ complete the sentence which ends the preceding book, tau=ta me\n kata\ to\n xeimw=na tou=ton e)ge/neto k.t.l. The third and fifth books begin in the same way. qe/rous—‘in the summer’; the genitive denotes the time within the limits of which a thing occurs, and is partitive in character (Madvig, § 66). Thucydides divides his history into summers and winters, thus reckoning more accurately, as he points out (v. 20), than by the names of the archons or other officials of the year in different states.

peri\ si/tou e)kbolh/n—lit. ‘putting forth (ears)’. Some time in April is probably denoted: see Arnold's note on tou= si/tou a)kma/zontos, ii. 19; and Jowett on ii. 1. The latter holds that the terms a)kma/zein and e)n a)kmh=| ei)=nai refer to the time when the corn was in full ear, though not ready for harvest. In Attica this would be about May 10—June 10, harvest beginning about June 15.

pleu/sasai—the order of the sentence shews that this word belongs to *surakosi/wn de/ka nh=es: the Syracusans put to sea, and after being joined by the Locrians went to Messene.

*lokri/des—Locri Epizephyrii, a colony founded by the Locrians of Greece, was in the S.E. of what is now Calabria. It was in alliance with Syracuse (iii. 86). Messene (now Messina) had been forced to join the Athenian confederacy the year before (iii. 90). A summary of its history is given vi. 4. i)/sai—‘an equal number’: iii. 75, i)/sas plhrw/santes.

kate/labon—‘occupied’, especially used of taking up a military position: cf. katalamba/nwn, ch. 3, 18: iii. 31, tw=n po/lewn katalabei=n tina/: so Plato, Gorg. 455 B, speaks of xwri/wn kata/. lhyis as a subject for military debate.

au)tw=n e)pagagome/nwn—‘the people themselves having invited them’; the preceding *messhnhn shews to what au)tw=n refers: cf. i. 136, feu/gei e/s *ke/rkuran, w)\n au)tw=n eu)erge/ths.

e)/pracan de)—the verb being placed first, the subject is divided into two parts, oi\ me\n *surako/sioi . . . oi( de\ *lokroi/, the respective motives of the allies being thus distinguished: cf. line 17.

o(rw=ntes prosbolh\n e)/xon—‘seeing that the place commanded, or afforded (lit. contained), an approach, or point of landing and attack’, i.e. it was the key of Sicily. So the Messenians are said e/n prosbolh=| ei)=nai th=s *sikeli/as, vi. 48; and an Athenian squadron despatched to the straits of Messene is said peri\ th\n prosbolh\n th=s *sikeli/as nauloxei=n, vii. 4. e)/xw is used in the same way in ch. 8, 40, a)po/basin ou)k e)/xousan, ‘not admitting of a landing’. From the idea of ‘containing in itself’ it is often used in the sense of ‘bringing with itself’, and therefore of involving or implying, the equivalent English depending on the context; e.g. i. 97, a)po/deicin e)/xei, ‘affords a proof’: ii. 41, a)gana/kthsin e)/xei, ‘gives ground of complaint’: ii. 61, ai)/sqhsin e)/xei, ‘causes perception’.

th=s *sikeli/as—objective gen. after prosbolh/n: so ch. 83, 6, e/pi\ th=| e)sbolh=| th=s *lu/gkou, ‘at the pass into Lyncus’.

e)c au)tou= o(rmw/menoi—‘making it a base of operations’ against Syracuse, lit. ‘starting from it’: so ch. 3, 22. pote/ —‘sooner or later, some day’: so ch. 60, 16. If the Athenians had possession of Messene, their command of the sea would enable them to collect forces and supplies there, so as to attack Syracuse at their own time.

Rhegium was on the Italian side of the straits of Messene. It was in alliance with the Athenians and Leontines (iii. 86). The Athenian ships under Pythodorus were apparently stationed there at the present time, but made no effort to save Messene. Pythodorus may have been crippled by a defeat he had lately sustained in an attack on a Locrian fortress (iii. 115).

a)mfote/rwqen—by land and sea: so ch. 11, 9: iii. 18.

e\s th\n *(rhgi/nwn—sc. gh=n: i. 44, th=| a:llh/lwn bohqei=n.

e)pibohqw=si—the subjunctive is more graphic than the optative, which according to rule should follow the pluperfect. ‘The historians, especially Thucydides, seem often to have thrown themselves so completely into the past events which they recorded that those events became as present to them, and hence a form of the subjunctive group follows a historic tense. Sometimes indeed forms from both groups occur in a clause dependent on the same historical tense, as iii. 22, o(/pws a)safh= tense by the best Attic ta\ shmei=a toi=s polemi/ois h)=|, kai\ mh\ bohqoi=en. In such examples the subjunctive form often expresses the more immediate or more certain contingency, and the optative form the more remote or more uncertain contingency’ (Clyde's Greek Syntax, § 40, obs. 2). Apart from cases which can be thus explained, the subjunctive is constantly used after a historic tense by the best Attic writers, and in later Greek tends to supplant the optative altogether (Clyde, loc. cit.: Madvig, § 131 b).

cunepago/ntwn—‘joining in promoting the invasion’. ch. 84, 6. cunepa/gontes: ch. 79, 11, ai\ plhsio/xwroi po/leis cuneph=gon: so ib. line 7, e)ch/gagon to\n strato/n: i. 107, e)ph=gon. In such instances the active differs from the middle, the latter meaning ‘to invite’, i.e. bring in to one's self. The reasons of the Locrian invasion are given in two clauses of different construction, a final clause, i(/na mh/..., and a genitive absolute introduced by a(/ma de/.

e)stasi/aze—‘had been for a long while in a state of faction’. The imperfect shews that the state of faction still continued: this corresponds to the well-known use of the present to denote what is still going on, as nosei= pa/lai, ‘he has been long sick’.

a)du/nata h)=n—‘it was impossible’: so i. 59: ii. 72: iii. 86, ei) dunata\ ei)/h. Such neuter plurals are very common; see Shilleto on i. 7.

h(=| kai\ ma=llon e)peti/qento—‘wherefore they attacked them the more’, this was a further reason for choosing this time for their attack: cf. i. 11, h(=| kai\ ma=llon oi( *trw=es a)ntei=xon: iii. 13, h(=| kai\ ma=llon xrh/. With this may be compared the Homeric tw=|, e.g. Il. i. 418, tw=| se kakh=| ai)/sh| te/kon. e)peti/qento—lit. ‘set on them’: cf. iii. 72, e)piti/qentai tw=| dh/mw|, ‘they attack the democracy’.

a)/llai ai( plhrou/menai—lit. ‘others. viz. those which were being manned’, the definite article implying that such ships were in preparation, and contrasting them with those already afloat. Possibly ai( has got into the text from the end of a)/llai.

e(/mellon au)to/se e)gkaqormisa/menai—‘were intended to take up their position in the harbour of Messene’, etc. au)to/se implies the idea of motion to the harbour: so iii. 76, o(rmisa/menoi e)s lime/na: ch. 8, 26, e)formi/sasqai e)s. The place meant is here determined by the preceding *messh/nhn: cf. the use of au)to/se, ch. 2, 13. o(rmi/zw and its compounds mean to bring (ships) to anchor, and in the middle to come to anchor. e/gkaqormi/zomai, ‘to come to anchor in’ a certain station, is not found elsewhere in Thucydides.

*peloponnh/sioi...e)se/balon—The Peloponnesian forces had invaded Attica every year since the outbreak of the war, with the exception of 429 and 426. Their ravages caused much suffering to the Athenians, who were driven from the country and crowded within the city walls. The distress was especially great in 430, the year remarkable for the outbreak of the great plague. The Athenians usually retaliated by ravaging the coasts of Laconia with their fleet. The phrase *peloponnh/sioi kai\ oi\ cu/mmaxoi is commonly employed for the allied forces, e.g. ii. 47, iii. 1, in which passages the invasion is described in almost the same words which are here used. The article is omitted before *peloponnh/sioi, as is not uncommon with proper names. Sometimes the omission has no particular force: at other times, as in ch. 10, 25, ‘I call on you, who are Athenians’, it calls attention to the particular characteristics of the people spoken of as bearing on the point in question. So we say, ‘Is this worthy of Englishmen?’ i.e. of men who, as being Englishmen, profess to be brave, humane, etc.

e)gkaqezo/menoi—‘taking up their position in’ the country.

ta\s tessara/konta nau=s—‘the forty ships which (as we have related) they were getting ready’; see iii. 115. The use of the definite article and of the imperfect tense has reference to presupposed knowledge in the reader.

*kerkurai/wn...e)pimelhqh=nai—‘to see to the Corcyreans in the city’. Two years ago the popular party in Corcyra had overcome the aristocratical party and massacred most of them. Five hundred who had escaped established themselves with a few auxiliaries on Mount Istone, and carried on a plundering warfare against the democracy (iii. 70—85). paraple/ontas is put in the accusative before e)pimelhqh=nai, though tou/tois to which it refers closely precedes it: cf. i. 53, e)/docen au)toi=s e/mbiba/. santas prospe/myai. Such a violation of strict grammatical principle is very common in Greek writers, who study above all things to avoid stiffness of expression.

timwroi/—‘to help those in the mountain, and because they thought’. timwroi/ is feminine, being a predicate in agreement with nh=es: so iii. 36, nh=es bohqoi/. After this nomi/zontes is introduced, in accordance with the sense of the passage, as if *peloponnh/sioi had preceded and not *peloponnhsi/wn nh=es: so i. 110, trih/reis e)s *ai)/gupton e)/sxon, ou/k ei)do/tes tw=n gegenhme/nwn ou/de/n.

katasxh/sein ta\ pra/gmata—‘would get the control of affairs’: cf. iii. 72, oi( e)/xontes ta\ pra/gmata, ‘those in power’. katalamba/nw ‘to get hold of’ is used in the passive with ta\ pra/gmata, iii. 30: and ta\ pra/gmata e)fai/neto katalhpta/ is found iii. 11.

o)/nti i)diw/th|—‘who had held no command’, lit. ‘who had been (and was now) in a private position’. i)diw/ths in reference to any profession or business means a layman or non-professional person. Demosthenes had been sent round Peloponnesus with an Athenian force the year before. He met with a severe defeat in Aetolia, but was more successful in Acarnania, where he headed the natives against the Peloponnesians and Ambraciots (iii. 94—98, 100—102, 105—114). au)tw=| dehqe/nti—‘at his own request’.

w(s e)ge/nonto ple/ontes—‘when they came in their voyage off the coast of Laconia’. The aorist gives the ‘end-view’ (Clyde) of their arrival off the coast, regarded as a single concluded fact, the imperfect e)punqa/nonto denotes the information which they went on to receive; it is followed by ei\si/, more graphic than ei)=en: see note on ch. 1, 13. For the somewhat uncommon combination of verb and participle e)ge/nonto ple/ontes, cf. viii. 86, 9: Ar, Ran. 36, h)/dh badi/zwn ei)mi/: Hdt. ix. 2, 1.

h)pei/gonto—‘were for pushing on’, the proper course considering the news which they received. For the imperf. see Goodwin, § 11, n. 2.

o( de\ *dhmosqe/nhs—‘but Demosthenes urged them to put in first at Pylos and carry out what was needful before continuing their voyage’: cf. ch. 17, 10, to\ de/on pra/ssein. sxo/ntas—so ch. 25, 44, sxou=sai: cf. iii. 34, e)/sxe kai\ e)s *no/tion: also with dative, iii. 33, gh=| sxh/swn: so iii. 32, prossxw\n *muonnh/sw|.

a)ntilego/ntwn de/—sc. tw=n strathgw=n, genitive absolute with subject not expressed: so e)lqo/ntwn de/, ch. 16, 22: 21, 14. This construction is not uncommon when the subject is easily supplied from the context.

kath/negke—‘drove the ships into Pylos’. The passive is more common; e.g. ch. 26, 26, a)ne/mw| katafe/resqai: i. 137, katafe/retai xeimw=ni: kata/ thus used in composition implies an approach to the coast from the sea or from inland; so iii. 49, e)pikata/getai, ‘comes into port after’.

teixi/zesqai—probably mid.: so (aor.) i. 11: iii. 105.

e)pi\ tou=to ga\r cune/pleuse—‘for he had joined the expedition for this purpose’, a statement on the part of the historian. e)pi\ tou=to is the reading of the best manuscripts, and the accusative is supported by e)f' a(\ a)figme/noi, ch. 18, 5: e)f' a(\ e)ch=lqon, iii. 111: e)pi\ tou=to, v. 87. e)pi\ tou/tw|, ‘with this object’, is however read by many. Most editors adopt the reading cunekpleu=sai, making the clause a statement by Demosthenes, expressed in oratio obliqua, e)/fh or a similar word being supplied from h)ci/ou: such a construction is common and presents no difficulty; cune/pleuse however has the best manuscript authority, and gives an excellent sense.

kai\ a)pe/faine—‘and pointed out (the existence of) good store both of timber and of stone, and (the fact) that the place was strong and uninhabited, as was also a great extent of the district’, lit. ‘both itself and (to) a great extent’. a)pofai/nw is found in this sense with a participle in vi. 54. e)pi\ polu/ is constructed as if it formed one word, and is followed by the genitive: cf. i. 50, (new=n) e)pi\ polu\ th=s qala/sshs e)pexousw=n, ‘covering a great extent of the sea’: ii. 76, tou= oi)kodomh/matos e)pi\ me/ga kate/seise, ‘it (a military engine) shattered a large portion of the work’: ch. 100, 14, e)sesidh/rwto e)pi\ me/ga tou= cu/lou, ‘a great part of the wood was plated with iron’.

a)pe/xei ga/r—the ancient territory of Messenia had been subdued by the Lacedaemonians, and the people driven from their country or reduced to serfdom. On the suppression of the final struggle for freedom in 455, the Athenians gave the Messenians a settlement at Naupactus on the Corinthian Gulf (i. 101—3). Demosthenes had acted with the Messenians of Naupactus in his last year's campaign (iii. 94, etc.). He proposed now to employ them in the occupation of some post in Peloponnesus, where their hatred of the Spartans, and knowledge of the country and the dialect might best be turned to account. For such a purpose Pylos seemed especially fit. It was far from Sparta, the district was uninhabited, the position was easy to defend, and it commanded an excellent harbour. The harbour of Pylos is identified with the modern Bay of Navarino; but the description given by Thucydides in ch. 8 of the narrowness of the two entrances is not in accordance with their present state. The southern channel is now some 1400 yards in width, and the northern not less than 150. See Grote, vol. iv. ch. 52, and Arnold: also Jowett on the present passage.

*korufa/sion—diminutive of korufh/ = a little top or headland.

oi( de\ e)/fasan—‘they said that there were many desert capes in Peloponnesus, if he should wish to waste the city's resources by occupying them’. h)\n bou/lhtai represents in oratio obliqua h)\n bou/lh|, ‘if you (shall) wish’; not ei) bou/lei, which would become ei) bou/letai, as in ch. 2, 11: so ch. 2, 18. The generals wished Demosthenes not to insist on occupying Pylos, as he would find plenty of places equally useless. Their object was to reach Corcyra, without being delayed by Demosthenes' schemes.

dapana=n—commonly taken as governing th\n po/lin, in the sense ‘to use up, impoverish by expenditure’. In favour of this rendering a passage is quoted from Antiphon, de caede Her. 719, a)/ndra o(\n e)dapa/nhsan, ‘whom they had exhausted with torture’ (where however e)basa/nisan is also read), and the meaning is said to be common in late Greek. On the other hand it is simpler to retain the usual sense of dapana=n, ‘to spend’, and to make th\n po/lin the subject before the infinitive, katalamba/nwn, by a slight irregularity, being taken closely with bou/lhtai. The sense will then be, ‘if he wished, by occupying them, that the city should incur expense’. This view is supported by the fact that Thucydides uses dapana=n in other passages without an accusative following; i. 141, a)po\ tw=n au)tw=n dapanw=ntes: iii. 46, pw=s ou) bla/bh dapana=n; vii. 29, ou) boulo/menoi dapana=n. Rutherford rejects th\n poli/n. The suggested construction has some support from Ar. Vesp. 720, bo/skein e)qe/lwn kai\ mh\ tou/tous e)gxa/skein soi.

dia/foro/n ti—strengthened by the addition of e(te/rou ma=llon, ‘more than (any) other’: so i. 138, diafero/ntws ti ma=llon e(te/rou. ti is accusative ‘of respect’.

kai\ tou\s *messhni/ous—‘while the Messenians (he thought) would, etc.’ The construction is slightly altered in the course of the sentence. After the genitive absolute lime/nos te proso/ntos, which gives one reason for the importance of Pylos to Demosthenes, the next reason would be given regularly in a corresponding clause with kai/. Instead of this we have the accusative with the infinitive, dependent on the sense supplied from e)do/kei au)tw=|, as if ‘he considered’ or a similar verb had gone before. So v. 53, e)do/kei *)epi/dauron proslabei=n, th=s te *kori/nqou e(/neka h(suxi/as, kai\ e)k th=s *ai/gi/nhs braxute/ran e)/sesqai th\n boh/qeian, ‘it was determined to acquire Epidaurus both in order to keep Corinth quiet, and (because it was thought) that the voyage from Aegina would be shorter’.

oi)kei/ous o)/ntas au)tw=| to\ a)rxai=on: v. 80, 2, h)=n de\ kai\ au)to\s to\ a)rxai=on e)c *)/argous. o(mofw/nous—i.e. speaking Dorian Greek: for the same reason Demosthenes when he surprised the Ambraciots at Idomene placed the Messenians in front of his force as *dwri/da glw=ssan i(e/ntas (iii. 112). We are not told that Demosthenes had any Messenians at Pylos as yet: the arrival of some is related in ch. 9.

plei_st' a)\n bla/ptein...e)/sesqai—there is a difference of meaning between the infinitive with a)/n, and the future infinitive: ‘they would (be likely to) do the greatest injury to the Lacedaemonians, and would (be sure to) prove, etc.’

u(/steron kai\ toi=s tacia/rxois koinw/sas—‘when he had afterwards communicated his plan to the taxiarchs also’, kai/, i.e. as well as to the strathgoi/. This is in close connexion with ou)/te tou\s stratiw/tas, and explanatory. Demosthenes, finding that he could not convince Eurymedon and Sophocles, afterwards appealed to the army at large by the agency of the taci/arxoi (regimental officers, see Arnold), to whom he imparted his views. koinw/sas—‘having communicated (the matter)’, without an accusative expressed: so v. 60: cf. viii. 48, tw=| plh/qei e)koi/nwsan.

h(su/xazen—‘he was detained in inactivity by stress of weather’. The plural has been suggested as giving a better sense than the usual reading, which would apply to Demosthenes alone. Some editors, reading h(su/xazen, place a comma after it and connect u(po\ a)ploi/as with sxola/zousi in the following clause; but this is an awkward arrangement of the words.

e)se/pese—this reading has the best manuscript authority, but has been commonly altered into e)pe/pese, on the ground that e)spi/ptw is not used by Thucydides with the dative or to denote emotions of the mind. e)pipi/ptw also is open to the objection that it is used by Thucydides not of mental emotions or ideas but of the attacks of disease or calamity. If an alteration be necessary, e)ne/pese would seem preferable: cf. ch. 34, 15, e)/kplhcis e)ne/pesen a)nqrw/pois: vii. 80, au)toi=s e)mpi/ptei taraxh/: cf. ch. 28, 25, e)ne/pese/ ti kai\ ge/lwtos.

perista=si—‘taking their stand round’, stationing themselves at different points round the works: Hdt. i. 43, perista/ntes to\ qhri/on, of hunters surrounding a wild boar. e)kteixi/sai to\ xwri/on—‘to complete the defences of the place’: ch 45, 13, e)cetei/xisan to\ xwri/on.

loga/dhn—‘picking out’, again used with li/qoi, ch. 31, 15; vi. 66, e)/ruma li/qois loga/dhn w)/rqwsan. It is an adverb derived from le/gw in the sense of picking out and setting in order; Hom. Od. xviii. 359, ai\masia\s le/gwn, ‘picking (stones for) walls’: so also loga/des (in Thuc. etc. of picked men) is used by Pausanias of picked (unhewn) stones: hence liqolo/gos (vi. 44 etc.) means a mason generally.

kai\ cuneti/qesan—‘and they put them together as each piece happened to fit in’: ti gives indefiniteness to e)/kaston, ‘each bit as it came, whatever it was’; the neuter seems to shew that other materials were used with the picked stones to fill in the interstices. Thucydides says of the walls of the Piraeus, i. 93, e)nto\s ou)/te xa/lic ou)/te phlo\s h)=n, ‘inside was neither clay (or mortar) nor rubble’, but all was built of squared stones. cumbai/noi is the optative of indefinite frequency (Farrar, § 177.6; Madvig, § 133), ‘as each (from time to time) fitted in’. ei)/ pou de/oi, in the next sentence, comes under the same rule, ei)/ pou being equivalent to wherever; and me/lloi in line 11 is to be similarly explained, ‘as (in each different case) it was likely to stay best on their backs’. Thucydides seems to have derived these minute details from an eye-witness, possibly from Demosthenes himself.

tw\ xei=re—so tw\ po/lee is found twice, v. 23. According to Cobet there is in the dual only one form for all genders of the article, pronouns, adjectives, and participles, viz. tw\, toi=n, tou/tw, a)llh/loin, le/gonte, etc.; ta\, tau/tain, paqou/sa, and the like, being the ill-advised corrections of grammarians and copyists (Var. lect. p. 69; Nov. lect. p. 695). Dual nouns are often found with plural predicates and verbs.

panti/ te tro/pw|—‘and so in every way they were eager to anticipate the Lacedaemonians by having completed the most assailable parts before they could attack the place’. te sums up what has gone before and continues the account. ‘bohqe/w and its compounds’, as Arnold points out, ‘never lose their proper notion of defensive movement, even when the particular operation is offensive. Thus the Lacedaemonian attack on Pylos was in order to recover possession of their own country’. e)pi/maxos, ‘open to attack’, occurs ch. 31, 14.

au)to\ kartero\n u(ph=rxe—‘was strong of itself to begin with’. Verbs thus compounded with u(po\ denote the ground or foundation on which is based what follows: e.g. u(poti/qhmi (more frequent in mid.), ‘to lay down as a premiss or basis of argument’: Eur. El. 1036, tou=d u(po/ntos, ‘with this condition to start with’; Ar. Vesp. 55, o)li/ga u(peipw/n, ‘after some prefatory words’; Dem. Pantaen. 973, u(pogra/yas e)piboulei=sai/ me au)tw=|, ‘after starting with the statement that I plotted against him’. ou)de\n e)/dei tei/xous—‘there was no need of a wall’: the impersonal dei=, ‘there is need of’, must be distinguished from the personal de/omai, ‘I am in need of’.

oi( de\ e(orth/n—‘but the Lacedaemonians chanced to be keeping a certain feast, and withal when they heard the news accounted but lightly of it, thinking that when they had once marched forth either the Athenians would not stand their attack or they would easily take them by force’. So we find the Lacedaemonians remaining inactive during the Carneian festival (v. 54), and during the Gymnopaediae (v. 82). Herodotus (ix. 7) relates that in 479 they were prevented by the Hyacinthia from marching into Boeotia to aid the Athenians against Mardonius. ‘They considered it of the greatest importance’ he adds ‘to perform their duties to the god; and meanwhile their wall across the isthmus was in progress, and the battlements were getting fixed’. Jowett also cites Hdt. vi. 106 (before Marathon), and vii. 206 (before Thermopylae).

e)n o)ligwri/a| e)poiou=nto—cf. vii. 3: Hdt. ix. 42, e)n a)dei/h| poiei=sqai, ‘to account as safe’: so peri\ pollou= poiei=sqai and many like expressions; the verb meaning to make for oneself, and therefore to account, reckon, etc.

h)\ ou)x u(pomenou=ntas—this is the accusative absolute with w(s in the sense of thinking, ‘in the belief that’ (Madvig, § 182); with it is joined h)\ lhyo/menoi, in agreement with the subject of the sentence: cf. Dem. de Sym. 182, a)peble/yate pro\s a)llh/lous w(s au)to\s me\n e(/kastos ou) poih/swn, to\n de\ plhsi/on pra/conta.

kai/ ti kai\ au)tou/s—‘and in some part too their army being still before Athens detained them’, i.e. the fact that a portion of their forces was still away with king Agis. e)n tai=s *)aqh/nais—‘in the neighbourhood of Athens’: so ch. 25, 8, e)n tw=| *(rhgi/w|: ii. 2, h( e\n *potidai/a| ma/xh, ‘the battle at (as we say of) Potidaea’: Dem. Lept. 479, u(ma=s e)/xwn pareta)cato e)n *qh/bais, ‘at Thebes’: Plat. Rep. 522 D, e)n *)ili/w|, of the Greeks before Troy. e)pe/sxe—‘checked, held back’: i. 129, kai/ se mh/te nu\c mh/q' h\me)ra e)pisxe/tw: more often intrans. as ch. 31, 2.

to\n plou=n...h)pei/gonto—‘pushed on with their voyage to Corcyra and Sicily’: so viii. 9, e)peigome/nwn to\n plou=n: iii. 2, th\n paraskeuh\n e)pei/gontai: usually intransitive, ‘to hasten on’, as in ch. 3, 4. Note the position of kai\ *sikeli/an, two words which are part of the epithet of plou=n. When the epithet of a substantive consists of several words, a portion of these words may be placed otherwise than between the article and substantive; e.g. iii. 56, kata\ to\n pa=si no/mon kaqestw=ta: vi. 31, th\n th=s po/lews a)na/lwsin dhmosi/an. In ch. 24, 18, we have a similar order: see also note on ch. 90, 7.

w(s e)pu/qonto th=s *pu/lou kateilhmme/nhs—‘when they heard of the occupation of Pylos’. Thucydides more commonly uses the accusative participial construction with punqa/nomai: ch. 50, 17, puqo/menoi *)artace)rchn teqnhko/ta, etc.; in accordance with the principle that verbs of hearing take the accusative of the sound heard, and the genitive of that which produces it. As this however is not an invariable rule, so with punqa/nomai the genitive of the thing heard of is not unfrequent, especially in poetry; ou)d ei)/ ken tou= patro\s a)pofqime/noio puqoi/mhn, Hom. Il. xix. 322.

nomi/zontes me/n—the order of words is to be carefully observed. The reasons for the Peloponnesians leaving Attica at once are given in three clauses, nomi/zontes me/n..., a(/ma de/... e)spa/nizon..., xeimw/n te k.t.l. The first of these clauses is limited in its application by the introduction of the words oi( *lakedai/monioi kai\ *)/agis, ‘thinking, that is, Agis and the Lacedaemonians thinking’; the Lacedaemonians alone having a vital interest in Pylos. This is a construction of partial apposition, like ch. 38, 1, oi( de\ a)kou/santes parh=kan ta\s a)spi/das oi( plei=stoi, ‘dropped their shields, that is, most of them did so’: cf. i. 49, where dedio/tes oi( strathgoi/ is placed in apposition with ai( *attikai\ nh=es. In the next clause the construction is changed after the participle e)sbalo/ntes, the finite verbs e)spa/nizon and e)pi/ese giving the second and third reasons for retreat.

oi)kei=on sfi/si—‘thinking that the matter of Pylos touched them nearly’. oi)kei=os, ‘concerning one's self’, is the opposite of a)llo/trios: iii. 13, a)llotri/as gh=s pe/ri oi)kei=on ki/ndunon e(/cein.

toi=s polloi=s—according to Classen ‘for their large numbers’; but there is no reason to suppose that the expression has not its usual meaning ‘for the greater part’. No doubt the want of supplies would be felt throughout the army; but the chiefs and officers would not suffer like the rest of the troops (oi( polloi/): see also vii. 84 fin.

xeimw/n te—‘stormy, wintry weather’: so iii. 21, xeimw\n notero/s, ‘stormy and rainy weather’. mei/zwn para/—‘with greater violence than was to be looked for at the time of the year then present’; lit. ‘greater, going beyond’; nearly = mei/zwn h)\ kata/: so i. 23, pukno/terai para/. th\n kaqesthkui=an w(/ran—lit. ‘the (then) settled season’, i. e. the spring, when finer weather might be expected to set in.

pollaxo/qen—‘from many causes’: Dem. Con. 1261, pollaxo/qen dh=lon: so i. 17, pantaxo/qen, ‘from all causes’, etc.

*)hio/na—where this place was is disputed: it was not Eion on the Strymon, which had been held by the Athenians since its capture by Cimon in 476 (i. 98). The mothercity Mende was on Pallene, the most westerly of the three Chalcidian peninsulas, and Eion may have been in the same district, which is also indicated by the proximity of the Chalcidians and Bottiaeans. The name means ‘shore’. th\n e)pi\ *qra/|khs—so ta\ e)pi\ *qra/|khs, the usual form by which Thucydides denotes the ‘Thrace-ward regions’.

polemi/an de/—‘but hostile’, thus differing from Mende, which was now in alliance with Athens, though it revolted two years after, ch. 123: cf. vi. 62, po/lisma *sikaniko\n me\n *)egestai/ois de\ pole/mion.

e)k tw=n frouri/wn—from the various points on the coast which were occupied by the Athenians during the war.

prodidome/nhn—the present, or rather, imperfect participle gives the meaning ‘which was to be betrayed’ in accordance with a previous understanding: so iii. 18, e)pi\ *mh/qumnan w(s prodidome/nhn e)stra/teusan.

e)cekrou/sqh—‘was driven out and lost many of his men’: e)kkrou/w is used to denote dislodging an enemy, iv. 102, 128, etc.

a)naxwrhsa/ntwn de\ tw=n e)k th=s *)attikh=s—this is called a pregnant construction, containing the two ideas ‘when the Peloponnesians in Attica had retired from it’: so ch. 16, 20: 19, 5, a)ntaitou=ntes tou\s e)k th=s nh/sou a)/ndras.

oi( *spartia=tai—the fully-privileged citizens of Sparta itself, who alone were eligible to public offices: the peri/oikoi were the inhabitants of the townships of Laconia, who though free had no voice in the government.

perih/ggellon...bohqei=n—‘and they sent round word also over Peloponnesus to march’: so ii. 10, perih/ggellon stratia\n paraskeua/zesqai: also with an accusative of the thing demanded, vii. 18, si/dhron perih/ggellon, ‘they sent round orders for iron’: this corresponds to the use of impero with frumentum, pecuniam, obsides, etc.; and the English ‘to order’ supplies, etc.

u(perenexqei=sai—‘after being carried over the Leucadian isthmus’: so iii. 81, u(perenegko/ntes to\n *leukadi/wn i/sqmo\n ta\s nau=s: the same construction, viii. 7. Leucas (now Sauta Maura) was afterwards turned into an island by cutting through the isthmus which connected it with the mainland. In 428 we find the Lacedaemonians preparing machines (o(lkoi/) to transport (w(s u(peroi/sontes) a fleet over the isthmus of Corinth (iii. 15): and in 412 twenty-one ships were conveyed across it (viii. 7, 8).

ta\s e)n *zaku/nqw|—so far had the Athenian fleet advanced on the way to Corcyra. Zacynthus (now Zante) was much nearer than Leucas to Pylos. It was faithful to the Athenians throughout the war, and was an important link in the chain of naval stations which enabled the Athenians to command the coast of Peloponnesus (ii. 7, 80).

w(s tou= xwri/ou—‘since the place was in danger’; w(s with the genitive absolute gives the ground on which Demosthenes called for speedy succour, stated as a fact; thus differing from the accusative construction, which expresses belief or opinion: see note on ch. 5, 3.

kai\ ai( me\n nh=es. oi) de/—note the force of the imperfect tenses: the Athenian ships ‘were on their way’ to obtain help, the Lacedaemonians on their side ‘were engaged in’ preparations for the attack. Classen takes ai( men nh=es to mean the Athenian ships at Zacynthus, which ‘were getting ready for the voyage’ to help Pylos. This perhaps gives a greater force to kata\ ta\ e)pestalme/na, ‘in accordance with the orders of Demosthenes’, i.e. his urgent demand for speedy aid.

dia\ taxe/wn ei)rgasme/non—‘a work hastily constructed and occupied by a small force’: after the passive participle agreeing with oi)kodo/mhma comes the genitive absolute with an active participle. For other variations of participial construction see the opening clauses of chs. 28, 29, and 32.

e)n nw=| ei)=xon—‘they purposed’: ch. 22, 7, e)n nw=| e)/xontas, ‘intending’: so Hdt. i. 27, e)/xontes e)n nw=| strateu/esqai, ‘intending to march’: so in Latin, Liv. vi. 19, nobis in animo est. On the other hand nw=| e)/xein without e)n means to remember: Plat. Gorg. 490 A, ei) nw=| e)/xeis, ‘if you bear in mind’: so Hdt. v. 92 (7), no/w| i)/sxwn.

h)\n a)/ra mh/—‘if they should fail to take it’: a)/ra with ei) and h)/n has the force of if after all, if, which I do not expect.

o(/pws mh\ h)=|—‘that it might not be possible for the Athenians to enter and take up a position against them’: e)/sti ‘it is possible’ is most commonly found with a negative: ch. 9, 8, ou)k h)=n o(/pla pori/sasqai. For the meaning of o(rmi/zomai, and its construction with e)s, see note on ch. 1, 19: the compound with e)pi/ is only found here in Thucydides; it corresponds to the neuter verb e)forme/w, ‘to lie at anchor over against, to blockade’, and to the substantives e)fo/rmhsis and e)/formos.

h( ga\r nh=sos h( *sfakthri/a—the fortress of Pylos was at the northern extremity of the bay, the harbour being the bay itself, which was rendered secure by the island of Sphacteria. The island lay north and south across the bay, leaving two narrow entrances which the Lacedaemonians now proposed to block up. Sphacteria is almost certainly the Sphagia of ancient writers and of modern days: cf. Plat. Menex. 242 c, labo/ntes au)tw=n tou\s h(ge/monas *lakedaimoni/ous e)n th=| *sfagi/a|. The description given by Thucydides is however not free from topographical difficulties: see note on ch. 3, 14.

paratei/nousa—‘stretching along’: tei/nw and its compounds are sometimes used intransitively of geographical position. e)ggu\s e)pikeime/nh—‘lying close off’: so ch. 44, 28, e)s ta\s e)pikeime/nas nh/sous.

th=| me/n...th=| de/—‘at one point...at the other’. dia/ploun—‘a passage for two ships (abreast)’; the accusative is in apposition to the preceding e)/splous. h( a)/llh h)/peiros is the main land on the south of the harbour, which was now occupied by the Lacedaemonians.

kai\ me/geqos—‘and in length was about 15 stades pretty nearly’; both peri/ and ma/lista are used in the sense of ‘about’ to give dimensions roughly. Fifteen stades would be about 3000 yards, whereas the modern Sphagia is said to be upwards of 2 1/2 miles in length.

a)ntiprw/rois—‘with the prows facing the enemy’: so ch. 14, 4, a)ntiprw/rous: vii. 34, nh=es a)nti)prwroi e)mballo/menai, ‘ships struck bow to bow’: vii. 36, to\ a)nti/prwron cugkrou=sai, ‘ramming stem-on’: Tac. Hist. ii. 14, conversa et minaci fronte. bu/zhn—‘closely’ from bu/w ‘to stuff full’. The entrances were so narrow that it was possible to close them by placing the ships side by side with their beaks pointing outwards. On the other hand in 413 the Syracusans closed the mouth of their harbour by anchoring their ships cross-ways (plagi/ais), having a much wider entrance to secure (vii. 59).

ou(/tw ga/r—‘for so, they considered, both the island would be hostile to the Athenians and the main land, which did not admit of landing’. e)/sesqai, like the subsequent e(/cein and e)kpoliorkh/sein, depends on the sense ‘they hoped, they expected’ supplied from the preceding sentence: see note on e)pi\ tou=to ga\r cunekpleu=sai, ch. 3, 10. For e)/xousan see note on prosbolh\n e)/xon ch. 1, 7: similarly ou)x e(/cein o(/qen, line 42, means ‘would not present a point from which’.

ta\ ga\r au)th=s th=s *pu/lou—the coast to the north of the bay, facing the main sea. This offered no harbour where the Athenians could establish a naval station, such as was occupied by the English at Balaclava. The island of Sphacteria was held by the enemy's troops, as was also the mainland to the south forming the shore of the bay. Thus the Athenian fleet would be unable to succour their countrymen in Pylos, and the garrison being unprovided must shortly surrender.

w)felh/sousi tou\s au(tw=n—indic. fut. after o(/qen: so i. 107, ske/yasqai o(/tw| tro/pw| diaporeu/sontai, ‘in what way they should cross’.

si/tou te ou)k e)no/ntos—‘as there was no provision in the place, and it had been occupied with slender preparation’; the gen. abs. is here followed by the participle agreeing with xwri/on; see note on line 21. I follow Classen in reading kateilhmme/non for the MSS. kateilhmme/nou, which would be gen. abs. agreeing with xwri/ou understood. di' o)li/ghs paraskeuh=s is one of the many adverbial expressions with dia/, like dia\ profulakh=s, ch. 30, 5.

w(s d' e)do/kei...kai\ diebi/bazon—‘as they determined, so they sent the men across, selecting them by lot from all the lochi’, lit. ‘went on to send’. The lochus was one of the larger divisions of the Spartan army: see Arnold's note on v. 68, where a calculation is made of the Lacedaemonian force present at the field of Mantinea in 418, when seven lo/xoi were engaged: see also Grote, vol. ii. ch. 8, on the military divisions of Sparta.

oi( de\ teleutai=oi—‘those who crossed last and were caught in the island’, i.e. whose retreat was cut off by the Athenians; or those who were ‘taken in it’ on its capture, in which case the slain are included, cf. ch. 38, 30. e)gkatalhfqe/ntes —ch. 116, 5, o)/sous e)gkate/labe, ‘all that he captured in the city’: so iii. 33, (nh=es) e)gkatalhfqei=sai, ‘caught in a place’.

kai\ *ei(/lwtes oi( peri\ au)tou/s—‘besides the Helots attached to their service’, called qera/pontes ch. 16, 11; their number is not stated, possibly each Lacedaemonian had one in attendance on him. The Helots, or country serfs, the main body of whom were Messenian Dorians, were often employed in military service. Thus in 424 they furnished seven hundred heavy-armed men for the expedition led by Brasidas into Thrace (ch. 80).

ta\s trih/reis—three in number, five having been left at first with Demosthenes, two of which he had despatched to Zacynthus. Classen suggests ai(\ perih=san au(tw=|, ‘which he had remaining’, instead of ai(/per h)=san, there being no obvious reason for the use of o(/sper in the passage.

a)naspa/sas u(po\ to\ tei/xisma—‘having dragged up under the fortifications and secured with a stockade’. prosestau/rwsen—either ‘put a stockade to’ the ships, or ‘added them by a stockade to’ the line of defence, i.e. included them in an outwork of palisading. Thus the Greeks intrenched their fleet at Troy, and the Persians at Mycale (Hdt. ix. 96, 7). proestau/rwse, ‘put palisades before’, has been proposed as a correction: the word is used vi. 75, th\n qa/lassan proestau/rwsan, of the Syracusans who fringed their shores with stakes, to prevent the Athenians from landing near the city.

a)spi/si te fau/lais—‘with poor shields and for the most part wicker’. Here we must either regard te as out of place, te and kai\ coupling fau/lais and oi)sui+/nais, or we must consider that the sentence is irregular in construction, beginning as if a second substantive were to be connected with a)spi/si. Similar irregularities in the position of te are common, e.g. ch. 10, 9, h)\n e)qe/lwme/n te mei=nai kai\ mh\...kataprodou=nai.

For a full discussion of the usage of te see Jowett on i. 9, kai\ nautikw=| te a(/ma: also Shilleto on the same passage. Both authorities consider that the word sometimes bears in Thucydides the sense of too, which is found in lyric and dramatic poetry and in Herodotus.

e)k lh|strikh=s—‘from a piratical thirty-oared boat and a pinnace belonging to certain Messenians who happened to have arrived’; doubtless Messenians from Naupactus, who were plundering the Laconian coast. Both lh|strikh=s and triakonto/rou are adjectives agreeing with new/s understood. A ke/lhs or kelh/tion is mentioned as accompanying a trireme, ch. 120, 10.

o(pli=tai/ te—‘of these Messenians was made up a force of about forty heavy-armed men’: gi/gnomai is very commonly used of numbers in the sense of amounting to: ch. 23, 18, ai pa=sai e(bdomh/konta e)ge/nonto: cf. ch. 39, 1.

tou\s me\n ou)=n pollou/s—‘the greater part both of those without (full) arms and of those who were armed’. By o(/pla is denoted especially the full equipment of a heavy-armed soldier (o)pli/ths): so o(/pla e)/xontes, ch. 33, 17.

We are not told the total number of the men under Demosthenes, but we can make an approximate calculation. He had forty Messenians, and the crews of three triremes. A trireme was manned by about 170 rowers (nau=tai), some half-dozen officers, and a certain number of e)piba/tai, heavy-armed men serving as marines. Of these last there were at this time 10 to each ship, according to Arnold's note on iii. 95: Classen says 20: see also Grots, vol. iv. ch. 49. When the two ships were sent to Zacynthus their e)piba/tai may have been left at Pylos. Thus the whole Athenian force amounted to about 600 men, the greater part hastily and imperfectly armed.

a)poleca/menos—‘having picked out for himself’: the middle participle is similarly used with au)to/s, v. 8.

e)/cw tou= tei/xous—Demosthenes expected that the descent of the enemy would be made on the point beneath the walls of Pylos, outside the bay on the north and looking toward the main sea.

e)s xwri/a me/n...sfi/si de/—the two clauses with me/n and de/ give the pros and cons for attacking at the point in question; on the one hand (me/n) landing was difficult, on the other (de/) the works were here incomplete: the clauses do not however correspond in construction, e)s xwri/a me/n being connected with a)pobai/nein, while in the second clause the finite verb h(gei=to is introduced.

sfi/si de\ tou= tei/xous—‘as their wall was weakest at this point’: sfi/si corresponds to h(mi=n in oratio directa, and includes both Demosthenes and his men; sfei=s and sfe/teros being often thus used in reference to the thought or words of a single person. ‘Our wall is here the weakest’ says Demosthenes: so v. 72, keleu/santos au)tou= sfi/si prosmi/cai, ‘when (Agis) had given the order—close up to us’ see note on ch. 36, 3, a)/llws e)/fh ponei=n sfa=s.

e)pispa/sasqai au)tou/s—these words present considerable difficulty. We have, dependent on h(gei=to, the aorist middle e)pispa/sasqai, followed by the future proqumhqh/sesqai. e)pispa/sasqai is transitive in sense, meaning ‘to draw to oneself, induce’ with inf., as in v. 111: so e)pispa=sqai with inf. Xen. Cyr. v. 5. 10. The natural meaning of the construction is, ‘he thought that he had drawn them on so that they would be eager’; but this is not satisfactory in sense. The meaning required is, ‘he considered that it (the weakness of the works) would draw them on to be eager’. Besides the awkwardness thus involved in supplying the subject to e)pispa/sasqai from the genitive absolute tou= tei/xous o)/ntos, this necessitates giving a future meaning to the aor. inf. following h)gei=to. Whether it will bear such a meaning is by no means clear. The same question arises on ii. 3, e)no/misan krath=sai: and perhaps on iii. 24, nomi/zontes u(potoph=sai.

There is no doubt that the aor. inf. is used in reference to future things after phrases denoting expectation, such as e)lpi/zein, e)lpi/s e)stin, ei)ko/s e)stin etc.: but it does not follow that words which express merely a thought or statement, like h(gei=to in this passage, can be used in the same way. Madvig (§ 172 R.) considers that instances of such construction ‘undoubtedly rest upon a false reading, either a)/n having been accidentally omitted, or the aorist written by mistake for the future’. Goodwin however (Greek Moods and Tenses § 32) points out that ‘unless we decide to correct a large number of passages against the authority of the MSS, we must admit even this anomalous construction; although it is to be considered strictly exceptional’.

In the passage before us it is perhaps best to cut the knot by reading the fut. e)pispa/sesqai, passive in sense, with au)tou/s as its subject—‘he considered that they would be led on to be eager’, or possibly ‘would be ready to be led on’. It may be that proqumh/sesqai is only an explanation of e)pispa/sesqai, which has found its way into the text: on the other hand a redundancy of almost synonymous infinitives is by no means foreign to the style of Thucydides; while the future inf. is often found after words of thinking, wishing, etc. e.g. i. 27, e)deh/qhsan nausi\ sfa=s cumprope/myein.

ou)/te ga\r au)toi/—‘for as they themselves never expected to be overmastered at sea, and therefore had not been building the works with any strength, so if the enemy could force the landing, the place, he felt, was at once within their grasp’. ou)/te...te—lit. ‘neither...and’: so neque...et. e)lpi/zontes—‘looking for, expecting’: ii. 11, e)lpi/zein dia maxhs i)enai au)tou/s.—i)sxuro/n—predicate agreeing with tei=xos: after the preceding ou)/te the negative ou)k is of course redundant. The imperfect e)tei/xizon means either ‘had been building’, or ‘had been for building’, i.e. thought fit or purposed to do so.

e)kei/nois te—dativus commodi after a(lw/simon gi/gnesqai. bia/zesqai with accusative, meaning ‘to carry by force’ occurs again ch. 11, 23 and ch. 36, 6: Thucydides uses it also without a case, meaning ‘to act by force, force one's way’, and as a passive. gi/gnesqai, ‘to come to be’, here denotes what would follow as an immediate and necessary consequence: so ch. 10, 13, cu/mmaxon gi/gnetai. The infinitive depends on the sense continued from h)gei=to in the previous sentence.

kata\ tou=to—‘at this point’: so iii. 89, where it is the antecedent to h(=|: or possibly ‘on this plan’, i.e. with this view and purpose: like v. 7, kata\ qe/an tou= xwri/ou, = ‘to reconnoitre the place’.

parekeleu/sato toia/de—‘exhorted them to the following effect’: toia/de, ‘of this sort’, in relating speeches, means as follows: corresponding to which we have tosau=ta ‘so much’ (as in ch. 11, 1) or toiau=ta, both equivalent to as aforesaid.

Speech of Demosthenes to the garrison. His address is brief and soldierlike. We must fight, he says, and fight at once. Nor is there any need for despairing of success, if only we hold our ground. The place is difficult of approach, and the enemy can only bring a small part of his numbers into action at once. Besides, he is at a disadvantage, having to force the landing from his ships. There is therefore no need to fear an overwhelming onslaught, and a vigorous resistance will make us victorious.

cunara/menoi—‘having taken part in’: v. 28, cunara/menoi tou= pole/mou: the genitive is partitive, as with proscumba/llomai, iii. 36: cullamba/nomai, ch. 47, 4: so Eur. Ion, 331, po/nou cullabei=n. On the other hand we have, ii. 71, cuna/rasqai to\n ki/ndunon, ‘to join in undertaking the danger’.

mhdei\s cuneto\s boule/sqw dokei=n—‘let no one desire to be esteemed a man of intelligence’. cuneto/s and cune/sis denote especially natural sagacity and quickness of apprehension, qualities which eminently distinguished the Athenians. Now however what was needed was rather stolid determination. Demosthenes therefore calls on his men to repel their enemy first and argue afterwards.

e)klogizo/menos—‘reasoning out, calculating thoroughly’: i. 80 with acc. to\ periesto\s h(mo=s deino/n—‘the danger that surrounds us’: so ch. 34, 27: iii. 54, fo/bos perie/sth th\n *spa/rthn. The neuter form kaqesto/s occurs, iii. 9: elsewhere kaqesthko/s, ch. 97, 7, etc.

ma=llon h)\...xwrh=sai—ma=llon d' is read by nearly all modern editors, the best manuscripts omitting h)/ and several giving de/. The sense is then ‘but rather (let each one resolve) to close with the enemy, etc.’, e)/kastos or pa=s tis being supplied from mhdei/s, and xwrh=sai of course being governed by boule/sqw. Classen however urges that not only is such an elliptic construction doubtful in the present sentence, but that a parallel can scarcely be quoted from Thucydides to this usage of ma=llon de/. On the other hand ma=llon h)/ is a frequent expression, and is more than once found in sentences which closely resemble the one before us: e.g. viii. 48, ou) ga\r boulh/sesqai (e)/fh) au)tou\s. douleu/ein ma=llon h)\...e)leuqe/rous ei)=nai: cf. ii. 62: iii. 46. a)periske/ptws eu)/elpis—‘with sanguine hope which casts aside reflection’: so ch. 108, 25, e)lpi\s a)peri/skeptos.

kai\ e)k tou/twn a)\n perigeno/menos—‘confident that he will come out successful from this danger too’: so i. 141, e)k tw=n kindu/nwn perigene/sqai: ii. 49, e)k tw=n megi/stwn perigene/sqai, ‘to escape the worst consequences (of the plague)’.

o(/sa ga\r e)s a)na/gkhn—‘whenever matters have reached a point of necessity, as they have now with us, they least of all admit of calculation, etc.’: so i. 124, nomi/santes e)s a)na/gkhn a\fi=xqai, ‘convinced that you have no choice left’.

e)gw\ de\ kai/—‘but I see that most things too are in our favour’. kai/ couples the two ideas, that not only is it a time for action rather than consideration, but also consideration is encouraging rather than the reverse. pro\s h(mw=n—so ch. 29, 13, pro\s tw=n polemi/wn, ‘in favour of the enemy’.

h)\n e)qe/lwme/n te mei=nai—e)qe/lw seems especially used of the alacrity and determination of a soldier: so Brasidas says to his men, when on the point of gaining his final victory, v. 9, nomi/sate ei)=nai tou= kalw=s polemei=n to\ e)qe/lein kai\ ai)sxu/nesqai kai\ toi=s a)/rxousi pei/qesqai. The sentence is slightly irregular, te following e)qe/lwmen as if to couple it to another finite verb, while kai/ introduces instead a second infinitive mh\ kataprodou=nai. See note on ch. 9, 7.

ta\ u/pa/rxonta h(mi=n krei/ssw kataprodou=nai—‘to sacrifice the advantages we have already’. kataprodou=nai, ‘to betray utterly’ implies a disgraceful and cowardly abandonment: i. 86, uh/te tou\s cumma/xous kataprodi/dwmen.

tou= te ga\r xwri/ou—followed by to/ te plh=qos, line 18, the words from d meno/ntwn to i)/sw| h)/dh being explanatory and parenthetical. Demosthenes points out that two things are in favour of the Athenians, the difficulty of effecting a lodgement (to\ duse/mbaton), and the fact that only a few ships can attack them at once. h(me/teron = pro\s h(mw=n.

o(\ meno/ntwn h(mw=n—o(/ is absent from nearly all manuscripts, but is considered necessary by Poppo. If it be omitted, and a stop placed at nomi/zw, we have an abrupt, though not impossible sentence. The same question, under the same conditions, arises on iii. 37, a)rxome/nous (oi(\)...a)krow=ntai u(mw=n. Classen in both cases follows the manuscripts and omits the relative.

u(poxwrh/sasi de/—‘though if we once give way we shall find that, hard though it be, it is easy enough if there is no one to bar the road’. u(poxwrh/sasi, sc. h(mi=n, is an ethical dative (dativus incommodi); the aorist = ‘when we have once yielded’. Case and tense are similarly used in ii. 62, a)/llwn d' u)pakou/sasi kai\ ta\ proskekthme/na filei=n e)lassou=sqai, ‘when men have once submitted to others (know that) they soon find that what they have gained diminishes’. eu)/poron—‘affording an easy path (to the enemy)’: ch. 78, 12, eu)/poron diie/nai ‘easy to traverse’.

mh\ r(a|di/ws ou)/shs—the adverb has better manuscript authority than r(a|di/as: cf. ch. 13, 6. a)poba/sews ma/lista ou)/shs: so vii. 4, r(a=|on e)fai/neto h) e)skomidh\ e)/sesqai. Göller's note, quoted by Arnold, gives several instances of adverbs with sum in Latin. bia/zhtai—passive; this verb is passive or deponent indifferently, except in two tenses e)biasa/mhn (dep.) and e)bia/sqhn (pass.).

e)pi\ ga\r tai=s nausi/—‘for while on board their ships they are easiest to repel’ = r(a=|sto/n e)stin a)mu/nesqai au)tou/s: so Hom. Il. xii. 54, ta/fros r(h|idi/h perh=sai, ‘easy to cross’: ib. xxiv. 243, r(h|i/teroi e)naire/men: Plat. Rep. 283B lo/gos prosh/kwn r(hqh=nai.

kat' o)li/gon ga\r maxei=tai—‘it will fight in small divisions’; distributive use of kata/, of a whole divided into parts: v. 9, to\ kat' o)li/gon kai\ mh\ a)pa/ntas kinduneu/ein: vi. 34, kat' o)li/gon prospi/ptousa: Hdt. vii. 104, oi( *lakedaimo/nioi kat' e(/na maxeo/menoi, ‘man by man’.

kai\ ou)k e)n gh=|—‘and it is not an army on land on equal terms with superiority of force, but an army fighting from ships, which require the concurrence of many fortunate circumstances (for success)’. e)k tou= o(moi/ou—i.e. with equal advantages of ground, facility of approach, etc. polla/ is of course predicative in construction, lit. ‘the kairi/a occurring must be many’. kai/rios means ‘seasonable, suitable’: here ta\ kai/ria are the favourable conditions of wind, sea-room, good landing and the like, which must be combined if the ships were to act with effect. Similarly Nicias says that in the expedition to Sicily ‘there is need of good counsel, and still more of good fortune’ (vi. 23). Some take kai/ria here to mean accidents, on the analogy of kairi/a plhgh/, which means a mortal wound, as striking a vital part (kairo/s or kai/rion). The clause would then be rendered ‘to which many accidents must needs occur’: but this does not give so good a sense; and we should expect ei)ko/s or a)na/gkh rather than dei=. cumbh=nai—‘to happen together’.

a)ntipa/lous tw=| h(mete/rw| plh/qei—‘I consider their difficulties a counterpoise to our (small) numbers’: so v. 6, u(perido/nta sfw=n to\ plh=qos, ‘despising their (small) force: Hdt. i. 77, *kroi=sos memfqei\s kata\ to\ plh=qos to\ e(wutou= stra/teuma, ‘having misgivings about his army in respect of numbers’.

kai\ e)pista/menous—‘and knowing from practical experience what landing from ships against others is, viz. that it could never be effected by force, if etc.’ a)po/basis is the subject of the following bia/zoito, the construction being similar to e)pi/stamai *ku=ron o(/ti te/qnhke, ‘I know that Cyrus is dead’.

ei)/ tis u(pome/noi—u(pome/nw is especially used of standing one's ground in danger or alarm: it takes an accusative of the thing or person: vi. 68, u(perfronou=si me\n h(ma=s u(pomenou=si de\ ou)/, ‘they despise us but will not endure our attack’.

fo/bw|—the order of construction is fo/bw|...deino/thtos kata/plou new=n, but Thucydides commonly places the most important and general word first in position, and then the words which particularize what is said about it: so ii. 60, tou= koinou= th=s swthri/as a)fi/esqe, ‘ye loose your hold on the safety of the state’. Analogous to this is the usage by which the name of a country is often put first and followed by the name of a particular place therein.

The omission of any article seems intended to give a somewhat contemptuous emphasis to the words; as in the speech of Hermocrates describing the motives of the Athenians in invading Sicily, vi. 33, pro/fasin me\n *)egestai/wn cummaxi/a| kai\ *leonti/nwn katoiki/sei, ‘ostensibly by way of alliance with Egesteans and settling of Leontines’. So Demosthenes, in Nicostr. 1255, speaking of the artifices by which a criminal tries to beg himself off, says h)\ ga\r o)rfanou\s h)\ e)piklh/rous kataskeua/santes, a)ciw/sousi e)leei=sqai, h)\ gh=ras kai\ a)pori/as kai\ trofa\s mhtri\ le/gontes, ‘they will try to excite pity by getting up tales about orphans and heiresses, and destitute mothers that they have to keep’.

kai\ au)tou/s—‘now that your turn has come’ (Jowett). r(axi/a—Ion. r(hxi/h (r(a/ssw, r(h/gnumi), ‘the place where the waves break’: Aesch. Prom. 713, a(listo/nois po/das xri/mptousi r(axi/aisi. In Hdt. = the flood tide breaking on on the shore. para/—with acc. ‘along the line of’.

e)pikataba/ntes—‘marching down to the sea to face the enemy’: vii. 23, pro\s th\n qa/lassan e)pikataba/ntwn.

a)rantes—‘having set out’: with acc., i. 52, a)/rantes tas nau=s, ‘having got the fleet under way’: more commonly intransitive, of land or sea forces; ii. 12, a)/ras tw=| stratw=|: i. 29, a)/rantes e(bdomh/konta nausi/.

tessara/konta kai\ trisi/—if the reading is right, the Lacedaemonians did not make the attack with their full force, as the fleet which had come from Corcyra numbered 60 sail, ch. 8, 10. The article with nausi/ seems to show that they used all their available ships. Some may perhaps have been disabled. Poppo suggests e\ch/konta kai\ trisi/.

e)pe/plei—‘was on board’; applied to the commander or any persons not belonging to the regular crew: as in ii. 66 to a force of 1000 heavy-armed men. In ch. 12, 15 e)piple/w means ‘to sail up, sail against’: so i. 51, iii. 79 etc.

kat' o)li/gas nau=s—‘in detachments of a few ships’. kata/, distributive: ch. 10, 19. dielo/menoi—‘apportioning the work’: sometimes used as in the present passage without a case, v. 114, dielo/menoi kata\ po/leis: sometimes with an accusative, ii. 78, dielo/menoi kata\ po/leis to\ xwri/on, ‘apportioning (the operations against) the place to the several contingent cities’.

ou)k h)=n plei/osi prossxei=n—‘it was not possible to approach the shore with more’. The place where the Athenians were posted was of no great extent, and triremes rowing to the shore would require 50 feet or so to clear each other. plei/osi is the dat. of the force with which the attempt was made.

a)napau/ontes e)n tw=| me(rei—‘relieving (each other) in turn’: Arnold quotes Xen. Hel. vi. 2. 29, kata\ me/ros tou\s nau/tas a)ne/pauen: so id. Cyr. vii. 1. 4, a)napau/ein stra/teuma, ‘to halt an army’: cf. vii. 79, a)napauome/nwn au)tw=n, ‘while they were resting’: ii. 75, dih|rhme/noi kat' a)napau/las, ‘in relieving parties’.

ei)/ pws w)sa/menoi—‘if by any means they might force their way etc.’: so ch. 35, 13, w)/sasqai e)peirw=nto: also with acc., vi. 70, w)same/nwn to\ ke/ras. ei)/ pws—so ch. 37, 5.

pa/ntwn ..*brasi/das—The first mention of Brasidas by Thucydides is in the year 431, when his promptitude and energy in saving a fortress gained him public thanks at Sparta (ii. 25). We next find him in 427, as ‘adviser’ (cu/mboulos) to Alcidas, whom the Lacedaemonians were about to send with a fleet to Corcyra (iii. 69). This expedition effected little, not from the fault of Brasidas, who had not an equal voice in its direction; *brasi/dou parainou=ntos, i)soyh/fou de\ ou)k o)/ntos (iii. 79).

ei)/ ph| kai\ dokoi/h—‘if at any point it did seem possible to land’; opt. of frequency, as in ch. 4, 9, ei)/ pou de/oi.

fulassome/nous tw=n new=n—‘being careful of their ships’: verbs which denote caring for take the genitive, so fula/ssomai ‘to beware, be on one's guard’ here takes the genitive of the thing about which the care is shown. There is however no other instance of the gen. with fula/ssesqai. Krüger therefore takes new=n as partitive gen.: while R. omits tw=n...cuntri/ywsi.

cu/lwn feidome/nous—‘sparing planks’; speaking contemptuously. So Mardonius called the defeat at Salamis cu/lwn a)gw/n, Hdt. viii. 100. ‘It is not timber’, he said, ‘which will give us success, but horses and men’.

perii+dei=n pepoihme/nous—‘to allow the enemy to have made’. The perfect participle points to the fact that the work had been actually constructed, and Brasidas calls on his soldiers to avenge the wrong: so ii. 18, perii+dei=n th\n gh=n tmhqei=san, ‘to allow the ravaging of the land to be unavenged’: ii. 20, perio/yesqai ta\ sfe/tera diafqare/nta, (Clyde, § 46). pepoihme/nous— perf. partcp. middle, ‘having made for themselves, or caused to be made’: Dem. Androt. 596, ta\s trih/reis ou) pepoi/hsai; of the officials responsible for ship-building.

ta\s sfete/ras nau=s—see note on sfi/si, ch. 9, 21. ‘Smash our ships’, cries Brasidas, ‘and force the landing’. The sense is of course ‘force the entrance, even if we destroy our ships’: cf. Shilleto on i. 20, dra/sante/s ti kai\ kinduneu=sai. kai\ tou\s cumma/xous—sc. e)ke/leue.

e)pidou=nai—‘to give freely’, especially used of voluntary offerings for purposes of state or war: so e)pi/dosis. This sense is common in Demosthenes. In Thucydides e)pidi/dwmi is elsewhere intransitive, meaning ‘to advance, increase’, o)kei/lantas —‘running (their ships) aground’: so ch. 26, 29, e)pw/kellon ta\ ploi=a: in ii. 91 o)ke/llw is intransitive, ai\ de\ (tw=n new=n) e)s bra/xea w)/keilan, ‘grounded on shoals’.

kai\ o( me/n—to this corresponds oi( de\ a)/lloi, line 10. toiau=ta e)pe/sperxe—‘thus urged on’; cognate accusative, carrying on the idea of the verb, like traumatisqei\s polla/, line 5, ‘with many wounds’. e)pispe/rxw is a poetical word, used in Aesch. Sept. 689 and in Homer.

th\n a)poba/qran—‘the gangway’ for landing from the ship. The Greeks when preparing to attack the Persian fleet drawn up on the shore at Mycale provided a)poba/qras kai\ ta\ a)/lla o)/swn e)/dee (Hdt. ix. 98).

th\n pareceiresi/an—the part ‘clear of the rowing’, at the bows or stern. The word occurs vii. 34 and 40, in both of which passages it means the bows, which are described as shattered by the beaks of the enemy's triremes. perierru/h— ‘slipped off his arm’; see Arnold's note. Xenophon, when his troops were in a difficulty, dreamed that he was in fetters, but that ‘they slipped off him of themselves’, au)to/matai perirruh=nai (Anab. iv. 3). So ch. 51, 1 and 133, 1, tei=xos periei=lon: cf. Plat. Rep. 519 A, perieko/ph with acc. ‘was clipped of its surroundings’.

o(\ e)/sthsan...tau/ths—‘which they set up for (their success in repelling) this attack’: so ii. 92, e)/sthsan tropai=on th=s troph=s. For tropai=on see Liddell and Scott. Sometimes when both sides claimed a victory both set up a trophy (ch. 134, 7). Thucydides however only records a single instance (viii. 24) in which a trophy was removed by the enemy as being erected on insufficient grounds.

perie/sth—‘changed, came round’: i. 78, e)s tu/xas perii/stasqai, ‘to change in respect of fortune’: i. 120, e)s tou)nanti/on perie/sth, ‘changed to the opposite’.

kai\ tau/ths *lakwnikh=s—‘and that too Laconian land’: ch. 55, 17, kai\ tou/tw|: like kai\ tau=ta ‘and that too’, a very common phrase, usually with a participle.

e)pi\ polu\...proe/xein—‘it formed at this time a great part of the glory of the Lacedaemonians that they were chiefly mainlandsmen and most excellent in military matters, and of the Athenians that they were seamen and most eminent with their ships’. e)pi\ polu/—‘(to) a great extent’ (see note on ch. 3, 13), is the object of e)poi/ei, the subject of which is formed by the following infinitive clauses. e)n tw=| to/te—i.e. at the time of which Thuc. is writing: so ch. 35, 18, e)n tw=| pri/n: i. 32, e)n tw=| pro\ tou=, ‘in former time’.

qalassi/ois—sc. ei)=nai. The word implies seafaring habits and skill. In i. 7 we read of pirates assailing o(/soi o)/ntes ou) qala/ssioi katw w)/|koun, ‘all who, though not seamen, had their dwelling on the coast’: so Aristotle Eth. Nic. iii. 6 (9), 11, says, on the subject of bravery, e)n qala/tth| a)deh\s o( a)ndrei=os, ou)x ou)/tw de\ w(s oi) qala/ttioi, i.e. he has not the confidence which sailors have from experience.

prosbola\s poihsa/menoi—‘after attacking’: poiei=sqai with substantives is very commonly used by Thucydides instead of the simple verb; as fugh\n poiei=sqai = ‘to fly’. The article is often added to give further definiteness: ch. 11, 13, tou\s e)pi/plous e)poiou=nto, ‘they made their attack’: i. 6, th\n di/aitan e)poih/santo, ‘they passed their lives’: i. 8, ma=llon th\n kth=sin tw=n xrhma/twn poiou/menoi, ‘increasing their wealth’, etc.

e)pe/paunto—the pluperfect shows that the Lacedaemonians had already given up the attempt to force a landing when they sent to Asine. Arnold has a good note on a similar pluperfect, ch. 47, 3, parede/donto. This construction occurs, he says, ‘when the writer wishes to describe the first in time of two events, as not only preceding the other, but as preparing the way for it; so that in describing the second event he may place the prior event before the reader's mind at the same time, as that without which the notion of the second event would be incomplete’.

e)pi\ cu/la e)s mhxana/s—meaning especially scalingladders (Poppo). pare/pemyan—‘sent along the coast’. Asine appears to have been round the promontory of Acritas (cape Gallo) on the shore of the Messenian bay. It is mentioned again as a Peloponnesian port, vi. 93.

e)lpi/zontes...e(lei=n mhxanai=s—‘expecting that though the wall over against the harbour was of some height, yet as landing was here most practicable they could take it by means of engines’. In construction e)lpi/zontes governs both e)/xein and e(lei=n, though in sense the idea of hoping refers only to e(lei=n. So far as the connecting particles are concerned this is one of the sentences in which the clause with me/n is subordinate in sense to that with de\: see note on ch. 80, 18. There is however a further difficulty, that tei=xos is the subject of e)/xein and the object of e(lei=n. Classen adopts the reading e)/xon in agreement with tei=xos, giving two antithetical clauses, the second a gen. absolute. There are no doubt instances of similar construction, but the run of the sentence is decidedly against the proposed change in the present passage.

e)lpi/zontes e(lei=n—‘hoping to take’: for the aorist infinitive see note on ch. 9, 22. ma/lista ou)/shs—so ch. 10, 15, mh\ r(a|di/ws ou)/shs. to\ kata\ to\n li/mena tei=xos—that part of the fortress which faced south, inside the entrance to the harbour.

paragi/gnontai penth/konta—‘arrive, to the number of fifty’. tessara/konta has the best manuscript authority, but fifty is the number required, for we find that the arrival of twenty ships made the fleet amount to seventy, ch. 23, 18. Thirty-five ships had sailed to Zacynthus (ch. 5) and two had been despatched thither by Demosthenes. Naupactus had been an Athenian naval station since its capture thirty years back, i. 103.

a)porh/santes o)/ph| kaqormi/swntai—‘finding no place in which to come to anchor’: so i. 107, nomi/santes a)porei=n o)/ph| die/lqwsi. kaqormi/swntai is the subj. of doubt or deliberation. It is not uncommon after a past tense, as well as after a present: see note on ch. 1, 13.

hu)li/santo—‘took up their quarters’; the Greeks if possible landing from their ships not only at night, but even to take their meals: see ch. 26, 11; 30, 4.

h)\n me\n...e)pespleusou/menoi—‘in case the enemy should be willing to sail out against them into the open sea, but if not, intending themselves to sail in to attack them’. After eu)ruxwri/an is implied ‘ready to fight there’; the former of the two alternatives not being expressed: so iii. 3, h)\n me\n cumbh=| h( pei=ra, ei) de\ mh\ k.t.l., if the attempt succeed (well and good), but if not, etc.’

ou)/te a(\ dienoh/qhsan—‘nor as it happened had they carried out what they proposed, viz. to block the entrances’; see ch. 8, 34 The Lacedaemonians seem to have been disheartened by the failure of their sea attacks; nor indeed were they ever much at home in naval operation, or ready to encounter an equal Athenian force. Moreover Brasidas, the soul of their enterprise, was now probably disabled by his wounds.

h)\n e)sple/h| tis—so ei)/ tis u)pome/noi, ch. 10, 27.

o)/nti ou) smikrw=|—‘which was of considerable size’, being in fact much the largest harbour in Greece. ou) smikro\s = me/gas, by the figure called by grammarians lito/ths ‘plainness’ or mei/wsis ‘lessening’: so ch. 25, 23, ou)k e)/lasson e)/xontes, ‘having the advantage’. The form smikro/s has good authority in vii. 75 and viii. 81, in both instances with ou).

gno/ntes—‘seeing this’: so ch. 38, 1, a)kou/santes: i. 91, a)kou/ontes: gnou/s, ib.: i. 95, ai)sqo/menoi, etc. The sense in such cases is supplied from the context.

ta\s me\n plei/ous—to this is opposed ai( de\ kai\ plhrou/menai e)/ti, line 8; tai=s de\ loipai=s, line 7, being ‘the rest’ of the ships that were mete/wroi.

metew/rous h)/dh—‘already under way’: mete/wros, lit. ‘raised from the ground’, when applied to a ship means ‘separated from the shore,’ i.e. at sea.

e)pidiw/kontes—‘pursuing them hotly, following them up closely’: so ii. 79: in. 33 etc. w(s dia\ braxe/os—‘as (they could) being but a short way off’. dia\ braxe/os, ‘separated by a short interval’: so iii. 94, dia\ pollou=, ‘far apart’ etc. The short distance between the Athenians and their foes enabled them to follow up the Lacedaemonians with effect; so Krüger and Classen. Poppo and others however take w(s dia\ braxe/os to mean ‘as (well as they could) considering the short distance from the land’. The meaning would then be that the Lacedaemonians would have suffered still more had not the shore with the protection of its friendly troops been close at hand. (For such uses of w(s see note on ch. 84, 10.) e)/trwsan—‘damaged’: so Hdt. viii. 18, tetrwme/nai, of ships. Thucydides also uses katatraumati/zw of ships, vii. 41: viii. 10, 42.

e)n th=| gh=| katapefeugui/ais—‘which had taken refuge on the land’, i.e. by running themselves ashore. The present katafeu/gw ‘to fly for refuge’ would require e)s, implying motion to; while the perfect, implying arrival and rest in the place of refuge, may be constructed with e)n. So iii. 71, oi( e)kei= katapefeugo/tes, ‘those who were in a place of refuge there’: Plat. Sophist. 260 C, e)n tou/tw| tw=| to/pw| katapefeuge/nai: cf. Rep. 519 C, e)n maka/rwn nh/sois zw=ntes e)/ti a)pw|ki/sqai. Thus be/bhka, ‘I have gone’ sometimes = ‘I stand’, e.g. Soph. Ant. 67, oi( e)n te/lei bebw=tes, ‘those who stand in authority’.

Other instances of perfect participles so constructed in Thucydides are vii. 71, oi( e)n th=| nh/sw| diabebhko/tes: ib. 87, e)n tw=| toiou/tw| xwri/w| e)mpeptwko/tas.

It is possible of course in the present instance, to take e)n th=| gh=| with e)ne/ballon only, or to understand e)s th\n gh=n with katapefeugui/ais, and the other passages quoted might be similarly explained: there is however no need for this expedient.

e)ne/ballon—‘dashed into’, often used of ships: so in the account of a sea fight in vii. 36 e)mbolh/ is used of the act of ramming or charging the enemy's ship, while e)/mbolos means the actual beak or ram. In the present chapter the different tenses give a vivid picture of the scene. First we have the instantaneous rush of the Athenians and flight of the enemy— w(/rmhsan..., kate/sthsan..., e)/trwsan... Then the changes of a protracted struggle are represented by the imperfects, e)ne/ballon...e)ko/ptonto, etc. which depict not only the progress of the fight, but the details which occurred again and again at different points (see note on ch. 3, 1). Finally the description closes with the aorist diekri/qhsan.

kai\ plhrou/menai e)/ti—‘still getting their crews on board’. e)ko/ptonto—so viii. 105, e)/kopton: ib. 13, nh=es kopei=sai, ‘shattered, crippled’.

a)nadou/menoi—‘taking in tow’: so ii. 90, tw=n new=n tina\s a)nadou/menoi ei(=lkon kena/s. The expression occurs commonly in accounts of naval actions; as does keno/s, ‘without the crew’, opposed to au/toi=s a)ndra/si, ‘men and all’.

perialgou=ntes—‘sore distressed’: so vi. 54, perialgh/sas: cf. peride/s (iii. 28), peridei/dw, periorgh/s (ch. 130, 19), perialgh/s, perixarh/s etc.

o(/ti per—‘because as a matter of fact’: like o(/per kai\ e)ge/neto, ‘which in fact came to pass’: viii. 92, dio/per (di' o(/ per), ‘for which reason in truth’: per thus used emphasizing the word with which it is connected. Classen says that the combination of o(/ti and per is not elsewhere found in Attic Greek.

au)tw=n—from its prominent position, the gen. has an emphatic force, like that of the ethical dative = ‘they saw they should lose their men’: so i. 30, e)pei\ sfw=n oi( cu/mmaxoi e)po/noun: cf. Buttmann on Dem. Meid. 520, tou\s stefa/nous tou\s xrusou=s e)pebou/leuse diafqei=rai/ mou. a)pelamba/nonto—lit. ‘were being cut off’, i.e. this was evidently a necessary concomitant of the success of the Athenians.

pareboh/qoun—this compound is especially used of the movements of troops along the shore: so i. 47: ii. 90 etc. Here it refers to the land army of the Lacedaemonians, which came to save the ships. In ii. 90 the Peloponnesians are described in nearly the same words as rushing into the sea with their arms and rescuing some triremes which the victorious Athenians were already dragging off.

kai\ e)n tou/tw| kekwlu=sqai—‘and in this struggle each man thought things at a standstill, wherever he himself was not on the spot’. This shows at once the spirit and alacrity of the Lacedaemonians, and their confusion and want of order. In similar words Thucydides describes the enthusiasm with which the Lacedaemonian allies were animated at the beginning of the war, ii. 8, e)n tou/tw| te kekwlu=sqai e)do/kei e)ka/stw|ta\ pra/gmata w)=| mh/ tis au)to/s pare/stai. e)n tou/tw|—‘meanwhile, while this was going on’. kekwlu=sqai—perf. = ‘to be stopped’, with e)/rgon as subject, or perhaps impersonal. w)=| mh/ tini ..parh=n—lit. ‘at whatsoever struggle he himself also (besides any others) was not present’. In the general conflict the fight at each point and for each particular ship was itself an e)/rgon or ‘action’.

qo/rubos—also in i. 49 and viii. 10 of the ‘confusion and tumult’ of a hotly contested sea fight.

a)nthllagme/nos—‘a complete reversal of’ lit. ‘interchanged for’, agreeing with qo/rubos and governing tro/pou: cf. iii. 82, toi=s ei)/desi dihllagme/na, ‘varying in their phenomena’ (Arn.). Classen reads a(nthllagme/nou, gen. abs. with tro/pou, ‘the fashion of the two sides being counterchanged’; on the ground that it is not easy to speak of qo/rubos as being itself ‘taken in exchange’ for the combatants' usual way of fighting. peri\ ta\s nau=s—either with tro/pou, ‘in respect of their ships’, i.e. in naval contests generally, or with e)ge/neto o( qo/rubos, for the possession of these particular ships.

oi)/ te ga\r. oi(/ te—‘on the one hand......on the other’ etc. te—te comparing and contrasting the two sides.

e)kplh/cews—‘dismay’; here it means the excitement of the Lacedaemonians in their alarm at the prospect of losing their men.

w(s ei)pei=n—like w(s e)/pos ei)pei=n, used to modify a statement which is too general or extensive, especially with pa=s or ou)dei/s. Here it modifies ou)de\n a)/llo, ‘nothing else, so to put it’: cf. vi. 30, o( a)/llos o)/milos a(/pas, w(s ei)pei=n, ‘the general multitude without exception, we may say’. The infinitive with w(s in such expressions is one of limitation, denoting a certain manner of regarding the thing in question; in this case = so far as making a statement goes: Plat. Rep. 475 D, w(s g' e)n filoso/fois tiqe)nai = ‘so far as the classing them among philosophers is to be considered’: id. Euthyph. 3 B, w(/s g' ou(twsi\ a)kou=sai, ‘just to listen to’ (Madv. § 151). a)/llo ou)de\n h)/— ‘simply, absolutely’: ii. 16: so iii. 39, ti/ a)/llo h)\ e)pebou/leusan;

e)nauma/xoun e)pezoma/xoun—the Lacedaemonian soldiers were rushing into the water, grappling the ships, and fighting against the crews of vessels which were actually afloat, while the Athenian sailors were pushing their advantage and assailing their enemies hand to hand on the shore.

th=| parou/sh| tu/xh| e)pecelqei=n—‘to prosecute their present good fortune’: so Krüger, Poppo, etc. When however this verb governs the dat. it is used of a person, meaning to proceed against, e.g. iii 38, tw=| dra/santi e)pece/rxetai, ‘retaliates on the wrongdoer’. When it means to go through with a thing, it either takes the accus., as v. 100, pa=n e)pecelqei=n, or more commonly is used without governing a case, as i. 62, e)pech=lqon diw/kontes, ‘they pushed the pursuit’. Classen therefore seems right in taking <*>h=| parou/sh| tu/xh| separately, and rendering e)pecelqei=n, ‘to carry out (their success), follow up (their victory)’. The clause thus means ‘wishing, with their present fortune, to pursue their advantage as far as possible’: v. 14, 1 confirms this view.

polu/n te—‘so after etc.’, summing up and concluding the account of the battle.

kai\ a)po\ pa/ntwn—‘who were now present in full force’: kai/ goes with pa/ntwn, i.e. besides those from Sparta and its neighbourhood; see ch. 8, 3. kata\ xw/ran—‘in their place’, i.e. making no further movement: very common literally and metaphorically: Dem. Tim. 701, kata\ xw/ran de\ me/nein tou\s a)/llous (no/mous) e)a=n. e)pi\ th=| *pu/lw|—‘over against, watching’: v. 7, e)pi\ th=| *qra|kh|, ‘commanding Thrace’.

e)/docen. ta\ te/lh kataba/ntas—‘it was determined that the authorities should go down etc.’ ta\ te/lh, being equivalent to tou\s e/n te/lei, has the masculine plural kataba/ntas: we have also the neuter construction, i. 58, ta\ te/lh u)pe/sxeto au)toi=s: and a neuter participle in combination with a plural verb, ch. 88, 7, ta\ te/lh o)mo/santa au)to\n e)ce/pemyan. a)rxh/ is similarly used for ‘a proper authority’ (h) a)rxh/ = oi( or o( e)n th=| a)rxh=|: ai( a)rxai/ = oi( e)n tai=s a)rxai=s): i. 90, ou) prosh/|ei pro\s ta\s a)rxa/s: so v. 47, ai( e)/ndhmoi a)rxai/, ‘the (several) home authorities’: cf. ch. 53, 10. By a similar usage we say the government, the church, the board, the great powers, etc. from a natural tendency to regard the office more than its incumbent in speaking of things which have an official rather than a personal bearing.

w(s e)pi/—‘on the strength of, in circumstances of’.

bouleu/ein—‘to deliberate’, so often: in aor. ‘to resolve’. In iii. 42, however, tw=| plei=sta eu)= bouleu/onti means ‘to him who advises best’. According to the general use of such words the active would mean to ‘give counsel’, the middle to ‘take counsel’, or deliberate; but Thuc. uses several verbs in the active in senses for which other writers employ the middle. paraxrh=ma— ‘at once, seeing (the actual state of things)’: pro\s to\ xrh=ma is also read, but on worse authority.

ti paqei=n—‘that anything should befall them’, i.e. that they should die: cf. ch. 38, 11. Many manuscripts read h)/ before krathqh=nai, giving the sense ‘that they should run the risk either of death from famine or in battle, or of being taken prisoners’.

ta\ peri\ *pu/lon—‘as concerns Pylos’: an adverbial expression, cf. note on ta\ pro\s to\ pe/lagos, ch. 23, 15.

to\n lo/gon—‘the proposition’: v. 37, dexome/nous to\n lo/gon. The plural ‘propositions, terms’ in general, is more commonly used. e)gi/gnonto—‘was made’; impf. because the writer now gives the terms which the contracting parties went on to arrange, a matter taking some little time; on the conclusion of which he uses the aor. e)ge/nonto, line 25.

toiai/de—‘on the following terms’. The conditions are given in the acc. and infin. construction, ‘The Lacedaemonians to give up, etc.’, ‘it is agreed’ being understood. The same construction is followed in citing laws, decrees of the assembly, etc.

makrai/—i.e. ships of war, opp. to nau=s stroggulh (ii. 97), ‘a round ship’, i.e. with a capacious hull, fit for conveying cargo, o)lka/s and ploi=on are also terms applied to merchant ships.

o(/pla mh\ e)pife/rein—with dat.: ch. 78, 26, *)aqhnai/ois o(/pla e)pife/rein: v. 18, e)p' *)aqhnai/ous.

takto/n—‘fixed in quantity’: ch. 65, 6, takto\n a)rgu/rion, ‘a fixed sum’. memagme/non—‘kneaded’, i.e. prepared and probably ready baked. The amount specified is a day's allowance. xoi=nic = 1/48 me/dimnos, about a quart; kotu/lh, about half a pint. Two xoi/nikes of meal and one kotu/lh of wine was the portion sent to the houses of the Spartan kings when they did not dine at the public table (Hdt. vi. 57): one xoi=nic of meal a day, according to commentators, was considered a slave's proper allowance. kre/as—‘meat’; no particular quantity is specified. It may be conjectured that some words giving the measure have been omitted, or that kre/as means a portion of meat of definite size. Krüger quotes Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 2, e)ge/neto e(ka/stw| h(mw=n tri/a kre/a: cf. also Ar. Ran. 553, kre/a a)na/brast' ei)/kosin.

o(/sa mh\ a)pobai/nontas—‘provided only they do not land’, lit. ‘in all (that they can do) not landing’: i. 111, th=s gh=s e)kra/toun o(/sa mh\ proi+o/ntes polu\ e)k tw=n o(/plwn, ‘they were masters of the country except in so much as they could not advance any great distance from their headquarters’.

o(/ ti d' a)/n—‘and whatsoever of these provisions (either of) the two contracting parties shall transgress in what respect soever, the truce be then and there at an end’. o(/ ti and o(tiou=n are both acc. after parabai/nwsin, kai/ not meaning ‘and’ but emphasizing o(tiou=n. Either the construction is a species of apposition, or o(tiou=n is a determinant accusative denoting the part of the object to which the action of the verb extends (Madvig, § 31). Similarly we have in 123, 5, e)/stin a(\ parabai/nein ta\s sponda/s, ‘to transgress the truce in certain particulars’.

The construction of to/te lelu/sqai is slightly irregular, as if h)/n ti had gone before instead of o(/ ti a)/n. Such irregularities with o(/stis are common: cf. Plat. Euthyph. 3 D, where we have a)/n tina oi)/wntai followed by d\n d' a)\n oi)/wntai with no other change of constr.: also notes on Soph. Trach. 96, klai=e d' o)rga/nwn o(/tou yausei=en. lelu/sqai gives the sense that on any violation of the terms the truce is to be considered as thereby terminated, the perfect inf. denoting the complete accomplishment of a thing, and the state produced by such complete accomplishment: ch. 46, 17, w(/ste a(/pasi lelu/sqai ta\s sponda/s: so e)spei=sqai, line 19, ‘the truce be (now considered as) concluded’. e)spei=sqai (pf. pass. spe/ndomai) and e)/speisto occur iii. 111.

me/xri ou(=—‘until they shall have returned’. The subj. without a)\n after relatives and conjunctions of time, denoting present or future contingency, is usually regarded as a poetical construction. It is however far from uncommon in Thucydides: iii. 28, me/xri ou(= ti do/ch|, ‘till something shall have been determined’: i. 13, me/xri (conj.) plou=s ge/nhtai, ‘till the ship shall have put to sea’, etc.

Speech of the Lacedaemonian envoys before the public assembly on their arrival at Athens. It is marked by a tone of somewhat arrogant superiority. They invite the Athenians to secure peace by restoring the captives, and enlarge upon the uncertainty of fortune and the folly of trusting to it. They do not however suggest any concessions on their own part, but rather imply that an end of the war is a boon which the Athenians would gladly secure on any terms.

pra/contas o(/ ti...oi)/sein—‘to effect such an arrangement as may at the same time prove acceptable to you from the advantages which it offers, and may be most conducive to our honour in the circumstances of our present misfortune’. The construction after o)/ ti a)/n is slightly varied, u(mi=n te w)fe/limon o)\n pei/qwmen corresponding to kai\ h(mi=n me/llh| oi)/sein. This modification is adapted to the sense of the passage. The first clause relates to the Athenians, who require to be convinced that the terms were good for them; the second concerns Lacedaemonian interests, which need not be pressed upon the audience. As the sentence stands o(/ ti is acc. after pei/qwmen, while it supplies the nom. to me/llh|: so ii. 84, pneu=ma o(/per a)name/nwn te perie/plei kai\ ei)/wqei gi/gnesqai, ‘which he was waiting for and (which) usually sprang up’: cf. Madv. § 104; and see note on ch. 67, 6.

o(/ ti a)\n...pei/qwmen—‘whatsoever we may persuade you of’: ch. 22, 4, o(/ ti a)\n pei/qwsi. u(mi=n te w)fe/limon o)\n to\ au)to/ forms the predicate to o(/ ti, ‘(as) being at the same time (to\ au)to/) advantageous to you’. For to\ au)to/ cf. iii. 47, to\ *kle/wnos to\ au)to\ di/kaion kai\ cu/mforon, ‘Cleon's coincidence of justice and interest’: so Cic. de Off. i. 19, 63, viros fortes et magnanimos, eosdem bonos et simplices esse volumus, ‘at the same time’.

e)s th\n cumfora/n—‘in respect of, in relation to’. w(s e)k tw=n paro/ntwn, ‘as far as present circumstances will admit’: vi. 70, w/s e)k tw=n paro/ntwn suntaca/menoi, ‘forming their ranks as well as they could’: ii. 3, w\s e)k tw=n duna/twn. In such expressions e)k gives the origin from which the result spoken of arises, and in accordance with which it is characterised. ko/smon—‘honour, credit’: i. 5, ko/smos kalw=s tou=to dra=n: Hdt. viii. 60, e)/fere/ oi( ko/smon.

makrote/rous—pred., with mhkunou=men, ‘prolong to greater length (than is our wont)’. ou) negatives para\ to\ ei)wqo/s only, and does not affect the rest of the sentence; the sense of which is, ‘our speaking at length will not be contrary to our custom’. Grote (vol. iv. ch. 52) misunderstands the sentence, saying that the envoys ‘prefaced their address with some apologies for the brevity of speech which belonged to their country’, whereas in fact they give reasons for departing from it. The laconic style of speech was proverbial. It was in accordance with the character of reserved and self-contained strength which the Spartans were careful to keep up.

a)ll' e)pixw/rion o)/n—lit. ‘but (we shall do so) it being our country's custom etc.’, i.e. we shall be carrying out our principles by speaking at length on a due occasion. e)pixw/rion o)/n stands in opposition to para\ to\ ei(wqo/s. The construction is accus. abs., like e)co/n, ‘it being lawful’, ei)rhme/non ‘it having been ordered’, etc.; which construction is admissible in impersonal expressions with o)/n and an adjective: so vii. 44, a)du/naton o)/n, ‘it being impossible’.

ou(= a)rkw=si—subj. without a)/n: see note on ch. 16, 19.

plei/osi de/—with this is probably to be supplied lo/gois xrh=sqai, ‘but (to employ) more (words)’; the relative clause with e)n w(=| lasting to the end of the sentence, and pra/ssein being dependent on kairo/s, ‘whenever it is a proper time to effect our object etc.’ It is however possible to make the relative clause consist simply of e)n w)=| a)\n kairo\s h)=|, in which case plei/osi agrees with lo/gois in line 10, and pra/ssein, like xrh=sqai in line 8, depends on e)pixw/rion o)/n.

kairo/s—‘due occasion, opportunity’, without art.: ch. 27, 23, kairo\n parie/ntas: iii. 13, kairo\s de\ w(s ou)/pw pro/teron.

prou)/rgou—‘of importance’, contracted for pro\ e)/rgou. A declinable comparative form is found iii. 109, prou)rgiai/teron e)poih/santo, ‘they considered of more importance’.

lo/gois—‘by the use of words’, may be governed either by dida/skontas or by pra/ssein. The run of the words seems slightly in favour of connecting it with pra/ssein, but it may perhaps be affected by both: see note on ch. 40, 13.

la/bete de/—‘and listen to them, not in a hostile spirit, but etc.’ mh/ deprecates polemi/ws, and must not be taken with la/bete, the aor. imperat. not being used in prohibition, for which mh\ la/bhte would be required.

u(po/mnhsin—‘a reminder’, with gen.: i. 72, u(po/mnhsin w(=n h)/|desan. pro\s ei)do/tas—‘to men who know (what good counsel is)’: Pericles says he will not makrhgorei=n e)n ei/do/sin, ii. 36: so ch. 59, 7, ti/ a)/n tis e)n ei/do/si makrhgoroi/h; v. 89, e)pistame/nous pro\s ei/do/tas: Dem. Androt. 613, w(s ei)do/si me\n i)/sws, o(mw=s de\ e)rw=.

kalw=s qe/sqai—‘to make a good use of’, lit. ‘to order, arrange, dispose for yourselves’; used especially of good or bad fortune, and its resulting circumstances, sometimes with an idea of securing or investing: cf. ch. 18, 14: i. 25, e)n a)po/rw| ei)/xonto qe/sqai to\ paro/n, ‘they were at a loss how to settle the question’ (see Classen's full note).

e)/xousi...proslabou=si—agreeing with umi=n: note the difference of tense in these participles. mh\ paqei=n—after e)/cesti, = ‘to avoid’, lit. ‘not to have that happen to you’; in sense but little different from ‘not to do’, but less harsh and direct. A Greek speaker avoids suggesting that his audience will do what is injudicious or foolish. He warns them lest an error should befall them. o(/per—sc. pa/sxousi: cf. vii. 61, ou)de\ pa/sxein o(/per oi( a)peiro/tatoi tw=n a)nqrwpwn.

tou= ple/onos—‘more’, gov. by o)re/gontai: ch. 21, 8, tou= de\ ple/onos w)re/gonto: ch. 92, 13, tou= plei/onos o)rego/menos: cf. ch. 30, 23, peri\ tou= ple/onos. In these cases the definite article probably denotes the larger remaining part of a whole amount contemplated as attainable, the smaller portion of which is already attained. e)lpi/di—with o)re/gontai, ‘they grasp at in hope’.

ta\ paro/nta—cognate accusative with eu)tuxh=sai: vi. 23, plei/w eu(tuxh=sai, ‘to be fortunate in’.

e)p' a)mfo/tera—i.e. for the better or the worse: so i. 83; ii. 11: Dem. Lept. 471, mete/pipte ta\ pra/gmata e)p' a)mfo/ tera.

di/kaioi/ ei)si—‘have just reason to be most distrustful’: so Hdt. ix. 60, di/kaioi/ e)ste i)e/nai, ‘you are bound in justice to come’: see the note on ch. 10, 17, r(a=|stoi/ ei)sin a)mu/nesqai. o)/pistos, ‘distrustful’, is used with the dative, Plat. Apol. 26 E, a)/pistos ei)= sautw=|: Dem. Fals. Leg. 349, a)/pistos pro\s *fi/lippon.

gnw=te de/—‘and see (the truth of this)’. a)pido/ntes— lit. ‘looking away at’: a)po/ compounded with ble/pw etc. is especially used of looking at a standard or authority, e.g. of a painter looking at his model. oi(/tines—‘we who’, with h(mete/ras.

pro/teron au)toi\ kuriw/teroi—‘though we formerly thought ourselves more able to grant that for which we are now come, making our request to you’: cf. ch. 20, 12, u(ma=s ai)tiwte/rous h(gh/sontai: ib. 15, h)=s nu=n u(mei=s to\ ple/on ku/rioi/ e)ste, ‘which now rests with you in the greater measure’. nomi/zontes is imperfect in sense, ‘we had been thinking’ (till this happened).

ou(/te duna/mews e)ndei/a|...ou(/te u(bri/santes—‘neither from deficiency of strength,...nor because we became arrogant’. e)pa/qomen au)to/—‘it befell us’, i.e. that we should be thus obliged to sue for terms. au)to/ and au)ta/ are not uncommonly used in this way, to denote the circumstances, or state of things spoken of in the context: e.g. i. 69, ou)x o( doulwsa)menos a)ll' o( duna/menos me\n pau=sai periorw=n de\ a)lhqe/steron au)to\ dra=|, i.e. is the true cause of the allies being enslaved. mei/zonos—sc. duna/mews. prosgenome/nhs—‘being added’, opposed to e)ndei/a|, ‘falling short’.

a)po/ de\ tw=n a)ei u(parxo/ntwn—sc. e)pa/qomen au)to/, ‘going upon, starting from our regular resources’: ii. 91, a)po\ a)ntipa/lou paraskeuh=s. gnw/mh| sfale/ntes—‘failing in our calculations’. gnw/mh, denoting generally ‘what one has in one's mind’, is used in various shades of meaning implying resolution, judgment, opinion, etc. Here it means the calculation which the Spartans had formed that they could easily recover Pylos; cf. ch. 5. For the dat. gnw/mh| Poppo compares vi. 78, gnw/mh| a\martei=n: on the other hand we have sfalei=si gnw/mhs, ch. 28, 30: so sfale/ntes do/chs, ch. 85, 6. Similarly we say disappointed in, or disappointed of, our expectations.

e)n w(=|—‘in which matter’, i.e. in the liability to fail. pa=si...u(pa/rxei—‘the same (chance) awaits all alike’.

po/lew/s te kai\ tw=n prosgegenhme/nwn—‘of your city and its acquisitions’, that is of the dominion which Athens had gained during late years, perhaps referring also to the recent success at Pylos. The omission of the article with po/lews is noticeable, especially with th/n preceding. We have, i. 10, cunoikisqei/shs po/lews: ii. 72, po/lin kai\ oi/ki/as para/dote, in each instance of a definite city. The explanation seems to be that words like po/lis acquire in such cases a definiteness like that of a proper name, and therefore do not need the article to define them further. So we often have pai=des kai\ gunai=kes without an article, as in i. 89: so iii. 50, *mutilhnai/wn tei/xh kaqei=lon kai\ nau=s pare/labon: so ch. 31, 9, me/son k.t.l. In the present sentence po/lews kai\ tw=n prosgegenhme/nwn taken together make up the idea ‘of your present empire’.

to\ th=s tu/xhs—‘what belongs to fortune’: also found vii. 61: ch. 55, 19, ta\ th=s tu/xhs: ii. 60. ta\ th=s o)rgh=s.

swfro/nwn de\...h(gh/swntai—‘Now they are wise men who secure their advantages against a day of danger, (and these same men would show more sense in dealing with misfortunes), and as to war, are convinced that it can not be engaged in just so far as a man may wish to take it in hand, but (must go on) as its vicissitudes may determine’. The general sense of the passage is clear, that prudent men will not presume on a continuance of good fortune, especially in war. The grammatical form of the sentence has however given rise to much discussion, and requires close attention. Following oi(/tines we have three clauses, ta)gaqa\...e)/qento,—kai\...prosfe/rointo,—to/n te...h(lh/swntai. Each of these clauses varies in construction, and will require to be examined in detail.

swfro/nwn de\.. oi(/tines—=‘they are prudent men who’. This construction is probably a confusion between sw/frones a)/ndres ei/si\n oi(/tines e)/qento and swfro/nwn de\ a)ndrw=n e)sti\ to\ qe/sqai, ‘it is the part of prudent men to secure’: so iii. 45, pollh=s eu)hqei/as, o(/stis oi)/etai, ‘it shows great simplicity when a man thinks’: vi. 14, to\ kalw=s a)/rcai tou=t' ei)=nai, o(\s a)/n, ‘this is a proper discharge of official duty, when’: Xen. Anab. ii. 5. 21, a)po/rwn e)sti\..., oi(/tines. The genitive in these phrases gives the characteristic which belongs to the persons spoken of (Madvig, § 54). This explanation of the passage, for which there seems fully sufficient support, is adopted by the majority of editors; Classen however considers that the gen. is partitive, and that ou(=toi/ ei/sin is understood; the sense would thus be, ‘they are of the class of prudent men who, etc.’

ta)laqa\...e)/qento—aor. denoting what is wont to happen (having happened in other supposed instances), to be translated by our present (Madvig, § 111, R. 3). It is a question whether e)/qento is to be taken in close connexion with a)sfalw=s or e)s a)mfi/bolon. In the former case, a)sfalw=s e)/qento is a phrase like kalw=s qe/sqai, ch. 17, 14, and means ‘to order safely’, i.e. to secure, by making good terms; while e)s a)mfi/bolon is ‘in reference to, with a view to (a time of) doubt’. In the latter case, e)s a)mfi/bolon qe/sqai means ‘to reckon as doubtful’, tiqe/nai e)s meaning ‘to put down to, count among’, while the middle gives the sense ‘in their own case’: so Hdt. iii. 3, e)n timh=| ti/qetai, ‘holds in honour’. The clause then means ‘who safely reckon their gains as doubtful’, i.e. know they may lose them again, and so run no needless risks.

kai\...prosfe/rointo—by most editors taken as a parenthesis, ‘now these same men would, etc.’ Others take it as a second clause with oi(/tines, ‘and who would also, etc.’ making oi( au)toi\ a predicate like to\ au)to/, ch. 17, 3. This however merely gives the somewhat feeble sense that prudent men would be more likely to act with prudence; and the former view is preferable. prosfe/resqai—‘to behave oneself towards, deal with’: vi. 44, pro\s ta\ pra/gmata prosoi/sontai: more commonly used of dealing with persons, either with dat., as v. 111, or with a prep., as v. 105, etc.

to/n te po/lemon—‘and as regards war, are convinced, etc.’ Instead of the aor. indic. to correspond to e)/qento, we have vomi/swsi, as if oi(/tines a)/n had gone before. Such a subj. with a)/n is equivalent to the Latin 2nd future, ‘shall have taken the view’, i.e. once for all. The position of po/lemon is in favour of regarding it as the subject to cunei=nai: in which case tou/tw| must refer either to tis or to me/ros, the meaning being either ‘that it abides with this man’, or ‘that it restricts itself to this part’. The former gives the better sense, that po/lemos is a potent thing, which when once called up, can not be got rid of at pleasure. So war is as it were personified in such expressions as i. 78, mhkuno/menos (po/lemos) filei= e)s tu/xas ta\ polla\ perii/stasqai: i. 122, po/lemos h(/kista e/pi\ r(htoi=s xwrei=, ‘proceeds least of all on fixed conditions’: ii. 36, po/lemon e)pio/nta a)mu/nesqai. Some editors take tis as the subject of cunei=nai and tou/tw| as referring to po/lemos or me/ros, ‘that a man can deal with this’, viz. with war, or a particular part of it: but this is more than doubtful in construction, though it gives a reasonable sense.

a)ll' w(s a)/n—‘but (that it abides with him, tou/tw| cu/nesti) just as, etc.’ ai( tu/xai—‘the phases of fortune’; as in the passage from i. 78 cited above. au)tw=n—neut. governed by tu/xai, referring either to the different stages of the war (me/rh) or generally to ta\ tou= pole/mou: cf. note on line 6. h(lh/swntai— ‘may have led the way’. By some au)tw=n is taken as masculine, governed by h(lh/swntai, ‘may have led them (those engaged in war) on’, the sense of au)tw=n being supplied from tis.

kai\ e)la/xist' a)/n—in this sentence we have metaphors derived from stumbling (ptai/ontes), standing upright (tw=| o)rqoume(nw|), and being lifted up (e)pai/resqai). a)/n, which in construction goes with katalu/ointo, is placed, as is often the case, at the beginning of the sentence, to show its contingent character, and repeated later on; so i. 36, braxuta/tw| d' a)\n kefalai/w|...tw=|d' a)\n ma/qoite, etc. e)la/xista ptai/ontes—‘making the fewest trips’. katalu/ointo a)/n—‘would make terms’: so i. 81, etc.: we have also katalu/ein po/lemon, ‘to give up fighting’, vii. 31, and kataluein without a case (in the words of a treaty), v. 23, viii. 23.

o(/—viz. to make terms while successful. kai\ mh\ .. nomisqh=nai—dependent on kalw=s e)/xei, ‘and (so) to avoid being thought, etc.’

h)\n a)/ra—‘if, after all, you reject our terms and meet with failure’: for a)/ra cf. note on ch. 8, 24. a(\ polla\ e)nde/xetai— a(\ is cognate acc. after sfallesqai, which is understood after e)nde/xetai: polla/ is predicative, ‘failure which is possible in many ways’.

kai\ ta\ nu=n proxwrh/santa krath=sai—‘to have won even your present successes’; krath=sai governed by nomisqh=nai. Such words often take a neut. acc. carrying on the idea of the verb: so ch. 19, 10, e)pikrath/sas ta\ ple/w. proxwrh/santa—cf. i. 109, w(s au)tw=| ou) prou)xw/rei, ‘when his design did not succeed’: v. 37, tou/tou proxwrh/santos, ‘when this was secured’. do/khsis —‘credit, reputation’: ii. 35, h( do/khsis th=s a)lhqei/as.

*lakedaimo/nioi de/—‘now the Lacedaemonians invite you’; de/ introduces the terms actually proposed, after the general observations with which the speakers had begun. So, in other speeches of envoys, after some preliminary words, we have the question at issue brought in with de/: i. 32, *kerkurai=oi de\...a)pe/steilan h(ma=s: iii. 10, h(mi=n de\...cummaxi/a e)ge/neto.

dia/lusin pole/mou—cf. line 10, dialu/esqai: iii. 114, dialu/ein po/lemon. kata/lusis pole/mou is found ch. 118, 60 and viii. 18 (in the words of treaties).

dido/ntes—‘offering’: so ch. 21, 4, didome/nhs: i. 85, e)pi\ to\n dido/nta (di/kas), ‘against him who is ready to give satisfaction’. The inf. u(pa/rxein is added to define the result looked for, ‘for this to subsist between us’: Xen. Anab. i. 6. 6. 6, tou=ton e)/dwken u(ph/koon ei)=nai e)moi/. a)/llhn—‘in general, in other respects’: i. 2, ou)/te mege)qei po/lewn i)/sxuon ou)/te th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=|. oi)keio/thta— ‘friendly understanding’.

tou\s e)k—cf. ch. 8, 1. diakinduneu/esqai—‘that the hazard should be risked to the utmost’, lit. risked out (dia/), passive impersonal: so i. 73, e)p' w)feli/a| e)kinduneu/eto, etc. (mid. Cobet).

ei)/te bi/a| diafu/goien—dependent on diakinduneu/esqai, ‘whether they might escape’, the optative of deliberation after a past tense; like i. 25, e)ph/ronto ei) paradoi=en, ‘asked if they were to give up’. It carries back the idea of h(gou/menoi to the time when the Lacedaemonians decided to send their envoys.

paratuxou/shs—cf. pare/tuxen o( kairo/s, ch. 103, 14: viii. 11, e(/ws o)/n tis paratu/xh| diafugh/, ‘till some means of escape offer’: so parape/soi, ch. 23, 21.

ma=llon a)\n xeirwqei=en—‘they might be likely to be still more reduced within your power’. The construction is slightly changed by the introduction of a)/n with the optative; the Lacedaemonians not choosing to speak of the capture of their countrymen except as a matter of contingent possibility.

a)ntamuno/menos—cf. line 17: iii. 84.

e)pikrath/sas ta\ ple/w—‘having proved victorious in most points of the war’. For ta\ ple/w, cf. ch. 18, 24: so vii. 63, ta\ plei/w e)pikratei=n. Instead of pole/mou Classen reads polemi/ou, ‘having got the better of his enemy’, thus supplying an object to e)gkatalamba/nwn and defining au)to/n in line 15.

e)gkatalamba/nwn—‘binding his foe down in (an agreement)’, with kat' a)na/gkhn and o(/rkois: so ch. 86, 3, o(/rkois katalabw/n: i. 9, o(/rkois kateilhmme/nous. mh\ a)po\ tou= i)/sou cumbh=|— ‘shall make peace on unequal terms’: iii. 11, a)po\ tou= i)/sou o(milou=ntes, etc.

paro\n to\ au)to\ dra=sai—‘though it is in his power to do the same’. i.e. to impose harsh conditions: pro\s to\ e)pieike/s, etc. going with what follows. Classen however connects pro\s to\ e)pieike/s with dra=sai, and renders ‘when he can effect the same end (i.e. secure peace) in the way of moderation’. Krüger takes the same view, but connects kai\ a)reth=| also with dra=sai. pro\s to\ e)pieike/s—‘having regard to what is moderate and equitable’: i. 76, e)k tou= e)pieikou=s, ‘from our moderation’: iii. 4. o(mologi/a| e)pieikei=, ‘on fair terms’. In the philosophical language of Aristotle e)piei/keia is equity, as opposed to strict justice.

kai\ a)reth=| au)to\n nikh/sas—‘having also conquered him in generosity’. Arnold quotes Eur. Herc. Fur. 339, a)reth=| se nikw=, qnhto\s w)/n, qeo\n me/gan. au(to/n—his adversary; even if we do not read polemi/ou with Classen, there seems no difficulty in supplying this sense, as the enemy is certainly to be understood as the object of e)gkat. Krüger reads au(to\n nikh/sas, ‘having subdued himself’. The reading of most manuscripts is au)to\ nikh/sas, which would give the sense, ‘having got the better of it’, i.e. of his wish to insist upon severe terms.

para\ a(\ prosede/xeto—‘contrary to what (his enemy) looked for’. Poppo regards prosede/xeto as passive, but admits that there is no similar example in good Greek; Kruger suggests the plpf. prosede/dekto in pass. sense. metri/ws cunallagh=|—‘shall agree upon moderate terms’: viii. 90, cunallagh=nai pro\s tou\s *lakedaimoni/ous: in act., v. 45, ‘to settle differences’.

o)fei/lwn—‘being bound, being under obligation’. a)ntapodou=nai a)reth/n—‘to show generosity in return’: cf. ii. 40, e)s o)fei/lhma th\n a)reth\n a)podw/swn, ‘as an obligation’. ai)sxu/nh|—the ‘sense of shame’ which makes a man shrink from doing what would be dishonourable: it may sometimes be rendered honour or self-respect.

pro\s tou\s meizo/nws e)xqrou/s—‘in dealing with those who are more deeply their enemies’. tou\s to\ me/tria dienexqe/ntas—‘those who quarrelled with them in small things’, a construction like ta\ ple)w, line 12. diafe/resqai—‘to be at variance with’: v. 31, diafero/menoi toi=s *lakedaimoni/ois.

a)nqhssa=sqai—‘to make counter-concessions’, a rare word, which here, like other verbs of giving way to, takes the dative of the person in whose favour the concessions are made. In the same sense we have in ch. 64, 8, o(/son ei)ko\s h(ssa=sqai: so i. 77, e)lassou/menoi, ‘a bating our strict rights’. h(ssa/omai usually means ‘to be worsted’, or with gen. ‘to yield to’: cf. ch. 37, 7. The dat. iii. 38, a)koh=s h\donh=| h(ssw/menoi, is ‘overcome by your delight in listening’.

pro\s ta\ u(perauxou=nta—‘against overweening arrogance’, neuter instead of masculine: so ii. 45, fqo/nos toi=s zw=si pro\s to\ a(nti/palon, ‘jealousy is felt by living men against rival claims’, etc. kai\ para\ gnw/mhn—‘even against their better judgment’: i. 70, para\ gnw/mhn kinduneutai/: vi. 9, ei)=pon para\ gnwmhn.

h( cunallagh/—‘the (proposed) agreement’.

ti a(nh/keston—‘some irremediable thing’, a euphemistic expression for the death of their countrymen. So the Lacedaemonians hesitated in the case of Pausanias bouleu=sai ti a(nh/keston, i.e. to decree his death (i. 132), where also we have another euphemism, new/tero/n ti poiei=n e)s au)to/n, i.e. to slay him. dia\ me/sou geno/menon—‘intervening’; v. 26, h( dia\ me/sou cu/mbasis. katalabei=n—‘befall us’, with acc., a common constr. in Herod.; e.g. ii. 66, qei=a prh/gmata katalamba/nei tou\s ai/elou/rous, ‘wondrous things befall the cats’: in Thuc. it is elsewhere found without a case, as in ii. 18, o(po/te po/lemos katala/boi, ‘whenever war befell’.

e)n w(=|—‘in which case’. u(mi=n—‘against you’, after e)/xqran e)/xein: Classen reads h(mi=n, ‘it would be necessary for us to have’.

pro\s th=| koinh=| kai\ i)di/an—the ‘private hatred’ which would thus be caused is usually understood as the feud which the individual families of Sparta would cherish against the Athenians for the death of their relations, in addition to the national (koinh/) hostility already felt. Grote however considers the i)di/a e)/xqra to be ‘a new and inexpiable ground of quarrel, peculiar to Sparta herself’, while the koinh e)/xqra is that of the Peloponnesian confederacy, the whole war having been begun in consequence of the complaints of the allies, and to redress their wrongs, not those of Sparta individually (Grote, vol. iv. ch. 52).

Jowett observes that the speaker is attracted by a connexion of sound, and perhaps by a fancied connexion of sense or etymology between a)i+/dion and i)di/an: so ch. 63, 9: 87. 28.

e)/ti d' o)/ntwn a)kri/twn—‘while matters are still undecided’, neut. gen. abs.: so i. 7, plwimwte/rwn o(/ntwn, ‘when navigation was advanced’: Hdt. vii. 37, e)pinefe/lwn e)o/ntwn, ‘the sky being cloudy’. The number and variety of instances of the gen. abs. in this chapter is remarkable.

cumfora=s metri/ws katatiqeme/nhs—‘our disaster being settled on tolerable terms’ (Arn.): so i. 121, kataqhso/meqa po/lemon, ‘we will settle or conclude the war’, opposed to e)gei/romen: Dem. Fals. Leg. 425, to\n po/lemon kate/qento. We have vi. 11, to\ sfe/teron a)prepe\s eu)= qh/sontai=‘they will retrieve their honour’: see also note on ch. 17, 14, kalw=s qe/sqai. katati/qesqai commonly means to ‘lay up in store for oneself’, e g. ch. 57, 22, and iii. 72, of depositing hostages in a place of safety: i. 128, of bestowing a favour or benefit, etc.

diallagw=men—‘let us be reconciled’: in act. vi. 47, *selinounti/ous dialla/cai au)toi=s, ‘to reconcile the men of Selinus to them’.

polemou=ntai—according to Classen from polemo/w, ‘they are made enemies’: i. 36, oi)keiou=tai/ te kai\ polemou=tai, ‘becomes your friend or your enemy’: i. 57, *perdi/kkas e)pepole/mwto, etc. So far as form goes it might equally well come from poleme/w, which is often used in the passive: e.g i. 37, polemou=ntai, ‘they are attacked’.

a)safw=s o(pote/rwn a)rca/ntwn—‘without knowing clearly which of us began’, lit. ‘from which of the two sides having begun (they are thus at war)’. With the adverb a)safw=s, which is used emphatically as is common in Thuc., is connected an indirect question expressed by the gen. absolute with a verb implied, the phrase being equivalent to a)/dhlon o)\n o(pote/rwn a)rca/ntwn (sc. polemou=ntai). The following is a somewhat similar construction with gen. abs., Dem. Aph. i. 829, a)\n e)/xein me fh=|, ti/nos parado/ntos e)rwta=te au)to/n, ‘if he says I have it, ask him who paid it me’, lit. ‘by whose payment (I have it)’. The statement of the envoys seems somewhat at variance with facts, as it could hardly be supposed by any that the Athenians had begun the war.

th\n xa/rin—‘the gratitude which they will feel for peace’. prosqh/sousi—‘they will put down, ascribe, pay’.

h)/n te gnw=te—‘so if you decide to accept our proposals’; te sums up and resumes the argument. *lakedaimoni/ois e)/cestin—‘it is in your power to become friends to the Lacedaemonians’; fi/lous refers to u(mi=n; see note on ch. 2, 11; here this construction avoids confusion. In the following clauses au)tw=n te prokalesame/nwn (gen. abs.) refers to the Lacedaemonians, while xarisame/nois and biasame/nois belong to u(mi=n.

ta\ e)no/nta a)gaqa/—‘the advantages involved’. Note the position of ta\ e)no/nta a)gaqa/, and to\ a)/llo *(ellhniko/n: the most important words being put early in the clauses for the sake of emphasis.

tau)ta\ lego/ntwn—‘holding the same language’, i.e. pursuing the same policy: so v. 31, to\ au)to\ le/gontes. ‘That the jealousy of the other Hellenes was speedily aroused by a temporary combination of the Lacedaemonians and Athenians, which they regarded as a conspiracy against their liberties, we learn from v 59: cf. Ar. Pax, 1082, e)co\n speisame/nois koinh=| th=s *(ella/dos a)/rxein’ (Jowett).

e)piqumei=n—imperfect, ‘had been desiring’. In construction all the infinitives in this sentence depend on nomi/zontes, but in sense the idea of thinking belongs particularly to de/cesqai and a)podw/sein. The meaning is ‘the Lacedaemonians thought that, as the Athenians had all along been desirous of peace, they would now be glad to make it’: cf. note on ch. 13, 5, e)lpi/zontes to\ tei=xos u(/yos me\n e)/xein, a)poba/sews de\ ou)/shs e(lei=n. sfw=n de\ e)nantioume/nwn—so in vii. 18 we find the Lacedaemonians admitting that they had forced on the war, and incurred the guilt of refusing negotiations. In 430, the second year of the war, the Athenians had made fruitless proposals for peace (ii. 59).

e(toi/mous—according to Poppo, Classen, etc. fem. agreeing with sponda/s, ‘ready for them’. There is good authority in viii. 26 for nh=es e(toi=moi, and e(toi=mos fem. is found in Hdt. and Dem. Elsewhere however Thuc. has e(toi/mh; for which reason Krüger takes e(toi/mous as agreeing with *lakedaimoni/ous understood. In this view poiei=sqai is to be taken after e(toi/mous, ‘thinking that the Lacedaemonians were ready to make the truce etc.’ Besides the difficulty of thus supplying an object to e)no/mizon, this involves the further awkwardness that pro\s au)tou/s (as well as sfi/si) must then be taken as referring to the Athenians.

e)nh=ge—‘urged on’: ch. 24, 5, note. *kle/wn o( *kleaine/tou —Cleon is first mentioned by Thucydides in iii. 36, where he urges the necessity of putting to death the whole of the revolted Mytileneans (B.C. 427). He is then described in very similar words as w)\n kai\ e)s ta\ a)/lla biaio/tatos tw=n politw=n tw=| te dhmw| para\ polu\ e)n tw=| tote piqanw/tatos. It appears from Plutarch (Nicias ch. 2) that he had already come into notice during the lifetime of Pericles. It is difficult to form a just estimate of the character of Cleon. He is known to us almost entirely through Thucydides and Aristophanes, the former certainly not his friend, the latter his bitter enemy. There can be little doubt that he was loud, overbearing, and violent; but he seems to have been by no means without patriotism and political ability. At the present time he was undeniably right in insisting upon substantial concessions before giving up the advantage which the Athenians had gained; though his conduct was such as to render successful negotiation almost hopeless.

dhmagwgo/s—‘leader of the people’, a word not used elsewhere by Thucydides. It is not necessarily used in a bad sense, but merely implies that ascendancy in the popular assembly which Cleon had acquired by his confidence, readiness, and power of speaking. In the same sense Pithias tou= dh/mou proei/sthkei at Corcyra (ii. 70); and Athenagoras is called dh/mou prosta/ths at Syracuse (vi. 35). Such influence being readily open to abuse, the word demagogue has not unnaturally come to mean, as defined by Johnson, ‘a ringleader of the rabble; a popular and factious orator’.

tw=| plh/qei piqanw/tatos—‘most influential with the people’; so iii. 36, tw=| dh/mw| piqanw/tatos. Similarly Athenagoras is called piqanwtatos toi=s polloi=s, vi. 35. piqanos—‘persuasive’, is also applied to arguments: Dem. Lacr. 928, lo/gous qaumasi/ws w(s piqanou\s e(/legen.

*)aqh/naze—According to Liddell and Scott the forms *)aqh/naze, *)aqh/nhqen, *)aqh/nh|sin ‘are more Attic than ei)s *)aqh/nas, etc.’ Thucydides sometimes uses *)aqh/naze, as in ch. 46, 15, me/xri ou(= *)aqh/naze pemfqw=sin: v. 32 (twice). *)aqh/nh|si occurs v. 25: v. 47, in the words of a treaty. On the other hand we have e)s ta\s *)aqh/nas (ch. 16, 27): e)k tw=n *)aqhnw=n (ch. 16, 20: 22, 17): e)n tai=s *)aqh/nais (ch. 5, 5: 27, 1) repeatedly occurring.

e)lqo/ntwn de/—for gen. abs. see note on a)ntilego/ntwn de/, ch. 3, 8. a)podo/ntas—‘let the Lacedaemonians restore Nisaea etc., and then receive back their men’. In construction *lakedaimoni/ous is subject to komi/sasqai, line 18.

a)podo/ntas...*)axai+/an—these places were given up by the Athenians in accordance with the terms of the thirty years' truce concluded in the year 445 (i. 115). Nisaea and Pegae were the chief ports of the territory of Megara. Troezen was the capital of a district in the E. of Argolis. What is meant by ‘restoring Achaia’, is however not so clear. The country of Achaia was an independent state, which in no intelligible sense belonged to the Lacedaemonians or Athenians, or could be ‘given up’ by the one to the other. In i. 111 we find certain Achaeans accompanying an Athenian force as allies: and possibly alliance and influence with Achaea may have been the point at issue. Otherwise either *)axai+/an is corrupt, which is improbable, as it occurs in two similar passages; or some particular town is meant, the situation of which we do not know.

a)po\ th=s prote/ras—‘from the previous convention’, i.e. the thirty years' truce of 445. a)po/ gives the origin, from which a result follows: cf. ch 30, 1: vii. 21, a)p' au)tou=, ‘therefrom’.

cugxwrhsa/ntwn—‘having agreed to these concessions’. kata/—‘in accordance with, on the strength of’. deome/nwn ti ma=llon—‘being in considerably greater need’: ch. 30, 1, me/ros ti, ‘in great part’. The thirty years' truce was concluded after hostilities had gone on for three or four years (i. 103—115).

o(po/son a)/n—‘for so long a time as may seem good to both parties’: v. 18, e)/th d' ei)=nai ta\s sponda\s penth/konta, ‘to be for fifty years’.

cune/drous e(le/sqai—‘but requested that commissioners might be chosen to confer with them’. e(le/sqai—trans., the usual construction with words like keleu/w. sfi/si—governed by cune/drous, cf. ch. 23, 5: ch. 93, 21, oi( cu/mmoroi au)toi=s. When the Athenians invaded Melos their envoys were not brought before the general assembly (pro\s to\ plh=qos), but heard before the authorities and officials (e)n tai=s a)rxai=s kai\ toi=s o)li/gois), who are afterwards called oi( tw=n *mhli/wn cu/nedroi (v. 85).

oi(/tines cumbh/sontai—future in final sense: iii. 16, nautiko\n pareskeu/azon o(/ ti pe/myousin. kata\ h(suxi/an—as opposed to the tumult and hurry of the assembly: i. 85, mhd' e)peixqe/ntes e)n braxei= mori/w| h(me/ras bouleu/swmen a)lla\ kaq' h(suxi/an.

polu\s e)ne/keito—‘fell on them vehemently’, like a mighty tempest or torrent: Hdt. vii. 158, *ge/lwn pollo)s e)ne/keito. Eur. Hip. 443, *ku/pris ga\r ou) forhto/n, h)\n pollh\ r(uh=|: so Sal. Iug. 84, multus atque ferox instare. e)/gkeimai=incumbo, used of pressing an enemy hard, or pursuing an object, with dat. or without a ease: ii. 59, e)ne/keinto tw=| *periklei=, ‘assailed Pericles’: v. 43, eu)qu\s e)ne/keinto, ‘at once urged on their purpose strenuously’.

e\n nw=| e)/xontas—‘intending’: ch. 8, 23, note. oi(/tines— ‘seeing that they’;=qui, quippe qui, with subj. o(/stis as rel. denotes the class, the characteristics of which are found in the antecedent: iii. 64, ti/nes a)\n u(mw=n dikaio/teron misoi=nto, oi(/tines k.t.l., ‘inasmuch as you’.

ei)/ ti u(gie\s dianoou=ntai—‘if they have any honest purpose’: iii. 75, ou)de\n u(gie\s dianooume/nwn.

sfi/sin oi(=o/n te o)/n—‘possible for them’, i.e. consistently with their interest, as is explained afterwards. e)n plh/qei—‘in a public assembly’. ei)/ ti kai\...cugxwrei=n—‘even if they were ready to make any concession’, ti acc. with cugxwrei=n, the two words forming the subject of e)do/kei ‘seemed good’. It does not appear what the Lacedaemonians were willing to concede, as they did not get a hearing.

mh\...diablhqw=sin—‘lest they should be represented injuriously to their allies’. diaba/llw, to set cross or wrong, means to slander or represent prejudicially: iii. 109, *peloponnhsi/ous diabalei=n e)s tou\s *(/ellhnas, ‘to raise a prejudice against the Peloponnesians in the eyes of the Greeks’, e)s denoting those to whom the report reaches and among whom it spreads: ii. 18, h( sxolaio/ths die/balen au)to/n, ‘his slowness did him injury’: also with dat., viii. 88, boulo/menos au)to/n toi=s *peloponnhsi/ois diaba/llein. We have too the passive with dat. meaning lit. ‘to be set wrong with’: viii. 81, i(/na tw=| *tissafe/rnei diaba/llointo, ‘that they might be set against Tissapheines’: Plat. Phaed. 67 E, diabe/blhntai tw=| sw/mati: common in Dem. with pro/s.

ei)po/ntes kai\ ou) tuxo/ntes—‘having made proposals and failed’: ii. 74, prokalesa/menoi polla\ kai\ ei)ko/ta ou) tugxa/nomen.

a)nexw/rhsan a)/praktoi—‘withdrew without effecting anything’. Little else could be expected from the temper of both sides, and the way in which matters were managed. Cleon and the democracy are scarcely to be blamed for demanding more than the Lacedaemonians seemed prepared to grant, while on the other hand a delicate negotiation could not be carried on before the popular assembly. The conduct of affairs at this time seems to have rested chiefly with Nicias and his adherents, but they were powerless to force their views against the will of the people. According to Plutarch (Nicias ch. 7) it was from personal enmity to Nicias that Cleon persuaded the assembly to reject the truce, proqu/mws o(rw=n au)to\n sumpra/ttonta toi=s *lakedaimoni/ois. Thucydides says nothing of the efforts of Nicias on this occasion, but he relates that in 422 he was most eager for peace, from his anxiety to preserve his own good fortune and name as a safe and successful general (v. 16). The impression which we form of his character is that he was a brave and careful commander when actually in the field, but disposed to magnify dangers and difficulties, and deficient in confidence and in a spirit of enterprise. He was also rich and prosperous, and ‘had given hostages to fortune’. It is therefore probable that if he had been one of the proposed cu/nedroi he would willingly have agreed to one-sided terms; and Cleon showed both courage and statemanship in opposing such an arrangement.

dielu/onto—the imperfect refers to the going on of the arrangements for ending the truce, or else the meaning is ‘was to come to an end’, i.e. according to the agreement. Cobet proposes diele/lunto ‘was at an end’ that is, was terminated there and then by the arrival of the ship from Athens. This agrees with the words in ch. 16, 22, e)lqo/ntwn de\ ta/s te sponda\s lelu/sqai, k.t.l.

cune/keito—‘had been agreed’: ch. 68, 20, cune/keito au)toi=s: iii. 70, kata\ ta\ cugkei/mena, ‘in accordance with the terms’: viii. 94, a)po\ cugkeime/nou lo/gou. kei=mai is virtually the perfect passive of ti/qhmi: oi( no/moi kei=ntai, ‘the laws have been enacted’: cf. vi. 62, e)se/keito pa/nta, ‘had been put on board’. cu/gkeimai therefore = the perf. pass. of cunti/qhmi. So Thucydides says of his history, i. 22, cu/gkeitai, ‘it has been composed’. Here cune/keito is pass. of cunti/qesqai, ‘to make a compact, agree to terms’, as in ch. 19, 19: vi. 65, cune/qento h(/cein, ‘they agreed to come’.

e)gklh/mata—‘as grounds of complaint’, in apposition with the following accusatives. e)pidromh/n—‘a sudden attack’, probably made with a small body: ch. 56, 8, e)fo/bhsen e)pidromg=|. tw=| teixi/smati—dat. after verbal subst. e/pidromh/n: cf. notes on Plat. Euthyph. 14 C, e)pisth/mh do/sews qeoi=s: so Rep. 439 D, po/lei diakoni/an. dokou=nta—sc. to the Lacedaemonians, who were therefore indignant.

i)sxurizo/menoi—‘insisting, maintaining’: iii. 44, tou=to o(\ *kle/wn i)sxuri/zetai. dh/, a particle giving emphasis to the particular words to which it is attached, gives the reason urged by the Athenians: iii. 108, kata\ xrhsmo\n dh/ tina, ‘in accordance, as they alleged, with a certain oracle’. Thus used it often conveys the idea that the alleged reason is a mere pretence.

a)di/khma e)pikale/santes—‘expostulating against the (detention) of the ships as an act of injustice’: v. 59, ei)/ ti e)pikalou=sin *)argei/ois, ‘if they have any ground of complaint against the Argives’; the full construction being with dat. of person, while the thing complained of is expressed by the acc. or an inf. clause.

ta\ peri\ *pu/lon—nom. to e/polemei=to: iii. 6, ta\ peri\ *mutilh/nhn e)polemei=to: v. 26, ta\ e)/peita e)polemh/qh. We must render ‘hostilities went on at Pylos’.

*)aqhnai=oi me/n—construction in accordance with the sense, as if a)mfo/teroi e)pole/moun had gone before: see note on ch. 2, 15: cf. v. 70, h( cu/nodos h)=n, *)argei=oi me\n...xwrou=ntes, *lakedaimo/nioi de/ k.t.l., ‘the encounter took place, the Argives etc.’, an exact parallel to the sentence before us. e)nanti/ain—‘in opposite directions’, so used of two waggons, i. 93. If Cobet's rule, given in the note on ch. 4, 11, is universally applicable to adjectives, this should be e)nanti/oin, but no editor that I know of reads it. neoi=n is absent from the best MSS, but is inserted by modern editors, as there is an awkwardness in understanding it from periple/ontes.

kai\ a(/pasai—‘all without exception’, kai/ emphasizing a(/pasai: v. 71, ta\ strato/peo(\a poiei= kai\ a)/panta tou=to: vii. 28, kai\ cu/mpantes, opposed to kata\ diadoxh/n. periw/rmoun, ‘lay at anchor around’. ta\ pro\s to\ pe/lagos—either, ‘on the side of the open sea’, accusative of reference used adverbially: cf. iii. 96, ta\ pro\s *pai/onas: ch 108, 7, ta\ pro\s *)hio/na: or acc. governed by periw/rmoun. ei)/h—opt. of indefinite frequency with o\po/te.

skopou=mtes kairo/n—a similar construction to ch. 8, 35: ch. 10, 25,=skopou=ntes ei)/ tis kairo\s parape/soi. parapi/ptw, ‘to occur’, is used with kairo/s by Xenophon and Polybius (Krüg.): cf. ch. 19, 8, paratuxou/shs.

The account of the operations in Sicily is now resumed from ch. 1; some of the statements there given being recapitulated here.

e)n th=| *sikeli/a|—in construction the epithet of *surako/sioi, but belonging in sense to the whole passage, marking the change of scene from Greece to Sicily: cf. iii. 88, oi( e)n th=| *sikeli/a| *)aqhnai=oi, etc.

pareskeua/zonto—‘were (as we have told) getting ready’: see ch. 1, 19. proskomi/santes—‘having taken to (Messene)’.

e)nh=gon—‘urged on’ the intruders, or the invasion. Sometimes of persons, as in ch. 21, 9, au)tou\s e/nh=ge: sometimes of things, i. 67, e)nh=gon to)n po/lemon: sometimes as here, with no object expressed: so vi. 61, e)nago/ntwn tw=n e)xqrw=n.

kai\ au)toi\ de/—‘and they themselves too’: i. 132, kai\ h=n o(\e\ ou(/tws, ‘and so too was the case’: ii. 36, kai\ pre/pon de\ a(/ma. kai\ de/=and also (Madv. § 229 a). This seems to be the same invasion as that related in ch. 1.

a)popeira=sqai—elsewhere Thuc. uses the active: e.g. vii. 17, with naumaxi/as.

ta\s me\n parou/sas—‘seeing that the ships they had were few’; the emphasis falling upon o)li/gas, which in its construction is the predicate. For a similar order of words cf. v. 10, oi( d' au(tou= custrafe/ntes o(pli=tai e)pi\ to\n lo/fon: v. 41, oi( pre/sbeis a)fiko/menoi au)tw=n: Ar. Rhet. 1. 5. 17, oi( a(/lloi ai)sxroi\ a)delfoi/, o( de\ kalo/s: Ar. Vesp. 839, tou=t' a)/ra prw=ton ta)di/khma ei)sakte/on: the spaced words being predicative.

e)formou=ntes—‘blockading’: the word belongs more especially to nausi/n; the sense of invading or attacking being supplied with pezh=|.

xeirw/sasqai—‘they hoped to subdue’, aor. inf. after h)/lpizon, referring to the result immediately looked for. The following gi/gnesqai either depends directly on h)/lpizon, the present inf. indicating a lasting result, or its construction, like that of ei)=nai, line 17, corresponds to the general sense of the sentence—‘we hope to take Rhegium, and (we think) our position thereby becomes (gi/gnetai) strong’. gi/gnesqai=was sure to be: ch. 9, 26, a(lw/simon gi/gnesqai.

a)krwthri/ou—in apposition with *(rhgi/ou, ‘a projecting point on the Italian coast’. It seems plain that the passage refers to the advantageous position of Rhegium itself, not to some promontory near the city.

*)aqhnai/ois te ou)k—Classen omits te, which however is found in the best manuscripts. If we retain it, we must either consider that it is out of place, and in sense follows e)formei=n, coupling it to tou= porqmou= kratei=n; or we must suppose that Thuc. was going to speak of the Syracusans in the second part of the sentence, but altered its construction.

e)/sti de/—‘consists of, is formed by’: so, in a similar topographical description, iii. 112, e)sto\n de\ du/o lo/fw h) *)idome/nh. tou=to—‘this channel’. braxu/taton a)pe/xei—so iii. 104, a)pe/xei o)li/gon. The strait is not narrowest between Rhegium and Messene, nor are these places exactly opposite each other. Thucydides is speaking of the strait generally, which at its narrowest point is not much more than two miles across, and would be entirely commanded by Rhegium and Messene.

h(=| *odusseu/s—the passage of Ulysses is related in the twelfth book of the Odyssey. Charybdis, the whirlpool monster, was more terrible than Scylla, the monster of the rock, and Ulysses escaped with the loss of some of his men by keeping nearer to the side on which Scylla dwelt.

dia\ steno/thta de\ kai/—‘owing to the narrowness of the passage, and as it rushes in, etc.’; two reasons given with different verbal construction. e)s au)to/—into this channel,=tou=to, line 20. Note that in this passage qa/lassa is used of the sea generally, pe/lagos of a particular ‘sea’, as a geographical description. The ‘Tyrsenian (Tyrrhenian) sea’ is that on the W. coast of Italy, the ‘Sicilian’ E. and S.E. of Sicily.

ei)ko/tws xaleph\ e)nomi/sqh—‘naturally got a dangerous name’. The way in which Thuc. speaks shows that the terrors of the strait were entirely a thing of the past.

h)nagka/sqhsan—though they wished to fight (ch. 24, 8), the action, late in the day and in the narrow strait, was forced upon them by the danger of a friendly ship. a)ntepanago/menoi— ‘putting out to sea against’, e)pi/ implying that the Syracusans made the attack.

e)n tw=| *(rhgi/w|—‘in the territory of Rhegium’, i.e. at some point on the coast where the Locrians had established themselves, Rhegium itself being the headquarters of the Athenians. The Syracusans and allies had thus two naval stations, to which they now fled, w(s e(/kastoi e)/tuxon, i.e. each ship made for the nearer point. Classen however points out that there is no mention of any such naval station friendly to Syracuse near Rhegium, and thinks it possible that Thucydides means that the Syracusans returned to Messene, and the Athenians to Rhegium, the sentence to which oi( *surako/sioi is the nominative expanding in meaning at this point, and applying to the combatants on both sides: ‘they departed, each combatant making for his own headquarters at Messene and Rhegium respectively’. For similar cases of what may be called expanded apposition see note on ch. 80, 18, kai\ prokri/nantes e)s disxili/ous..., oi( me\n ta\ i(era\ perih=lqon, oi( de\ k.t.l. In the sentence before us however w(s e(/kastoi seems more applicable to the beaten Syracusans only, who fled as they best could in different ways. Moreover a)pole/santes certainly refers to the Syracusan side alone.

e)pege/neto tw=| e)/r gw|—‘closed upon the action’: so ch. 48, 20, nu\c e)p. tw=| paqh/mati: iii. 112, nukto\s e/pigenome/nhs, etc. e)/rgon— ‘action’, i.e. fight: v. 67, e/n th=| e)kei/nwn to\ e)/rgon e)gi/gneto, ‘the action was to be fought in their country’.

oi( me\n *lo/kroi—in ch. 1 we are told that the Locrian army withdrew from Rhegium. They may not have finally evacuated the territory till now, or possibly there may have been two invasions. The land and sea forces were now concentrated at Peloris, the N. E. promontory of Sicily.

xeiri\ sidhra=|—‘a grappling iron’: vii. 62, xeirw=n sidhrw=n e)pibolai/. au)toi\ a)pw/lesan—‘they themselves (the Athenians) lost’. This is plainly right, because of e)te/ran nau=n a)pollu/ousin, line 21, and ou)k e)/lasson e)/xontes, line 23. Otherwise au)toi=s, which has the better authority, might stand, meaning ‘they destroyed for the enemy’. Jowett suggests that au)toi=s may mean ‘they lost at the hands of the enemy’=dat. commodi.

a)po\ ka/lw—‘with a rope’, i.e. being towed. They kept as near to the shore as possible to have the support of the land forces.

a)posimwsa/ntwn—‘got their ships into the open sea’, according to the scholiast. simo/s means ‘snub-nosed’, and when applied to ground signifies sloping up hill, as in Xen. Hell. iv. 3, 23: see Lidd. and Scott. Hence the meaning seems to be that the Syracusans cast off their tow-ropes, and made an oblique movement at an obtuse angle to their former course, thus getting into the open and attacking the Athenians first. The Athenian fleet seems to have been in very incompetent hands since the arrival of Pythodorus (iii. 115).

prodi/dosqai—‘news being brought that Camarina was to be betrayed’; impf. like prodidome/nhn, ch. 7, 5. Camarina was a Syracusan colony, but friendly to the Athenian allies (iii. 86).

*na/con th\n *xalkidikh/n—colonized by the Chalcidians from Euboea, and the first Greek settlement in Sicily (vi. 3).

teixh/reis poih/santes—‘having confined them within their walls’: so ii. 101: Hdt, i. 162.

peripleu/santes—round a headland which lies to the s. of Naxos. kata\ to\n *)akesi/nhn—‘by way of’: iii. 7, kata\ to\n *)axelw=|on e)/pleuse (opp. to kata\ gh=n): ch. 14, 1, kaq' e(ka/teron to\n e)/|sploun. For the order cf. ch. 43. 3, e/pi\ th\n *solu/geian kw/mhn

pro\s th\n po/lin e)seba/llon—if the reading be right, this probably means ‘made an inroad in the direction of the city’, e)sba/llw being used of invading a country, not of attacking a place. (When used with e/s of cavalry attacking a body of troops, as ii. 100: vi. 70, it possibly means ‘shooting darts into’ though the meaning of charging seems more appropriate in the former of these passages.) Poppo and others would here read prose/ballon, ‘made an attack’: in viii. 31 e)sbolh\n poihsa/menos th=| po/lei is the manuscript reading, for which also prosbolh/n is proposed as a correction.

*sikeloi/—the non-Greek inhabitants, called ba/rbaroi, line 42. *sikeliw=tai was the general name for the Greek colonists. In vi. 2 we are told that the *sikeloi/ crossed originally from Italy, and being numerous and powerful they gave their name to the island, of which they still possessed the centre and northern portions. u(pe\r tw=n a)/krwn—with kate/bainon, ‘came down in numbers over the heights’. Possibly oi( u(pe/r, who dwell beyond the heights', should be read. bohqou=ntes <*>ti/—to attack the Messenians: iii. 110, bohqei=n e)p' au)tou/s.

e)p' oi)/kou—‘homewards’ (with e(/kastai). The allied fleet was broken up, and the contingents returned to their several ports.

kekakwme/nhn—‘having received a severe blow’: ch. 87, 7, kakou/menoi, ‘sustaining injury’. prosba/llontes applies to the whole allied force, which is divided into oi( me\n *)aqhnai=oi..., o( de\ pezo/s. e\pei/rwn—‘made their attempt’: ch. 43, 24, e)pi\ kw/mhn peira/oein: vii. 72, a)/llh| peira/sein: usually with gen., i. 61, peira/santes tou= xwri/ou. For kata/ and pro/s see note on line 32. o( pezo/s—(adj.) sc. strato/s, ‘the land army’: i. 47, etc.

e)pekdromh\n poihsa/menoi—‘having sallied out against them’; a similar compound to e)pekqei=n, ch. 34, 3.

tou= *dhmote/lous—there seems no reason for the article, which as a rule is used only with names which are well known, or have been mentioned before. The rule however is not invariably observed. meta\ to\ pa/qos—i.e. after their disastrous attempt on Naxos. e)gkatelei/fqhsan frouroi/—‘had been left behind in the city as a garrison’, on the separation of the combined forces.

tropai=on sth/santes—the infinitesimal success thus commemorated seems to have satisfied Pythodorus, who now returned to his headquarters at Rhegium, the Athenians having this year lost Messene and gained no compensating advantage.

e)/ti e)polio/rkoun...e)/menen—the imperf. denotes the continuance of the state of things described at the end of ch. 23.

o(/ti mh/—also written o(/ ti mh/, ‘except’: ch. 94, 10, ou) parege/nonto o)/ti mh\ o)li/goi: cf. ch. 16, 15, o(/sa mh/.

diamw/menoi to\n ka/xlhka—‘scraping away the shingle’; see Arnold's note. Eur. Bacch. 709, describes the Bacchae as finding milk, a)/kroisi daktu/loisi diamw=sai xqo/na. oi(=on ei)ko/s—sc. pi/nein au)tou/s, such water as could be thus procured.

stenoxwri/a—cf. ch. 8, 35—9. The Athenians held only Pylos itself, the mainland and the island being occupied by their enemies. There was therefore no anchorage or harbour (o)/rmos) where the ships could lie, nor could the men land with safety except under the walls of the fort. The trireme was plainly a vessel for fighting only, with but little accommodation for the crew.

si=ton h(|rou=nto—‘took their food’, ai( me/n in this clause implying the crews. Cobet (Var. Lect. p. 451) would read oi( me/n: but cf. i. 110, where trih/reis is followed by ou)k ei)do/tes. kata\ me/ros—‘in turn, in divisions’: iii. 49, oi( me\n u(/pnon h(|rou=nto kata\ me/ros oi( de\ h)/launon.

para\ lo/gon—‘contrary to reasonable expectation or reckoning’: vi. 33, tou= *mhdou para\ lo/gon polla\ sfale/ntos. e)pigigno/menos—lit. ‘coming after, or coming upon them’, i. e. lasting longer than they had calculated: i. 126, xro(nou e)pigignome(nou, of a siege: iii. 77, e)pigene/sqai, of a reserve force which was to fall on the enemy when already engaged.

ou(\s w)/|onto—‘for they thought they should reduce them’. ou(/s means the enemy, as the sense shows, though the antecedent is not expressed. Such a sentence is elliptical, and would be completed by inserting ‘as they were besieging men, whom’ etc. So ii. 44, xalepo\n oi)=da pei/qein o)/n, w(=n kai\ polla/kis e(/cete u(pomnh/mata, ‘I know it is hard to persuade you, when you will often be reminded of them’, i.e. of the sons slain in war, of whom Pericles is speaking.

h(merw=n o)li/gwn-‘within a few days’: Ar. Vesp. 260, ou)k e)/sq' o(/pws ou)x h(merw=n tetta/rwn u(/dwr a)nagkai/ws e)/xei to\n qeo\n poih=sai, ‘it can not be but rain must needs fall within four days’: cf. note on qe/rous, ch. 1, 1.

ai)/tion de\ h)=n oi(—‘the cause was the Lacedaemonians having given notice’, i.e. the fact that they had done so: so viii. 9, ai)/tion d' e)ge/neto oi( me\n polloi\ ou)k ei)do/tes k.t.l.

to\n boulo/menon—‘any who wished’, subj. to e)sa/gein: i. 26, oi)kh/tora to\n boulo/menon i)e/nai keleu/ontes, ‘directing that all who chose should go as settlers’, o\ boulo/menos is the usual phrase employed when a duty or privilege is open to all: Dem. Tim. 720 (quoting a law), kathgorei=n *)aqhnai/wn to\n boulo/menon oi)=s e)/cesti, ‘any duly qualified Athenian may be accuser’.

a)lhlesme/non—‘ground’: Hdt. vii. 23, si=tos pollo\s e)foi/ta e)k th=s *)asi/hs a)lhlesme/nos. For the form see Veitch's Greek Verbs. Cobet would read a)lhleme/non. ei)/ ti—‘any’, lit. ‘if (they could send in) any’: i. 14, *)aqhnai=oi kai\ ei)/ tines a)/lloi.

oi)=on a)n...cumfe/rh|—‘of whatever kind might (lit, may) be useful for a siege’, i.e. for besieged men. The rel. with a)/n is commonly used in thus defining quality or character. The subj. construction is not unusual after a past tense, e.g. ii. 74, e)bouleu/santo...a)ne/xesqai...o)/ ti a)\n cumbai/nh|.

oi(=on a)\n cumfe/roi is also read, and gives a good but different sense, ‘such as might be likely to prove serviceable’, a)/n being then connected with the verb and not with oi(=os: cf. vi. 36, e)c w)=n a)\n a)/nqrwpoi dra/seian, ‘from what men would be likely to do’: so vii. 48, e)c w)=n a)/n tis eu)= le/gwn diaba/lloi. This construction is common, and requires notice. It is often liable to be misunderstood, from a)/n standing next the relative, though not belonging to it.

ta/cantes a)rguri/ou—‘having rated’ the service or the provisions ‘at a high price’: so line 30, tetimhme/na xrhma/twn, gen. of price.

a)pai/rontes—‘putting off’: ch. 46, 2, e)k th=s *pu/lou a)ph=ran. The converse of this is katai/rw, ‘to put in’: viii. 39, e)s *kau=non kath=ran: cf. kata/rseis, ‘landing-places’, line 31. o(po/qen tu/xoien—‘from any point they chanced’, opt. of indefinite frequency: cf. ch. 25, 7, w(s e(/kastoi e)/tuxon, ‘as each happened’. e)/ti nukto/s—‘while it was still night’: so ch. 31, 2, nukto/s, lit. at a time of or within the night.

e)th/roun. katafe/resqai—‘looked out for (a chance of) making the land’; usually with subst. as ch. 27, 11: i. 65, a)/nemon thrh/sasi, etc.; or partic. i. 134, e)/ndon o)/nta thrh/santes au)to/n, etc. For katafe/rw see note on ch. 3, 9: in the present chapter we have various compounds with kata/ in the sense of coming to the coast.

toi=s de\ a)feidh/s—lit. ‘the landing was made unsparing’, i e. they ran to shore at the risk of wrecking their boats. a)feidh/s—‘unsparing, reckless’: Eur. Iph. T. 1354, h(mei=s d' a)feidh/santes, ‘made reckless’. kaqesth/kei—‘was made or established’ the word implies a more or less permanent state of things; i.e. this reckless landing was secured by the Lacedaemonian arrangements: cf. ch. 78, 14: ch. 34, 21, kaqi/stato.

e)pw/kellon—cf. note on o)kei/lantas ch. 11, 26. This sentence gives the two reasons for risking the landing—the government paid for the boats, and the troops on the island were watching (e(fu/lasson) to save the provisions. ka/tarsis— a rare word, except in late Greek.

galh/nh|—‘in calm weather’: most probably a dat. of the point of time: ii. 20, e)kei/nh| th=| e)sbolh=| katabh=nai, ‘to descend in that invasion’, where see Poppo's note: cf. Dem. Meid. 570, o)xei=sqai dia\ th=s a)go/ras tai=s pompai=s ou) duna/menon. Rutherford inserts e)n. kinduneu/seian, h(li/skonto—indefinite frequency.

kata\ to\n lime/na—as opposed to pro\s to\ pe/lagos: cf. ch. 25, 32, kata\ to\n *)akesi/nhn.

mh/kwna memelitwme/nhn—‘poppy seed mixed with honey and pounded linseed’. Krüger quotes a scholiast to the effect that poppy seed mixed with honey was a preventive of hunger, while linseed kept off thirst. The commentators cite Athenaeus and other authorities to show that such substances were sometimes smeared on bread or mixed with it.

w(=n lanqano/ntwn—objective gen. after fulakai/. oi( de\ mh\ lanqa/nein sfa=s—‘and the others to detect them’, mh\ lanqa/nein after e)texnw=nto, lit. ‘that it should not escape them’.

e)n de\ tai=s *)aqh/nais...e)kpleu/sesqai—the subject of this sentence is the people at Athens, there are two principal verbs, h)po/roun and e(dedoi/kesan, and the participle o(rw=ntes is in agreement with the subject of those verbs; a(/ma...peripe/mpein being parenthetical. A difficulty is however caused by the words e)n xwri/w| e)rh/mw|. The troops at Pylos were those who were e)n xwri/w| e)rh/mw|, while oi(=oi/ te o(/ntes peripe/mpein certainly refers to the people at Athens. In order therefore to complete the sense we must understand either ou)=si governed by komidh/n (or metape/mpein), ‘for men who were’, or o)/ntwn, gen. abs., ‘the troops being’ in a desolate position. Poppo gives a different explanation, that there is a confusion between the Athenians at Athens and those at Pylos, or that they are as it were identified, in which case o)/ntes is understood with e)n xwri/w e)rh/mw.

talaipwrei=tai—‘suffers hardships’, mid.: ch. 35, 15, talaipwrou/menoi; so iii. 3, tetalaipwrhme/noi, etc. kai\ si=tos— nom. to e)splei= placed emphatically. e)splei=—cf. ch. 39, 6, e)sple/ousi, note.

mh\ sfw=n—‘lest they should have winter stopping their blockade’; see note on au)tw=n ch. 14, 12. xeimw/n—here ‘the winter season’, in line 11 it means stormy weather. e)pila/boi,— ‘come upon’ and stop: ch. 96, 37, nukto\s e)pilabou/shs to\ e)/rgon: in ii. 51 it is used of the attack of disease.

o(rw=ntes—governs the two clauses tw=n te...e)some/nhn, to/n te...e)so/menon. a)/ma...peripe/mpein is parenthetical, see note on line 1. The meaning is clear—‘the soldiers withal were in a desert place, and not even in summer could the Athenians send them adequate supplies’. ou)k e)so/menon—‘would not be practicable’: see note on ch. 8, 25, o(/pws mh\ h)=|.

a)ll' h)\...e)kpleu/sesqai—the infinitives are governed by o)rw=ntes, or by the idea supplied therefrom, ‘they expected, they feared’. a)ne/ntwn—‘having given up, slackened’: Eur. Suppl. 1042, fulaka\s a)nh=ka. perigenh/sesqai—‘would pull through’, i.e. would escape being reduced by hunger.

e)fobou=nto tou\s *lakedaimoni/ous—‘they feared with regard to the Lacedaemonians’; an extension of the common construction by which the subject of a subordinate sentence is made the object of the principal verb, as ch. 1, 8, fobou/menoi tou\s *)aqhnai/ous, mh/. o(/ti e)/xontas—‘because they thought they must have some strong point in their favour, as they made no further overtures to them’. ti i)sxuro/n—a source or point of strength: iii. 6, o(rw=ntes ou)de\n i)sxuro\n a)po\ tw=n *lesbi/wn. e)pikhrukeu/esqai is used especially of making conciliatory overtures, in which sense it is common.

katasko/pous—‘commissioners of inspection’, Grote: so vi. 41. e)s kataskoph/n, of a commission sent by Syracuse to the towns in Sicily.

fanh/sesqai—grammatically dependent on a)nagkasqh/setai: in sense however it seems rather connected with the notion of knowing or thinking which is the main idea of the sentence. We might in fact have expected h)\ a)nagkasqh/setai ..., h)\ fanh/setai. Poppo indeed suggests that fanh/sesqai may follow gnou/s directly, o(/ti only affecting the first clause (as in i. 87, etc.), and h)/ being out of place, as in vi. 24 init.

w(rmhme/nous ti to\ ple/on—‘somewhat the more eager’: so ch. 21, 18, ti ma=llon, note. th=| gnw/mh|—‘in mind’, with w(rmhme/nous.

a)pesh/mainen—‘pointed at’; a)po/, as in a)pido/ntes, ch. 18, 1, implying that he glanced aside from the immediate question to attack his enemy. e)pitimw=n—‘reproaching him’; possibly ‘saying to his reproach’, with r(a/|dion ei)=nai, which otherwise depends on apesh)mainen.

paraskeuh=|—‘with a (proper) force’, with pleu/santas labei=n: cf. vi. 21, au)to/qen paraskeuh=| a)cioxre(w| e)pie/nai, ‘to invade them with an adequate force from our own country’.

kai\ au)to/s g' a)/n—‘and he himself, he said, would have done this had he been in office’, i.e. had he been strathgo/s. From this passage it is plain that Cleon had no official standing, but derived his power merely from his personal influence in the assembly. The conduct of the war rested with the board of strategi, of whom Nicias was the most prominent. Here again Cleon was undeniably right in urging an energetic attempt on the Spartan position.

u(poqorubhsa/ntwn—‘having raised some clamour’, u(po/ thus compounded having, like sub, the sense of somewhat. The word is not elsewhere found in classical Greek, on which account Cobet suggests u(po/ ti qorubhsa/ntwn. e)s to\n *kle/wna— ‘at Cleon’: e)s is very generally used by Thucydides in phrases denoting relation, such as i. 38, e)s h(ma=s toioi/de, ‘of such character towards us’: iii. 14, ta\s tw=n *)ellh/nwn e)s u(ma=s e)lpi/das, ‘the hopes of the Greeks in regard to you’: cf. note on ch. 22. 14, diaba/llein e)s: so i. 128, eu)ergesi/an e)s basile/a kate/qeto=‘he began to bestow services on, or win favour with, the king of Persia’: ii. 60, ta\ th=s o)rgh=s u(mw=n e)s e)me\ gege/nhtai.

o(/tiou)—‘because he did not sail even now’. o(/ ti is read by Krüger and Classen and explained as ‘why’, an indirect question corresponding to ti/ direct; Jowett also approves of this: cf. i. 90, o(po/te tis e)/roito o(/ ti ou)=k e)pe/rxetai.

plei=—Krüger takes this to refer to Nicias, and makes e)s to\n *kle/wna mean ‘on hearing Cleon’. It seems however plain that the Athenians called out to ask why Cleon did not sail, if he thought it an easy task. Plutarch (Nic. ch. 7) says that the Athenians called out, ti/ de\ ou)xi\ kai\ nu=n au)to\s su\ plei=s e/pi\ tou\s u)/ndras;

to\ e)pi\ sfa=s ei)=nai—Nicias says ‘so far as concerns us’, sfa=s meaning himself and his colleagues: ch. 9, 21. For ei(=nai cf. i. 21, w\s palaia\ ei)=nai, ‘so far as their ancient date allows’: ii. 89, e\kw\n ei(=nai, ‘so far as my will goes’: see also note on ch. 14, 20, w(s ei\pei=n.

lo/gw| mo/non a)fie/nai—‘only pretended to give up’. lo/gw| is opposed to e)/rgw| or tw=| o)/nti; i. 128, tw=| de\ lo/gw| ape/drasan au)to/n, ‘he pretended that they had escaped from him’: ii. 65, lo/gw| me\n dhmokrati/a, e)/rgw| de\ u\po\ tou= prw/tou a)ndro\s arxh/, of Athens under Pericles.

paradwsei/onta—‘wished to hand over the command’. The termination ei/w is a desiderative formed from the future: i. 33, polemhsei/w, ‘I wish for war’, from the future of polemw=: i. 95, a)pallacei/w, from fut. of a)palla/ssw: viii. 79, naumaxhsei/ontes, from fut. of naumaxw=, etc.: Ar. Vesp. 168, Pax 62, drasei/w. The Latin termination urio has the same force, e.g. esurio, formed from esum supine of edo. a)nexw/rei—‘he began to draw back’. kai\ ou)k e)/fh—‘and said Nicias was general, not he’; au)to/s subj. to strathgei=n, nom. because referring to the subject of e)/*fh.

ou(k a)\n oi)o/menos—‘and never supposing that Nicias could have brought himself to withdraw in his favour’. tolmw=, used according to the context, of audacity, fortitude, hardness of heart, condescension, etc. implies in every case an overcoming of natural weakness or inclination. It may often be rendered ‘to have the heart’ to do something. oi(, sibi, means Cleon, au)to/n Nicias. a)/n—with tolmh=sai.

e)ci/stato—‘renounced’: ii. 63, h(=s (a)rxh=s) ou)de\ e)ksth=nai e)/ti u(mi=n e)/stin, ‘which moreover you can not now give up’. Notice the force of the imperfects in this passage: Nicias ‘was ready to renounce’ the command, Cleon ‘tried to back out’ of it, the people ‘kept calling upon’ Nicias to hand it over, etc.

u(pe/feuge—‘shrunk from’. e)canexw/rei ta\ ei)rhme/na— ‘backed out of what he had said’. Though the verb is compounded with e)c it governs the accusative, since it represents the active idea ‘to evade’: cf. iii. 34, u(pecelqo/ntes tou/tous, ‘withdrawing from these’; i. 128, a)pe/drasan au)to/n: so Dem. Lept. 460, ou\de/na pw/pote ki/ndunon e)ce/sthsan, ‘they never shrank from any danger’, ete. Similarly in Latin we have, Tac. Ann. xii. 35, evadere ‘to pass’ with acc.: so ib. ii. 38, egredi relationem, ‘to go beyond the question’: ib. xi. 36, evecta insulas.

to/sw|—‘so much (the more)’: viii. 24, o(/sw|—to/sw|: so i. 37, tosw=|de. The more usual prose form is tosou/tw|.

kai\ e)kei/nw| e)pebo/wn plei=n—‘and shouted at Cleon to sail’: so v. 65, *)/agidi e)pebo/hsen: vi. 16, ta\ i)/dia e)pibow/menos, ‘cried out at in respect of my private life’. The shouts in the assembly seem to have come from supporters of Cleon, who hoped that he would succeed.

e)capallagh=|—‘get out of’. u(fi/statai—‘undertakes’, with acc.: iii. 57, a)gw=nas u(pe/sthmen, ‘underwent’: ch. 59, 11, kindu/nous u(fi/stasqai: the constr. with dat. ii. 61, cumforai=s tai=s megi/stais u(fi/stasqai, seems to mean ‘to endure even in the greatest misfortunes’. See also note on ch. 39, 14.

parelqw/n—the usual expression for ‘coming forward’ to address the assembly: iii. 41, parelqw\n kai\ to/te. Note ou)/te ...te. *lhmni/ous kai\ *)imbri/ous—usually mentioned together as in iii. 5, where they remain faithful to Athens on the occasion of the revolt of Lesbos: v. 8, where they form a part of the force with which Cleon attempted to recover Amphipolis.

oi(\ h)=san e)/k te *ai)/nou—for peltasta/s te oi(\ h)=san e)c *ai)/nou... kai/ k.t.l. te, which is grammatically out of place, connects in sense e)/k te *ai)/nou and a)/lloqen, as the two sources from which the auxiliaries came.

tau=ta—‘this force’. e)ne/pese—see note on ch. 4, 5. ti kai\ ge/lwtos—‘something even of laughter’: i. 5, fe/ronto/s ti kai\ do/chs, of piracy, ‘even bringing some honour’. th=| koufologi/a| —‘at his vain and boastful speaking’, an unusual word.

This is the first mention of laughter on this occasion, and it was excited simply by Cleon's boastful manner. There is no warrant whatever for the idea that the Athenians committed the incredible folly of forcing the command upon him by way of a joke. Plutarch (Nic. ch. 7) says toi=s de\ *)aqhnai/ois e)ph=lqe gela/sai me/ga ma=llon h)\ pisteu=sai, when Cleon ‘added his limit’ (prosdiwri/sato) of twenty days. Still the majority of the assembly seem to have believed that the attempt ought to be made, and that Cleon would succeed in it. Nicias and his colleagues are however open to grave censure for entrusting the conduct of an expedition, from which they appear to have shrunk themselves, to a man of no military experience or capacity. If this was done merely in the hope of discrediting a political opponent, it would not be easy to find a more disgraceful party manœuvre. Possibly they may have considered the enterprise feasible, but were not unwilling that its risks should fall upon Cleon, while they knew that Demosthenes would be at hand to advise and direct.

a)sme/nois e)gi/gneto—‘sober-minded men were not ill pleased’: so ii. 3, tw=| plh/qei ou) boulome/nw| h)=n a)fi/stasqai, ‘the multitude did not wish to revolt’: ch. 85, 15, boulome/nois e)/sesqai.

tou= e(te/rou teu/cesqai—‘would gain one of two blessings’. a)pallagh/sesqai and xeirw/sasqai are dependent on this clause. The former of these is in the future, implying a state of subsequent continuance, ‘being rid for the future of Cleon’; while xeirw/sasqai refers to one definite point, ‘subduing the Lacedaemonians’. There is no difficulty in the aor. following an expression which denotes expectation: see notes on ch. 9, 21 and 24, 12. The subject to xeirw/sasqai is *kle/wna: cf. v. 63, *)/agin e)n ai)ti/a| ei)=xon ou) xeirwsa/menon sfi/si *)/argos, ‘blamed Agis for not subduing Argos for them’.

There is no doubt an awkwardness in this change of subject: Cobet, who says of the passage misere laborat, proposes the passive fut. perfect kexeirw/sesqai.

h)/lpizon—‘expected’; as is plain from the following sfalei=si gnw/mhs: cf. 18, 9, gnw/mh| sfale/ntes. Jowett's rendering, ‘which they would have greatly preferred’, is unnecessarily hard on the sw/frones.

kai\ pa/nta diapraca/menos—‘having had all arrangements made’. Note the construction; the gen. abs. is placed between two participles in agreement with the nom. to the verb: see Goodwin, § 111. yhfisame/nwn—so vi. 25, h)/ntina au)tw=| paraskeuh\n yhfi/swntai, ‘what force they are to vote him’.

a)nagwgh/n—‘putting to sea’, a reading adopted by Krüger, Classen, etc., here and in vi. 29 for a)gwgh/n, which has the better manuscript authority. a)gwgh/ means ‘bringing’, as v. 85, h( e)s tou\s o)li/gous a)gwgh/, and might possibly mean the conveyance of Cleon's forces and supplies, and therefore his voyage in general: so Xen. Cyr. vi. 1, 24, e)n tai=s a)gwgai=s, ‘on marches’.

th\n a)po/basin dianoei=sqai—‘to contemplate the descent’. This is the only instance in Thuc. of dianoei/sqai being followed by a substantive. Usually it takes the infinitive, or an adverb, as w(/sper dienoou=nto. We have however, ch. 22, 10, ei)/ ti u)gie\s dianoou=ntai, and iii. 75, ou)de\n u)gie\s dianooume)nwn: cf. 13, 19, a(\ dienoh/qhsan. It does not therefore seem necessary to adopt Cobet's view that poiei=sqai has been accidentally omitted.

It has been suggested that some secret communications had already passed between Demosthenes and Cleon, which made the latter ready to undertake the expedition. It is at any rate clear that he did not take a leap in the dark, but had full information as to the state of things at Pylos. Thus he took with him a force of suitable character, and secured the help of Demosthenes, a brave and competent officer.

r(w/mhn—‘confidence’: vii. 18, toi=s *lakedaimoni/ois e)gege/nhto r(w/mh: so ii. 8, e)/rrwnto e)s to\n po/lemon, ‘were confident and eager for the war’. h( nh/sos e)mprhsqei=sa—‘the island having caught fire’: cf. ch. 26, 16, oi( *lakedaimo/nioi proeipo/ntes: so iii. 20, tw=| si/tw| e)pilipo/nti e)pie/zonto, etc.

pro/teron me/n—corresponding to this is tw=n de\ stratiwtw=n, ch. 30, 3, a long parenthetical passage being inserted, which gives the reasons of the previous hesitation on the part of Demosthenes. The island is described in similar words in ch. 8.

pollw=| ga\r a)/n—either ‘if he landed with a large army’, or stratope/dw| agreeing with a)poba/nti. prosba/llontas—‘they could fall on him from an unseen position and do him injury’; a)/n goes with bla/ptein. The acc. and inf. depend on e)no/mize, or the sense supplied from it, the same construction lasting to the end of the chapter.

ta/s—note one article with two nouns of different number: so i. 143, th\n me\n gh=n kai\ oi)ki/as a)fei=nai. Note also neut. plural dh=la in agreement with the general idea of ‘the enemy's situation’.

h(=| bou/lointo—‘wherever they chose’, represents after a past tense h(=| a)\n bou/lwntai; ‘wherever they may choose’. e)p' e)kei/nois ga/r—‘for the initiative would rest with them’: ii. 84, th\n e)pixei/rhsin e)f' e(autw=| e)no/mizen ei)=nai.

lanqa/nein te—‘and so their force though numerous would get cut to pieces unawares’, lit. ‘would find itself being cut to pieces’: so i. 141, w(/ste lanqa/nein to\ koino\n fqeiro/menon.

ou)k ou)/shs—‘it being impossible to see at what point they ought to help each other’: so ii. 89, mh\ e)/xwn th\n pro/soyin tw=n polemi/wn e)k pollou=, ‘not being able to sight the enemy at any distance’. Some editors in both passages write pro/oyis in the sense of ‘seeing in front’: the word occurs v. 8, where it means ‘seeing beforehand’.

xrh=n—the general sense of the passage deals with what Demosthenes had been thinking up to the time of the fire, the imperfect infinitives with a)/n throughout the passage representing what in his view would have been happening if the attack had been made. We have therefore the imperf. xrh=n corresponding to e)no/mize in line 23: so ii. 51, e(\n d' ou)de\ e(\n kate/sth i(/ama o(/ ti xrh=n prosfe/rontas w)felei=n, ‘there was no one single remedy, the application of which could be serviceable’: v. 35, xro/nous de\ prou)/qento e)n oi)=s xrh=n (The present xrh/ is often used in a similar way. as in ch. 34, 28.)

a)po\ de\ tou= *ai)twlikou=—the disaster which Demosthenes sustained the year before, as related iii. 97, 98. The Athenians were deficient in light-armed troops, and after holding out for some time against an enemy who could not be brought to close quarters, but harassed them at every point, they finally took to flight. Many lost their way in a wood, and were destroyed by fire. The Athenians lost many of their allies, and 120 of their best heavy-armed men. It is not a little remarkable that Cleon (ch. 28) at once announced his intention to bring troops of the very kind which Demosthenes had lacked in Aetolia, and which had operated against him with fatal effect. This certainly suggests the probability of some understanding between the two commanders.

me/ros ti—‘in a great measure’, an adverbial use of the determinant accusative: cf. ch. 16, 17, note. ou)x h(/kista— ‘mainly’. These are instances of mei/wsis: cf. ch. 13, 22.

e)sh/|ei—‘occurred to him’: vi. 30, ma=llon au)tou\s e)sh/|ei ta\ deina/.

th=s nh/sou toi=s e)sxa/tois—‘on the edges of the island after prosi/sxontas.

dia\ profulakh=s—‘with a guard posted in advance’: ii. 81, dia\ fulakh=s e)/xontes.

kata\ mikro\n th=s u(/lhs—these words are the object of e)mprh/santos, kata\ mikro/n forming as it were a single word: cf. note on ch. 3, 13, e)pi\ polu/.

a)/kontos—‘unintentionally’, a)/kwn implying sometimes the absence of will, sometimes its contravention: Plat. Rep. 520 B, of philosophers, au)to/matoi e)mfu/ontai a)kou/shs th=s politei/as. a)po\ tou/tou, if the text be right, goes with e)pigenome/nou, meaning ‘after this’ or ‘thereupon’. It usually means ‘from this cause’. Classen therefore omits kai/, and takes a)po\ tou/tou with e)/laqe katakauqe/n. e)pigenome/nou—‘having sprung up after’, see note on ch. 26. 14. e)/laqe katakauqe/n=‘got burnt down accidentally’.

ou(/tw dh/—this sentence extends to e(toima/zwn, line 15. As it stands in the text there is one principal verb, pareskeua/zeto, line 13; the participle katidw/n, in agreement with the subject of this verb, governing the two clauses tou/s te *lakedaimoni/ous...o)/ntas, and th/n te nh=son...ou)=san. The clause u(ponow=n... e)spe/mpein is parenthetical.

plei/ous o(/ntas—‘to be more numerous’ than he had thought.

u(ponow=n pro/teron—this refers to the arrangements for provisioning the island in the truce, ch. 16. e)la/ssosi—for a smaller number than was stated, or than now appeared. Demosthenes had been under the impression that the enemy had overstated their numbers in order to get a store of provisions. u(ponow=n and e)spe/mpein are imperfect.

au)tou=—the invariable MSS reading. Professor Kennedy considers it to be the genitive, referring to to\n si=ton and governed by e)la/ssosi, and translates ‘suspecting that he (Dem.) was sending in the corn for a smaller number than the corn itself’, i.e. smaller than corresponded to the rations imported according to the terms of the armistice. It is true that in ch. 16, lines 9 and 13, the words e)kpe/mpein and e)spe/mpein are used of the Lacedaemonians, which is an argument in favour of their being here also the subject of e)spe/mpein. The Spartans however would not be allowed by Demosthenes to convey the corn into Sphacteria themselves, and so to have constant intercommunication with their men on the island. Whatever the particular arrangements were, the rations would be delivered by the agency of the Athenians, and therefore e)spe/mpein is here used of Demosthenes, who actually ‘sent in’ the corn.

It has also been proposed to take au)tou= with e)spe/mpein as equivalent to au)to/se, but this seems impossible, the occurrence of such words as e)ntau=qa and e)kei= with verbs of motion (e.g. i(/na per m(/rmhnto, ch. 48, 31), being no warrant for such a use of au)tou=, which as an adverb means ‘on the spot’.

au)to/se, au)toi=s, au)tou/s, and au)tou\s pe/mpein have been suggested as emendations. Of these au)tou/s, which is read by Classen, gives the best sense and supplies a subject to e)spe/mpein: though it is open to the objection that its meaning must be gathered from the context, those who sent in the corn not being identical with tou\s *lakedaimoni/ous, line 9. (See Appendix.）

th/n te nh=son—I have adopted the transposition of the clauses thn te nh=son...ou=san and to/te...poiei=sqai, which is approved by Krüger and followed by Classen. It has the advantage of avoiding grammatical difficulty, and greatly improving the sense. The fire disclosed the number of the enemy, and made landing easier. Demosthenes then saw the prospect of effecting a capture, which was in truth worth a struggle, and accordingly prepared for the attempt.

It must however be noted that according to manuscript authority the clause to/te...poiei=sqai follows e)spe/mpein. If this order be retained, the inf. poiei=sqai depends on u(ponow=n or the sense of thinking implied therein and it is necessary to insert de/ after to/te (Poppo). We thus get the meaning, ‘thinking that the Athenians were now the more eager, as for a prize worthy of their efforts’. Arnold reads to/ te...poiei=sqai dependent on katidw/n, but the arrangement is extremely awkward.

eu)apobatwte/ran—the island was ‘easier to land on’ because the fire had destroyed the cover in which the enemy could have posted themselves.

to/te w(s e)p' a)cio/xrewn—following th\n e)pixei/rhsin pareskeua/zeto, ‘as for a prize worthy of a more earnest effort on the part of the Athenians’, or perhaps ‘a risk which called for’ such an effort. a)cio/xrewn, ‘worthy, adequate’, is here followed by an infinitive clause. We have, v. 13, a)cio/xrewn o)/ntwn dra=n, in the sense of ‘competent’: also Hdt. iv. 126.

metape/mpwn—‘sending for’. In this sense the middle would be expected; Thucydides however uses active and middle indifferently: cf. ch. 15, 4, note on bouleu/ein.

prokalou/menoi ei) bou/lointo—‘proposing, if they would, etc.’ sc. that they should agree to these terms: the force of bou/lointo extends to the end of the sentence, which is partly elliptical: cf. ch. 37, 8, e)kh/ruca/n te ei) bouloi/nto.

sfi/si—the Athenians, referring to subject of pe/mpousi, = ‘to us’. sfa=s au)tou/s—i.e. tou\s e)n th=| nh/sw|.

e)f' w(=|...thrh/sontai—‘on condition that they shall be kept’: i. 113, e)f' w(=| tou\s a)/ndras komiou=ntai, ‘on condition that they shall have their men restored’: so i. 103, e)f' w(=| te e)ci/asin. For this use of e)pi/ cf. ch. 16, 24, ai( spondai\ e)pi\ tou/tois e)ge/nonto: it gives the ground or understanding on which the truce was based. For fut. indic. see Goodwin, § 65, especially beginning and note 5.

fulakh=| metri/a|—an order not uncommon in Thuc.; cf. ch. 10, 8, kindu/nou tou= taxi/stou. The definite article here seems to imply a particular kind of imprisonment, which would be called metri/a, the conditions of which were supposed to be known to the Lacedaemonians.

e(/ws a)\n...cumbaqh=|—‘till terms should be arranged concerning the general issue’. tou= ple/onos—the question of the war in general, as opposed to the smaller part of it which concerned Pylos in particular: so ch. 117, 7, cumbh=nai ta\ plei/w, ‘to make general terms’, as opposed to a temporary truce: cf. note on ch. 17, 17, tou= ple/onos. cumbaqh=|—aor. pass. of cumbai/nw (so ch. 23, 8, parabaqh=|): the perf. pass. inf. cumbeba/sqai occurs viii. 98.

e)pe/sxon—‘delayed’, often used with the acc. of time: ch. 73, 29, xro/non de\ e)pisxo/ntes: cf. ch. 5, 4, note.

u(sterai/a|—sc. h(me/ra|: ch. 25, 32. The termination -aios is especially used of a day; so i. 61, tritai=oi a)fi/konto, ‘they came on the third day’.

e)p' o)li/gas nau=s—the heavy armed men were landed first, the rest of the force following at daybreak, ch. 32, 6. th=s nh/sou e(kate/rwqen—‘on both sides of the island’, = ab utraque parte. So words like inde are used of the quarter on which a movement is made: cf. line 13, e)k.

w(=de ga\r dieteta/xato—‘the enemy were disposed as follows’: ato, an Ionic form, = nto as seen in e)le/lunto: so v. 6 and vii. 4, e)teta/xato: iii. 13, teta/xatai: ib. e/fqa/ratai i.e. e)/fqar-n-tai. In Plat. Rep. 533 B we have tetra/fatai from tre/pw. These forms are not found in the orators, the substantive verb, as infr. tetagme\noi h)=san, being the usual periphrasis for an unpronounceable third person plural.

me/son de/—the absence of articles in this clause is remarkable. me/son is indeed often used without to/ for ‘the centre’ of an army, and here is similarly used of the centre of the island or of the Lacedaemonian position. On the same principle the definite sense is to be supplied with o(malw/taton and peri\ to\ u)/dwr. There seems to have been only one spring, and that was brackish (a(lmuro/n), ch. 26, 16.

kai\ ga/r ti—‘for indeed there was also, etc.’; this explains why it was less e)pi/maxon. li/qwn—‘made of stones’; i. 93, oi( qeme/lioi pantoi/wn li/qwn u)po/keintai, ‘the lower courses consist of stones of all sorts’. Krüger quotes some other instances. For loga/dhn see note on ch. 4, 7.

ei) katalamba)noi—‘if they should be hard pressed’: for katalamba/nw see note on ch. 20, 4. a)naxw/rhsis biaiote/ra— a retreat unusually hard pressed: v. 73, h( fugh\ kai a)poxw/rhsis ou\ bi/aios ou)de\ makra\ h/=n: so ii. 33, biaio/teron a)nagago/menoi, after the failure of a naval attempt.

e)/n te tai=s eu)nai=s—te couples this clause with its acc. participle to the nominative laqo/ntes th\n a)po/basin, which is in agreement with oi) *)aqhnai=oi. Classen quotes from Tac. Hist. i. 45, vinciri iussum et maiores poenas daturum affirmans praesenti exitio subtraxit. Demosthenes now repeated the manoeuvre by which he had surprised the Ambraciots the year before; iii. 112, a(/ma o)/|rqrw| e)pipi/ptei...e)/ti e)n tai=s eu)nai=s k.t.l.

laqo/ntes th\n a)po/basin—‘having landed without being seen’, a)po/basin is a determinant accusative, ‘in the landing’: a strange construction. Rutherford inserts poihsa/menoi.

e)s e)/formon—because all the ships lay round the island at night; ch. 23, 14.

e)k me\n new=n e(bdomh/konta—seventy ships were already at Pylos, ch. 23, 18, and Cleon had brought a small number besides. qalami/wn—the oarsmen of the lowest bench, usually called qalami=tai. They were left to look after the ships, probably as being less able-bodied than the qrani=tai and zugi=tai, who had to work longer oars.

According to the calculation on ch. 9, 13, each ship would furnish upwards of 100 men, giving a total of about 8000 sailors. Besides these there were 800 heavy-armed, at least 1600 archers and targeteers, and Messenians and others from the garrison. Demosthenes and Cleon had therefore a force of more than 10,000 men to attack the 420 Lacedaemonians with their attendant Helots.

w(s e)/kastoi e)skeuasme/noi—‘equipped as they severally were’, i.e. as well as could be managed in each case. In this phrase, which is far from uncommon, the participle suggests the verb which is to be supplied with w(s: vi. 17, taxu\ d' a)\n w(s e)/kastoi prosxwroi=en, ‘they would speedily join us severally’, lit. ‘as each (would be inclined to do so)’. toco/tai te—corresponding to e)k me\n new=n: so i. 144, te answers to me/n, where Poppo cites other instances. Krüger writes toco/tai de/. Three divisions of the force are noted, the sailors (me/n), the archers etc. brought by Cleon (te), and besides these (te) the Messenians and others on the spot.

katei=xon—‘were posted’, lit. ‘held (their quarters)’: viii. 28, e)n h(=| *)amo/rghs pole/mios w)\n katei=xe, ‘was maintaining (his position)’: so habito = ‘to live’; and so ‘to keep’ is sometimes used in English.

*dhmosqe/nous de\ ta/cantos—Demosthenes, who appears to have directed the entire attack, brought to bear on the Spartans the same tactics that had overthrown his own army in Aetolia (iii. 98, 99). die/sthsan—‘were divided’; elsewhere used of taking different sides in a quarrel, as ch. 61, 8, kata\ po/leis die/stamen. kata/—distributive, ‘in bodies of two hundred or more’; te and kai/ have here a disjunctive force, implying that there were bodies answering both descriptions, some of the stated size, some larger.

e)/sti d' h)=|—‘and at some points’: so i. 93, etc.: we have also e)/sgin o)/te, ‘at times’, i. 25, etc.; and various similar expressions with the relative, as e)/stin w)=n, e)/sti par' oi(=s, ei/si\n oi(/, this last phrase being always plural.

ta\ metewro/tata—‘the highest points’.

pro\s o(/ ti a)ntita/cwntai—for subj. see note on kaqormi/swntai, ch. 13, 13. a)ntita/cwntai— so vi. 102, a)nteta/canto pro\s tou\s *)aqhnai/ous, ‘faced, drew up against’: cf. ch. 11, 3 e)ta/canto: ch. 35, 10, etc. The aor. middle not having a passive force we must understand ‘themselves’ or ‘their forces’ in all these cases; indeed an object is expressed after a)ntita/casqai in ii. 87 and iii. 56.

a)mfi/boloi—‘exposed on all sides, between two fires’: so ch. 36, 19: ii. 76, e)n a(mfibo/lw|: from ba/llw in the sense of ‘to shoot at, hit with a missile’, as in line 19, and often in this description. tw=| plh/qei—‘from the number’ of their assailants; dat. of instrumental cause.

h(=| xwrh/seian—opt. because of e)/mellon, ‘wherever they went the foe were sure to be in their rear’; it corresponds to h(=| a(\n xwrh/swsin after a present. Classen is perhaps right in taking oi( pole/mioi as nom. to xwrh/seian, as pole/mioi is used in line 16 of the Lacedaemonians. In most editions the comma is placed after xwrh/seian and pole/mioi is nom. to e)/mellon.

yiloi\ kai\ oi( a)porw/tatoi—a)/poros is taken by nearly all commentators as meaning in this passage ‘hard to deal with’, of those against whom a po/ros or ‘means of acting’ can not be found. The sense then is ‘light armed troops and those the most difficult to cope with’. The words kai\ oi) come in very awkwardly with a)porw/tatoi, and kai/ is bracketed by Classen, who takes yiloi\ oi( a)porw/tatoi as subst. before adj. like kindu/nou tou= taxi/stou.

Probably however kai\ oi( a)porw/tatoi means ‘even the worst provided’, being in partial apposition with yiloi/ and closely connected with e)/xontes a)lkh/n. This view avoids any difficulty as to the construction of kai\ oi(, and gives the excellent sense that even the least efficient combatants proved in the circumstances very effective foes.

It is to be noticed that adjectives which, like a)/poros, admit of both an active and a passive meaning, have usually an active sense when used of persons, and a passive sense when used of things: e.g. Soph. Ant. 79, bi/a| politw=n dra=n e)/fun a)mh/xanos, ‘I am unable to do’, compared with ib. 90, a)mhxa/nwn e)ra=s, ‘you are enamoured of what can not be done’. So a)/poros of persons would naturally be ‘without means’, as i. 9, h)=lqen e)s a)nqrw/pous a)po/rous: Soph. Ant. 360, a)/poros e)p' ou)de\n e)/rxetai. It is however certainly used sometimes of persons in the passive sense, e.g. Plat. Apol. Socr. 18 D: Eur. Bacch. 800.

e)k pollou= e)/xontes a)lkh/n—a)lkh/, ‘prowess, spirit for fighting’: ii. 84, e)s a)lkh\n tre/pesqai opposed to feu/gein: ib. 87, te/xnh a)/neu a)lkh=s ou)de\n w)felei=. The meaning is that the light troops proved valiant and formidable foes with missiles from a distance (e)k pollou=): cf. iii. 30, (qa/lassan) h(=| h)mw=n h\ a)lkh\ tugxa/nei ma/lista ou)=sa = ‘where our main strength lies’. So Aristotle, Eth. Nic. iii. 6 (9). 11, says the a)ndrei=os is brave, e)n oi)=s e)/stin a)lkh/, ‘in circumstances where a man can strike a blow for life and honour’.

oi)=s mhde\ e)pelqei=n—The neg. mh/ implies such that, like qui with the subjunctive.

feu/gonte/s te ga/r—explains oi(=s mhde\ e)pelqei=n. e)kra/toun—‘got the better’, i.e. in speed. a)naxwrou=sin—dat. participle: ii. 79, a)naxwrou=sin e)ne/keinto.

gnw/mh|—‘plan’ or ‘design’ as formed in the mind. to/ te prw=ton. kai/—cf. ch. 103, 15. e)peno/ei—‘planned’.

o(/per h)=n plei=ston—‘what was in fact the main portion of the troops’: ii. 4, to\ plei=ston, ‘the main body’: i. 73, to\ ple/on.

e)sxei=ras e)lqei=n—‘to come to close quarters’: so ch. 96, 9: ch. 43, 9, h)=n h( ma/xh e)n xersi\ pa=sa.

e)c e)nanti/as—‘opposite, in face’: ch. 35, 13, etc.: so iii. 92, e)k kainh=s: i. 77, apo\ th=s prw/ths, etc. A fem. noun is supposed in these expressions, but it is not always clear what noun.

th=| sfete/ra| e)mpeiri/a|—‘their special skill’ as heavy armed infantry: ii. 89, dia\ th\n e)n tw=| pezw=| e\mpeiri/an ta\ plei/w katorqou=ntes.

h)=| ma/lista—lit. ‘wherever especially’, i.e. at any particular point where: so ti/ ma/lista; ‘what in particular?’ The Latin use of maxime with tum, cum, etc. corresponds to this. The opt. and imperf. are frequentative.

kai\ oi( u(postre/fontes—‘and those who retired’: for the use of the article cf. ch. 46, 19, tou\s e)lqo/ntas: v. 5, tou/tois e)ntuxw\n toi=s komizome/nois, etc. In the present passage many editions read oi(/ demonstrative, as in ch. 68, 30. (See Jowett's note; and Lidd. and Scott on o( and o(/s.)

a)/nqrwpoi kou/fws te—two reasons are given for the success of the light troops; their equipment enabled them to elude the enemy, and the ground was in their favour. The first reason is expressed by e)skeuasme/noi and prolamba/nontes in agreement with a)/nqrwpoi, the second by the dat. xwri/wn te xalepo/thti k.t.l. It is therefore the te after xwri/wn which corresponds to kou/fws te. It is however possible to take te and lai\ as merely connecting e)skeuasme/noi and prolamba/nontes.

prolamba/nontes th=s fugh=s—‘getting the advantage in their flight’: vii. 80, prou)/labe pollw=|, ‘got far ahead’. fugh=s is explained as a partitive genitive: so ch. 47, 17, e)peta/xunon th=s o(dou=, ‘quickened on their road’: Hdt. iii. 105, prolamba/nein th=s o(dou=.

xwri/wn te xalepo/thti—‘and from difficulty of ground’: xwri/a, various spots where a struggle took place.

kai\ .o)/ntwn—either this means ‘which also were’, or kai\ connects the dative xalepo/thti with a gen. abs. traxe/wn o)/ntwn. In the latter case the construction is confused between xwri/wn te xalepo/thti kai\ traxu/thti and xwri/wn te xalepw=n kai\ traxe/wn o)/ntwn. A somewhat similar irregularity is noticed on ch. 9, 20.

h)kroboli/santo—‘skirmished’: iii. 73, etc. The aor. implies that this skirmishing is now to be considered at an end.

e)pekqei=n—‘to run out against’: used in v. 9 of a sally from Amphipolis. The variety of words used in these chapters for attacking an enemy is worthy of notice.

gno/ntes au)tou/s—a long sentence loosely strung together, consisting chiefly of participial clauses in agreement with oi( yiloi/. The verb does not come till line 12.

tw=| a)mu/nasqai—with bradute/rous, either ‘from defending themselves’, i.e. from keeping up the struggle so long; or, with var. lect. a)mu/nesqai, in defending themselves. The latter view gives the better sense in a similar passage, vii. 43, o(/pws th=| parou/sh| o(rmh=| mh\ bradei=s ge/nwntai.

kai\ au)toi\ ei)lhfo/tes ‘and having themselves derived the greatest confidence’. th=| o)/yei—lit. ‘from their seeing’, i.e. the sight of their overwhelming superiority in numbers: iii. 38, ou( to\ drasqe\n pisto/teron o)/yei labo/ntes, ‘from having seen it’.

cuneiqisme/noi—lit. ‘having become more habituated to the enemy's no longer appearing equally formidable to them’, i.e. having learned by now to dread their enemy less.

a)/cia th=s prosdoki/as—‘corresponding to their expectation’: v. 60, ou)de\n a)/cion th=s paraskeuh=s; so vi. 21, a)/cion th=s dianoi/as.

dedoulwme/noi—‘cowed’, like slaves before their masters (Arnold): ii. 61, douloi= to\ fro/nhma. w(s e)pi\ *lakedaimoni/ous —‘considering that they were going against Lacedaemonians’: cf. note on ch. 2, 1.

a)qro/oi—with e)mboh/santes: ch. 112, 3, strato\n e)mboh/santa a)qro/on: ii. 92, a)po\ e)no\s keleu/smatos e)mboh/santes.

e)xw/rei polu\s a)/nw—‘rose up in clouds’. to\ pro\ au(tou=— ‘what was before one's self’, tini\ or tina\ being implied: ch. 62. 12, th\n au)tou= tina\ swthri/an proi+dei=n.

ferome/nwn—‘pouring on them’: Plat. Rep. 496 D, e)n xeimw=ni koniortou= kai\ za/lhs u)po\ pneu/matos ferome/nou. fe/resqai often = to move, as of the heavenly bodies, ib. 529 D: Cic. Acad. ii. 26. 82, sol tanta incitatione fertur: so h) fora/, motion, Ar. Eth. Nic. x. 3 (4). 3.

to/ te e)/rgon xalepo/n—‘so now the struggle began to go hard with the Lacedaemonians’: cf. ch. 25, 42, xalepw=s a)pexw/rhsan. kaqi/stato—stronger than e)gi/gneto, as implying a more fixed result: cf. ch. 26, 29, kaqesth/kei.

ou)/te—the next te corresponds to this. oi( pi=loi—‘felt cuirasses’, or according to others ‘felt helmets’. e)/stegon— ‘were proof against’; ste/gw in this sense = ‘to keep out’: ii. 94, nh=es ou)de\n ste/gousai, of leaky vessels.

e)napoke/klasto—the broken spears were sticking in their cuirasses and shields, and impeding their movements. ballome/nwn—gen. abs. ‘as they got hit’.

ei)=xo/n te—‘and they could do nothing with themselves’, not knowing which way to turn, or how to act. Subordinate to this sentence and explanatory of it are the three following clauses introduced by me/n, de/, and te.

th=| o)/yei—lit. ‘in respect of seeing’, as in line 6: iii. 112, ou) kaqorwme/nous th=| o)/yei.

paraggello/mena—‘orders’: so ii. 11, etc.: v. 71, parh/ggellen, ‘passed the word’, or gave orders. kindu/nou...periestw=tos—‘being surrounded by danger on every side’: cf. note on periesto/s, ch. 10, 4. kaq' o(/ ti—‘as to how’, with a)munome/nous swqh=nai.

te/los de/—‘but at last’, an accusative used adverbially; sometimes in the middle of a sentence: ii. 100, w)/ste te/los h\suxi/an h)=gon: cf. the adverbial use of a)rxh/n, ‘to begin with’. traumatizome/nwn—imp., lit. ‘were being wounded’.

e)n tw=| au)tw=|—‘on the same ground’. a)nastre/fesqai— lit. ‘to move to and fro’: vii. 44, o(pli=tai ou)k o)li/goi e)n stenoxwri/a| a)nestre/fonto: Matt xvii. 22, a)nastrefome/nwn de\ au)tw=n e)n th=| *galilai/a|. The Lacedaemonians suffered more from the missiles because their movements were confined within a small space.

cugklh/|santes—‘closing up’, or locking their shields together’: v. 71, h( pukno/ths th=s cugklh/|sews, ‘locking up closely’. With the act. aor. is to be understood ‘their shields’ or ‘their ranks’: cf. note on ch. 32, 17, a)ntita/cwntai.

e)ne/dosan—‘gave in’ or ‘gave ground’, so ch. 37, 2, etc.: cf. ch. 19, 21. u(poxwrou=ntes e)gkatelamba/nonto—‘were caught in making their retreat,’ or ‘on the field’ (cf. e)gkata/lhyin v. 72 fin.).

meta\ tw=n tau/th|—called me/ros ti ou) polu/, ch. 31, 11. tau/th|—‘at this point’.

peri/odon...ei)=xon—‘could not surround and hem them in from the strength of the position’. au)tw=n—objective gen. with peri/odon and ku/klwsin: so sfw=n, line 19. Words in wsis have an active force; ku/klwsis, ‘encircling’, e)leuqe/rwsis, ‘setting free’, etc.: iii. 78, fobou/menoi th\n periku/klwsin, ‘fearing that the foe would surround them’. ou)x ei)=xon—i.e. had not the power of effecting.

w)/sasqai—cf. ch. 11, 15.

kai\ th=s h(me/ras—‘and in fact for the greatest part of the day’. kai/ not uncommonly thus gives a further definition or explanation, sometimes even a correction, of what has gone before. It may then be translated by some such expression as ‘in fact’, ‘that is to say’, etc.; cf. ch. 33, 2, kai\ o)/per h)=n.

oi( me\n e)cela/sasqai—‘the one to dislodge (the enemy) from the hill, the others to maintain their ground’: vii. 5, e)cela/sasqai e)k th=s xw/ras.

a)pe/ranton—‘when it proved endless’; sc. the struggle (to e)/rgon) or the matter generally.

a)/llws e)/fh ponei=n sfa=s—‘said they were wearying themselves to no purpose’: i. 109, ta\ xrh/mata a)/llws a)nalou=to. ponei=n more commonly means ‘to be in distress’: i. 30, oi( cu/mmaxoi e)po/noun: or ‘to be hard pressed’ in battle: ch. 96, 25, e)po/nei to\ eu)w/numon.

sfa=s—see note on ch. 9, 21. The Messenian said a)/llws ponou=men, which is thus represented in oratio obliqua. As the subject of ponei=n is not identical with the subject of e)/fh, but much more extensive, the former is naturally put in the accusative; and this is no violation of the principle by which a)/llws ponei= becomes in orat. obliq. a)/llws e)/fh (au)to\s) ponei=n: cf. Krüger on iii. 111, nomi/sas kataprodi/dosqai sfa=s, where he cites a large number of similar instances, e.g. vi. 49: vii. 4 and 48: viii. 32. (See however ch. 114, 31.)

dokei=n bia/sasqai—‘he was resolved to force the approach’. dokw= and dokw= moi take an aor. or present inf. in the sense ‘I have a mind to, am determined’: Ar. Av. 671, e)gw\ me\n au)th\n kai\ filh=sai/ moi dokw=, ‘I mean to kiss her’: id. Vesp. 177, to\n o)/non e)ca/gein dokw=: cf. Wayte's note on Plat. Protag. 340 A, dokw= moi parakalei=n. bia/sesqai (Cob.) is tempting.

e)k tou= a)fanou=s—so ch. 96, 24: i. 51, e)pe/pleon e)k tou= a)fanou=s. e)k either means ‘starting from where he could not be seen’, like ii. 19, o(rmh/santes a)p' au)th=s, or is used adverbially with tou= a)fanou=s, meaning ‘so as not to be seen’: so e)k tou= fanerou=, e)k tou= profanou=s, etc.

kata\ to\ a)ei\ parei=kon—the meaning is that he made his way as he could find a passage from place to place along the cliffs. kata/—‘along, by way of’, as in ch. 26, 33. parei=kon— ‘affording an opportunity or chance’ of getting along: iii. 1, o(/ph| parei/koi ‘wherever a chance offered’. a)ei/—‘from time to time’, i.e. from point to point.

prosbai/nwn—‘making his approach’: also in iii. 22: ch. 129, 24, etc. Some manuscripts have probai/nwn, ‘advancing’.

e)pe/rrwsen—‘gave fresh confidence to’: cf. note on r(w/mh, ch. 29. 10: in pass. vii. 17, pollw=| ma=llon e)pe/rrwnto. e)pi/ in comp. implies sequence, as in e)piskeua/zw, to repair, e)pibio/w, to survive, e)pigame/w, to marry a new wife: cf. ch. 38. 9. e)fh|rhme/nou.

cumptw/mati—a (rare) substantive from cumpi/ptw, ‘to fall out, happen’ or ‘to happen together’. It means therefore ‘a chance’ or ‘coincidence of circumstances’. Dem. in Dionys. 1295, a)kou/sion su/mptwma = an unavoidable mischance: Ar. Rhet. i. 9. 32 (where see Cope's note), su/mptwma = ‘an accidental coincidence’: as applied to disease it is our symptom. In ch. 68, 10, we have the verb cune/pese, ‘it fell out at the same time’.

e)kei=noi/ te...ou(=toi/ te—taken by the majority of editors as a parenthetical sentence. In some editions, however, there is no stop after ou(=toi/ te, which is taken as nom. to ou)ke/ti a)ntei=xon. According to this latter view the words oi( *Lakedaimo/nioi k.t.l. are by a change of construction left without a verb.

e)kei=noi—the Lacedaemonians at Thermopylae. th=| a)trapw=|—‘by the path’, known to all Greeks: see Hdt. vii. 213, seq. ou(=toi/ te—sc. diefqa/rhsan, though as a matter of fact they were not all slain but compelled to surrender.

polloi=s te—two reasons for their giving ground, the one expressed by part. maxo/menoi, the other by dat. a)sqenei/a|. dia\ th\n sitodei/an gives the reason for a)sqenei/a|.

gnou(s...o(/ti—followed, after an intervening clause, by the participial construction diafqarhsome/nous, as if o)/ti had not preceded: so v. 46, ei\pei=n te e)ke/leuon o)/ti...h)/dh a)\n pepoih=sqai. See Madvig, § 159 R. 4, for similar irregularities.

o(posonou=n—‘ever so little’, lit. ‘how much soever’: vi. 56, ei/ kai\ o(posoiou=n tolmh/seian, ‘if ever so few should make the venture’: ou)=n added to a rel. pronoun or adverb having the same force as the Latin cumque.

e)piklasqei=en th=| gnw/mh|—‘they might be shaken in their resolution’. Here gnw/mh is the ‘determination’ to resist to the last: in iii. 59 the same phrase is used of a ‘fixed purpose’ to do justice without mercy: in iii. 67 e)piklasqh=nai by itself means ‘to be softened’. ta\ o(/pla paradou=nai—explanatory of what the Athenians hoped for. Classen brackets these words, believing them to have been inserted from the following line.

e)kh/ruca/n te—‘so they made proclamation’: ch. 4, 12. ei) bou/lointo k.t.l.—sc. that they should do so: cf. ch. 30, 18: iii. 52, prope/mpei kh/ruka le/gonta ei\ bou/lontai paradou=nai th\n po/lin: v. 115, e)kh/rucan ei)/ tis bou/letai *)aqhnai/ous lhi/zesqai.

w(/ste bouleu=sai—‘on condition that the Athenians should decide’, lit. ‘so that’: ch. 46, 11, cune/bhsan w/ste, ‘they made terms on condition that’: Xen. Anab. ii. 6. 6, e)co\n r(a|qumei=n, bou/letai ponei=n w(/ste polemei=n, ‘when he might live at ease, he prefers labour provided he may be at war’.

e)kei/nois—the Athenians, though just spoken of, are called e)kei=noi, ‘those yonder’, because in place and in interests alike they are remote from the Lacedaemonians, with whom this part of the sentence deals: iii. 52, paradou=nai th\n po/lin toi=s *lakedaimoni/ois kai\ dikastai=s e)k ei/nois xrh/sasqai: ii. 11, o(/tan e)n th=| gh=| o(rw=sin h(ma=s dh|ou=nta/s te kai\ ta)kei/nwn fqei/rontas, ‘when (the Athenians) once see us in their country ravaging and wasting the possessions of our enemies yonder’, i.e. of the Athenians. So in the orators a person just named is often called e)kei=nos, when not present in the court or immediately concerned in the case: ille is similarly used.

The following are instances of the Thucydidean use of this pronoun: i. 132, paidika/ pote w)\n au)tou= kai\ pisto/tatos e)kei/nw|, where both au/tou= and e)kei/nw| refer to Pausanias (see Shilleto's note for parallels): ii. 7, *lakedaimoni)ois ..toi=s ta)kei/nwn (sc. tw=n *lakedaimoni/wn) e(lome/nois: viii. 45, w(s oi( *xi=oi...a)ciou=si...a)/llous u\pe\r th=s e)kei/nwn (sc. tw=n *xi/wn) e)leuqeri/as kinduneu/ein.

parh=kan—‘dropped’, or ‘lowered’, shewing that they ceased to resist: so Hdt. iii. 128, meth=kan ta\s ai)xma/s, ‘dropped their spears’, or ‘lowered their spear points’, in token of submission. oi( plei=stoi—‘for the most part’; partial apposition; see note on ch. 6, 4.

dhlou=ntes prosi/esqai —dhlw= is commonly followed by a participle, but here by the infin., to avoid the concurrence of two participles: so ch. 47, 8, kata/dhloi o)/ntes...mh\ a)\n bou/lesqai. prosi/esqai—‘to accept, approve of’, with acc.: so ch. 108, 26, a(\ mh\ prosi/entai. The literal meaning is ‘to take, draw to oneself’, hence ‘to admit, adopt’. It is also used with nom. of thing and acc. of person, meaning, ‘to bring over, attract’: Ar. Eq. 359, e)\n d) ou) prosi/etai/ me, ‘one thing pleases me not’: Hdt. i. 48, ou)de\n prosi/eto/ min. ‘With this, and the former signf., may be compared the double idiom, I like it not,—it likes me not’ (Lidd. and Scott).

e)kei/nwn—‘on the part of the Lacedaemonians’.

tou= de\ met) au)to/n—with e)fh|rhme/nou, ‘the officer who had been chosen to succeed after him’. So when the first and second in command had fallen at Olpae the leadership devolved on Menedaeus (iii. 109). e)fhrh|me/nou is the pluperfect participle, the appointment having been made beforehand in view of a possible future contingency: for e)pi/ in comp. implying sequence, see note on ch. 36, 14. For the position of the words cf. note on ch. 5, 10.

ei)/ ti e)kei=noi pa/sxoien—‘if anything should befall them’ a frequent euphemism, meaning if they should fall = si quid illis accidisset (Suetonius uses evenio in the same way): cf. Ar. Vesp. 385, h)/n ti pa/qw 'gw/: Eur. Iph. T. 753, h)/n ti vau=s pa/qh|: Dem. Lept. 472, e)a/n ti sumbh=| pote/. The opt. with ei) in orat. obliqua in a sentence referring to past time, often represents h)/n with subj. in orat. directa in a sentence referring to present time (Madvig, § 132 a).

diakhrukeu/sasqai—‘to send a message across’: like diapleu/sas, line 17: diebi/bazon, ch. 8, 46. In such words the mid. voice is used of those who employ the herald or get the message sent.

e)kei/nwn me/n—i.e. of the Lacedaemonians; put first in the sentence for emphasis, in construction governed by ou)de/na. a)fe/ntwn—sc. tw=n *)aqhnai/wn, ‘the Athenians allowing no Lacedaemonians (to pass over)’.

o( teleutai=os diapleu/sas...a)nh/r—‘the messenger who crossed last’. All the words between the article and the substantive form the epithet of a)nh/r, while teleutai=os especially belongs to and qualifies diapleu/sas: so ch. 8, 49, oi( teleutai=oi (sc. diaba/ntes) kai\ e)gkatalhfqe/ntes.

o(/ti—not uncommonly introduces the actual words: v. 10. le)gei o)/ti, oi( a)/ndres h(ma=s ou) me/nousi. This is a well-known usage in New Testament Greek.

mhde\n ai)sxro\n poiou=ntas—‘provided you do nothing dishonourable’. Possibly implying, as the scholiast says, that death was more noble than surrender: at any rate thrusting all possible responsibility on their unfortunate countrymen.

dieskeua/zonto—this verb is only found here in Thucydides, who elsewhere prefers paraskeua/zomai. The preposition probably denotes the different arrangements of the Athenians for disposing their force or distributing their prisoners, as in the following diedi/dosan.

diekomi/santo—komi/zomai is the word commonly used for recovering or obtaining the restoration of the bodies of the slain: compounded with dia/ it means ‘conveyed across to themselves’ or ‘got conveyed across’: so in i. 89 it is used of the bringing back of the women and children to Athens from Salamis, where they had been placed during the Persian invasion.

tosoi/de—‘the following number’; see note on toia/de, ch. 9, 29. o)ktw\ a)pode/ontes triako/sioi—‘three hundred all but eight’, lit. ‘failing, falling short of eight’. o)ktw/ is genitive: ii. 13, triakosi/wn a)pode/onta mu/ria = 9700.

stadi/a—‘standing, hand to hand’: Hom. Il. xiii. 314, stadi/h u)smi/nh, ‘close fight’: so e)n stadi/h| alone, ib. 514, etc.: cf. vii. 81, ou) custado\n ma/xais e)xrw=nto, ‘they did not fight pitched battles’.

xro/nos de\ o( cu/mpas—the same order is found i. 1, ki/nhsis ga\r au(/th megi/sth| e)ge/neto, the substantive being put first in such instances in order to shew at once what the sentence is about. e)ge/neto—‘amounted to’: see note on 9, 12.

a)ph=san—‘were away’ a correction of Cobet's for a)ph/|esan ‘went away’, the proper form of writing which is a)ph=|san (Nov. Lect. p. 346): the same correction is made ch. 42, 20.

toi=s e)sple/ousi—neuter, ‘by the provisions thrown in’; ch. 27, 3, si=tos e)splei=. The Athenians had a blockading squadron at Salamis, ii. 93, tou= mh\ e)splei=n *megareu=si mhd' e)kplei=n mhde/n, ‘to prevent imports or exports’.

e)gkatelh/fqh—i.e. were found in the island on its capture: note on ch. 8, 49.

h)\ pro\s th\n e)cousi/an—‘than he might have done’; lit. ‘than (was possible) looking at, having regard to, his ability’.

maniw/dhs—this refers to the mad and reckless manner in which Cleon asserted that he would perform a dangerous military enterprise in a given time. There was nothing insane in the attempt itself. Plutarch (Nic. ch. 7) says that the Athenians were wont to indulge Cleon's koufo/ths and mani/a. He shewed no mani/a in carrying out his undertaking, but succeeded (ib. ch. 8) tu/xh| xrhsa/menos a)gaqh=| kai\ strathgh/sas a)/rista meta\ *dhmosqe/nous.

a)pe/bh—‘was fulfilled, came off’: iii. 26, ou)de\n a)pe/bainen au)toi=s w)\n prosede/xonto, ‘none of their expectations were realized’: iii. 93, para\ do/can au)toi=s a)pe/bh: ch. 104, 11, ou)de\n a)pe/bainen. a)po/ thus used in composition signifies a result corresponding to what goes before; thus a)podi/dwmi often = to give in the proper quarter, e.g. to deliver a letter, to pay due honour, etc.

u(pe/sth—‘undertook’; the lit. meaning of u(fi/stamai in this sense being to place oneself under an engagement: viii. 29, w)/sper u(pe/sth: Hom. Il. iv. 267, w(s u(pe/sthn: also with inf. and with acc.

h)ci/oun—‘expected’, lit. ‘thought it worthy of them’: i. 136, ou)k a(cioi= feu)gonta timwrei=sqai, ‘he calls on him not to avenge himself on an exile’: iii. 44, ou)k a)ciw= u(ma=s to\ xrh/simon a)pw/sasqai, ‘I would not have you reject’. In such instances the negative is placed as with ou)/ fhmi = I deny or refuse: i. 28, po/lemon de\ ou)k ei)/wn poiei=n, ‘they urged them not to make war’

a)pistou=nte/s te—this nominative has no verb, the construction being altered after the introduction of the clause with gen. abs. tino/s e)rome/nou.

di' a)xqhdo/na—‘for the sake of annoyance’, i.e. in order to insult or mortify. dia/ with acc. usually means ‘in consequence of’; sometimes however it is used, like e(/neka, of the object or purpose; ii. 89, dia\ th\n sfete/ran do/can, ‘for the sake of their honour’: ch. 102, 20, dia\ to\ perie/xein au)th/n, ‘for the sake of enclosing it’: v. 53, dia\ tou= qu/matos th\n e)/spracin, ‘for the sake of exacting payment of the sacrifice’: so Plat. Rep. 524 c, dia\ th\n tou/tou safh/neian, ‘for the sake of making this clear’: Dem. Boeot. 1004, di' e)ph/reian, ‘for spite’: Ar. Eth. Nic. iv. 3 (8), 31, di' u)/brin.

kaloi\ ka)gaqoi/—‘A title’, says Arnold, ‘corresponding, in the union which is expressed of personal qualities with a certain superiority of birth and condition more nearly with our word gentleman than with any other. The Spartans prided themselves on being all kaloi\ ka)gaqoi/; and the question, put probably by a democratical seaman, was intended to sneer at once at the pretension and the name’. The term is only found here and viii. 48 (also as a quotation): see Neil, Ar. Eq. Ap. ii.

a)/traktos—a word meaning some kind of reed, or thorn, and thence applied to anything made thereof. In prose it means a spindle, and is used by the poets for an arrow. Probably the Laconians used the word in the latter sense; though some suppose that the heavy-armed soldier called darts and arrows spindles in contempt.

o( e)ntugxa/nwn—diefqei/reto—Classen takes e)ntugxa/nwn absolutely, ‘he who came in the way, he who chanced’, governing toi=s te li/qois kai\ toceu/masi by diefqei/reto. For this use of e)ntugla/nw cf. ch. 132, 20, toi=s e)ntuxou=sin e)pitre/pein. Here however the run of the words seems to connect e)ntugxa/nwn with what follows. Thucydides in fact often adopts such an order that the intermediate words may be governed either by what precedes or what follows, or may indeed depend upon both; cf. ch. 17, 10. Note the force of the imperfect tense in e)ntugxa/nwn and diefqei/reto, ‘he who (from time to time) came in the way was slain (on each occasion)’.

e)bou/leusan—‘resolved’; see note on ch. 15, 4.

me/xri ou(=—with subjunctive without a)/n: ch. 16, 19.

w(s e)s patri/da tau/thn—lit., ‘as into their native country in this’, = e)s tau/thn w)s (e)s) patri/da. In prose ou(=tos without the article is always predicative in force: e)/xwn tou=to e)pi/gramma ‘having this as an inscription’, not ‘having this inscription’.

e)/sti ga\r h( *pu/los k.t.l.—nearly similar words are used in ch. 3, 15, where we have the reasons for which Demosthenes wished to occupy Pylos.

e)lhi/zonto—Classen reads e)lhi/zonto instead of e)lh/izo/n te, on the ground that the word, which occurs six times in Thucydides, should always be in the middle voice: so iii. 85, e)lhi/zonto tou\s e)n th=| nh/sw| kai\ polla\ e)/blapton.

kai\ fobou/menoi—‘fearing lest they should have some of the institutions in the land still further revolutionized’; fearing, that is, a new insurrection of the Helots, or some other rising against their aristocratic rule: cf. ch. 55, 8, fobou/menoi mh\ sfi/si new/tero/n ti ge/nhtai tw=n peri\ th\n kata/stasin, ‘relating to their constitution’.

e)/ndhloi ei)=nai—sc. ou) r\a|di/ws fe/rontes, ‘to betray their uneasiness’: ii. 64, mh\ e)/ndhloi e)/ste baruno/menoi, ‘do not shew your distress’.

foitw/ntwn—‘though they often came’: for gen. abs. see ch. 3, 8.

The Athenians, in the warlike and hopeful temper caused by their success at Pylos, now begin a series of attempts to occupy points on the enemy's coast. The command is taken by Nicias, who was both encouraged to action and incited to rivalry by the glory which Cleon had gained.

eu(qu/s—with meta\ tau=ta: i. 56, meta\ tau=ta d' eu)qu/s.

e)n i(ppagwgoi=s nausi/—‘in horse-transports’; first mentioned by Thuc. in 430, when they were made by the Athenians out of old ships (ii. 56): i)ppagwga\ ploi=a were used by the invading Persians under Xerxes (Hdt. vii. 79). Aristophanes, lauding the services of the cavalry in this expedition to Corinth, says of the horses (Eq. 599), ei)s ta\s i(ppagwgou\s ei)seph/dwn a)ndrikw=s.

ple/ontes—‘in their voyage’, imperf. part., as in ch. 3, 1, referring to the progress of the whole enterprise: the aor. e)/sxon denotes the first operation attempted. a(/ma e(/w| goes with e)/sxon: if it referred to the departure from Athens pleu/santes would be required.

metacu\ *xersonh/sou kai\ *(rei/tou—see the map in Arnold's edition. The Chersonesus, or peninsula, was a promontory formed by a low ridge of mount Oneion, which intercepted the view between Cenchreae and the beach where the Athenians landed. Rheitus, ‘the beck’, was not quite two miles to the south.

to\ pa/lai—at the time of the Dorian conquest of Peloponnesus, known as ‘the return of the Heraclidae’. The legend is that the Dorians under Aletes reduced Corinth by incessant attacks, expelled the Aeolian dynasty of Sisyphus, and became thenceforth the dominant race. i(druqe/ntes—‘having established themselves’, with pro/s: so i. 131, e/s *kolwna\s i(druqei/s.

e)p' au)tou=—note the demonstrative form of the second clause in a relative sentence.

kate/sxon—so katasxo/ntes, ch. 54, 1; 57, 13.

o( de\ *)isqmo\s ei)/kosi—reckoning to the extreme south of the isthmus where Cenchreae stands.

e)k plei/onos—‘from some time back’: ch. 103, 15, e)/praca/n te e)k plei/onos: so v. 82: viii. 88. The order of the sentence will admit of taking e)k plei/onos either with the words which follow it or with those which go before, while in sense either connexion is right. Timely warning enabled the Corinthians to take timely precautions. tw=n e)/cw *)isqmou=—i. e. those on the north towards Megara, who had their own coast to watch. Note the absence of the article with *)isqmou=: cf. ch 18, 11 note.

a)ph=san—a correction for a)ph/|esan: cf. ch. 39, 5. Poppo retains a)ph/|esan e/n as being equivalent to a)ph=lqon kai\ a)ph=san e)n.

nukto\s katapleu/santes—the Athenians made the coast (kata/) while it was still night, and landed at daybreak, line 8. to\ shmei=a—if it was still night these were fire-signals raised by the watchers on the coast: so ii. 94 and iii. 22, fruktoi\ h(/|ronto pole/mioi: iii. 80, e)fruktwrh/qhsan e)ch/konta nh=es: cf. ch. 111, 4. shmei=a h)/rqh is used i. 49; i. 63; vii. 34, of a signal for battle; and viii. 95 of a signal for embarkation.

*kegxreia=|—sing. as in ch. 44, 16: viii. 10 etc. *keyxreiai/. h(\n a)ra—cf. ch. 8, 24.

h)=lqen e)pi/—‘advance upon’; not in a hostile sense.

toi=s a)/llois—‘with the rest’, sc. under his command: dat. of the force with which the attack was made, a regular and common construction: cf. ch. 42, 3: Madvig, § 42.

cune/ballen—‘was to encounter’ the enemy, or ‘went on to encounter’: the imp. is read by most editors on good manuscript authority; Arnold has cune/bale.

e)/peita de/—‘in the second place’, corresponding to prw=ton me)n. In this connexion Thucydides uses e)/peita either with or without de/, while other Attic writers usually omit de/: cf. ch. 44, 1, xro/non me\n ou)=n polu\n...e)/peita.

e)n xersi\ pa=sa—‘hand to hand throughout’: vi. 70, genome/nhs e)n xersi\ th=s ma/xhs: cf. ch. 33, 6, e)s xei=ras e)lqei=n: cf. ch. 96, 9. e)w/santo—‘repulsed’, lit. ‘drove from themselves’: so ch. 96, 22: in ch. 11, 15, and 35, 13, it is used of assailants forcing their way.

ai(masia/n—a stone wall or fence, the usual meaning of the word. toi=s li/qois—the stones of which the wall was made loga/dhn: cf. note on ch. 4, 7.

tw=| eu)wnu/mw| ke/ra| e(autw=n—the position of e(autw=n is to be observed. It is admissible because of the epithet eu)wnu/mw| standing where it does; otherwise to\ e)autw=n ke/ras is the right order: cf. note on ch. 5, 10.

a)ne/streyan—‘wheeled round’; the only instance of the active used intransitively by Thucydides: in ii. 49 it is trans.: the middle is found in a somewhat different sense, ch. 35, 2, etc.

kata\ to\ eu/w/numon—‘opposed to’: v. 71, kata\ to\ tw=n e)nanti/wi eu\w/numon.

h)/lpizon...peira/sein—‘they expected the enemy would make an attempt towards the village of Solygeia’: cf. note on ch. 25, 48, kata\ to\n lime/na e)pei/rwn.

cummaxo/menoi—pred. ‘by fighting with them’, i.e. their help was of service in the action.

e)/qento ta\ o(/pla—‘halted’, or ‘took up their position’. The literal meaning of the phrase ti/qesqai ta\ o)/pla is to ground, or put down one's arms, the Greeks being accustomed to lay down their shields and spears when they halted for any time, for instance to listen to an address from their commanders. The converse expression is a)nalamba/nein ta\ o(/pla (ch. 130, 19: Hdt. vi. 78: Xen. Hel. ii. 4, 19, etc.). From the idea of taking up a position thus implied, the phrase ti/qesqai ta\ o(/pla is often used, as in the present passage, when the idea of actually putting down the arms would be out of place. Thus the Thebans, after making their way by surprise into Plataeae, established themselves in the public place (qe/menoi e/s th\n a)gora\n ta\ o(/pla), and made proclamation for any one who chose ti/qesqai par' au(tou\s ta\ o)/pla i.e. to join them (ii. 2). So ta\ o(/pla is used for the camp or position occupied by troops i. 111; iii. 1. Such phrases are especially common in the military language of Xenophon; see Shilleto on ii. 2.

oi( plei=stoi...a)pe/qanon—i.e. their chief loss was at this point. oi( plei=stoi must mean the greater part of those who fell, not of their whole force, for we see afterwards that their total loss only amounted to 212: so vii. 30, a)poktei/nousin au(tw=n e/n th=| e)kba/sei tou\s plei/stous, where the total loss was 250 out of 1300. Classen takes the meaning to be that the greater part of the Corinthians on the right wing were slain, their allies escaping better.

kata\ di/wcin pollh/n—‘hard pressed’, with fugh=s genome/nhs.

oi( e)k th=s po/lews presbu/teroi—cf. ch. 8, 1, tw=n e)k th=s *)attikh=s. The presbu/teroi had remained to guard the city.

e)gkate/lipon—‘left on the field’, more commonly used of leaving a garrison etc. in a town, as in ch. 25, 51.

e)pikhrukeusa/menoi...a)nei/lonto—asking leave to remove the dead was an admission of defeat, which is also implied by the use of e)pikhrukeu/esqai. Thus Plutarch (Nic. ch. 6) says that Nicias preferred to sacrifice his victory and his glory rather than leave two Athenian citizens unburied.

*meqw/nhn—‘the place is now called *me/qana, as the name is written by Pausanias and by Strabo, with this remark on the part of the latter, that in some copies of Thucydides it was written *meqw/nh, like the town so called in Macedonia. As the Macedonian town was the more famous, the reading *meqw/nh probably prevailed more and more, and is now found in every MS. of Thucydides at present in existence’ (Arnold).

a)polabo/ntes—‘cutting off’ from the mainland by a wall and trench. We are told (i. 7) that the maritime Greeks thus established themselves on peninsulas (ta\s i)sqmou\s a)pela/mbanon) for the sake of security and convenience. The peninsula of Methana, which is of considerable size, is connected with the mainland by a very narrow neck.

e)n w(=|—i.e. on the isthmus or neck itself; but perhaps e)n h(=| should be read, in agreement with xersonh/sou: cf. Classen's critical note. Pausanias (ii. 34) applies the term i)sqmo/s to the whole peninsula when he says th=s *troizhni/as gh=s e)sti\n i/sqmo)s e)pi\ polu\ die/xwn e(s qa/lassan, e)n de( au)tw=| po/lisma ou) me/ga e)pi\ qala/ssh| *me/qana.

to\n e)/peita xro/non—till the peace concluded in 421. In v. 18 we find Methone named as one of the places which the Athenians agreed to give up.

xro/non o(/n—so edited by Poppo and others as being in accordance with other passages, such as iii. 18, kata\ to\n au)to\n xro/non o(\n oi( *lakedaimo/nioi peri) to\n i)sqmo\n h)=san, and as best accounting for the variation of reading here found. Others have kaq' o(/n: while the manuscript authority is in favour of omitting o(/n, and reading tau=ta e)ge/neto, kai/.... In this last case we have kai/ connecting two statements of time, as is very common in New Testament Greek, e.g. Mk. xv. 25, h)=n de\ w)/ra tri/th kai\ e)stau/rwsan au)to/n. So in Thuc. we have, iii. 110, tw=| de\ *dhmosqe/nei a)gge/lletai...kai\ pe/mpei: cf. Soph. Phil. 355, h)=n d' h)=mar deu/teron...kai\ kathgo/mhn. In the present passage o)/n might have been omitted by a copyist from confusion with the last syllable of xro/non and kaq' o)/n subsequently added as an explanatory gloss.

th=s *(istw/nhs—subjective gen., as we say the city of London. Thucydides elsewhere uses the appositional construction, as iii. 85, e)s to\ o)/ros th\n *)istw/nhn: so line 14. to/te, lit. ‘at that time’, refers to the events described in iii. 85, and may be rendered ‘as we have related’: viii. 20, katadiwxqei=sai to/te.

prosbalo/ntes—‘having made their assault’, without a following case. to\ tei/xisma—called tei=xos iii. 85, a fortified position on Istone, held by 600 men.

cune/bhsan w(/ste—cf. ch. 37, 10: infr. line 16.

me/xri ou(=—cf. ch. 41, 3, note. a(/n—for e)a/n, rarely used by Thucydides, though h(/n is common. Possibly w(/st' e)a/n should be read. lelu/sqai—ch. 16, 18.

oi( tou= dh/mou prosta/tai—so iii. 75: cf. ch. 66, 12, of Megara. The term appears to be a general one, sometimes implying a particular office and sometimes not: vid. Arnold on vi. 35.

tou\s e)lqo/ntas—‘those who were sent’. Poppo suggests au)tou\s e)lqo/ntas, certainly a more usual form of expression: see however the note on kai\ oi( u(postre)fontes, ch. 33, 13.

pei/qousi...e(toima/sein—there is a slight irregularity in this sentence. The clause with pei/qousi is lost sight of after the introduction of the participial clause u(pope/myantes fi/lous, and o(/ti kra/tiston ei)/h depends upon le)gein.

tina\s o)li/gous—‘some few’: i. 63, o)li/gous me/n tinas a)pobalw/n. It was stipulated that any attempt at escape ended the treaty. kat' eu)/noian dh/—ch. 23, 8. o(/ti...ei)/h ..e(toima/sein— o(/ti only affects the former clause, the construction changing with the change of subject; so i. 87, ei)=pon o(/ti dokoi=en..., bou/lesqai de/. It is not however quite clear whether au)toi/ refers to the democratic leaders, the subject of pei/qousi, or to fi/loi, the subject of le/gein.

w(s de\ e)/peisan e)lh/fqhsan—the change of subject in this sentence is noticeable: for mhxanhsame/nwn, gen. abs. without subject expressed, see ch. 3, 8. e)le/lunto...parede/donto, for the force of the pluperfect, see Arnold's note quoted on ch. 13, 2: ‘parede/donto must be taken with paralabo/ntes...kaqei=rcan, a few lines below, as if the sentence ran—you are now to suppose the treaty broken, and the prisoners delivered up to the Corcyreans. Upon their having been so delivered, the Corcyreans took them, etc.’

cunela/bonto—parenthetical, ‘helped, contributed to’, with the partitive gen. like cunara/menoi, ch. 10, 1: Hdt. iii. 49, sunela/bonto tou= strateu/matos, ‘took part in’. The subject of this sentence is oi( strathgoi\ kata/dhloi o)/ntes, k.t.l., ‘the obvious fact that the Athenian commanders would not wish’; the predicate having the same force as in ch. 5, 5, o) strato\s e)/ti e)n tai=s *)aqh/nais w=n. Thucydides does not assert that the Athenians were in the plot; though it seems plain that they made no effort to save the captives.

a)kribh=—the strict force of this word is ‘exact, complete in its details’. The meaning is that the pro/fasis, ‘ground, or reason’ for escaping, urged on the captives was made fully convincing by the known feelings of the Athenians; so Poppo, Krüger, etc., in agreement with the Scholiast. Arnold however takes pro/fasis as ‘the pretence for killing them’ and a)kribh/s as ‘going to the very letter of the bond’.

mh\ a)\n bou)lesqai—such phrases as dh=lo/s ei)mi usually take a participial construction; and possibly katadhlou=ntes should be read: see however note on ch. 38, 3, dhlou=ntes prosi/esqai.

prospoih=sai—‘to add, attach’: lit. ii. 2, th\n po/lin *qhbai/ois prospoih=sai, ‘to make over the city’: so i. 55. The word is more common in the middle, meaning to win or claim for one's self.

paralabo/ntes—corresponds to parede/donto line 3: paralamba/nw=traditum accipere: cf. v. 95, where it is used of a traditional policy.

kaqei=rcan—so in all MSS. Classen however reads katei=rcan, on the ground that this is the form found elsewhere in Thucydides, aud that he also invariably uses a)pei/grw. Buttmann considered that ei)/rgw meant to shut out, ei)/rgw to shut in. Poppo says the word having here the literal force of ‘shutting in’ is properly written with q. It is to be observed that the other instances of katei/rgw in Thuc. are metaphorical in meaning and in the pres. or imp. tense, e.g. vi. 6, katei=rgon au)tou\s tw=| pole/mw|. For e)s cf. ch. 57, 10, e)s to\ tei=xos kataklh/|esqai: and note on au(to/se ch. 1, 20. Dem. de Cor. 258, has e)n oi)ki/skw| kaqei/rcas.

kata\ ei)/kosin—ch. 10, 19. ei)/pou...i)/doi—frequentative, like ei)/ pou de/oi ch. 4, 9. th=s o(dou=—partitive gen., like th=s fugh=s ch. 33, 15. prosio/ntas—‘coming up’ to receive the blows of the executioners; there is no manuscript authority for the suggested alteration proio/ntas, though such words might easily be confused.

e)s me\n a)/ndras e(ch/konta—‘to the number of’; these words form the object of e)cagago/ntes: so ch. 80, 18, prokri/nantes e)s disxili/ous: as subject, iii. 20, e)s a)/ndras diakosi/ous kai\ ei)/kosi e)ne/meinan.

metasth/sonta/s poi a)/llose—‘in order to remove them elsewhere’. The fut. participle is a correction for metasth/santas, to retain which necessitates taking poi a)/llose with a)/gein: the enclitic more naturally belongs to the word which it follows, while a)/gein corresponds to the preceding e)cagago/ntes.

sfa=s...au)tou/s—the former of these words is governed by diafqei/rein, of which au)tou/s is the subject; ‘kill us yourselves’, is the appeal which the captives make to the Athenians.

ou(d' e)sie/nai...ou)de/na—the inf. follows perio/yesqai, as in v. 29: i. 35, proslabei=n perio/yesqe. kata\ du/namin—‘to the best of their power’, ou( perio/yesqai being equivalent to ‘will prevent’: so i. 53, ou) perioyo/meqa kapa\ to\ dunato/n.

kata\ me\n ta\s qu/ras—cf. note, ch. 25, 48. ou(d' au)toi/— lit. ‘neither themselves’, i.e. they had no more intention of entering than the prisoners had of letting them in. ou)de/ means ‘also not’, as in this sentence, more commonly than ‘not even.

th\n o)rofh/n—so iii. 68, o)rofai=s e)xrhsanto: but i. 134, to\n o)/rofon. tw=| kera/mw|—‘with the tiling’: so ii. 4, li/qois te kai\ kera/mw| ballontwn.

kai\ a(/ma...die/fqeiron—the rest of the sentence, as far as a)pagxo/menoi, describes the ways in which the captives destroyed themselves. It has two main divisions, oi)stou/s te... kaqie/ntes and kai\...a)pagxo/menoi, the latter being again divided into two clauses of somewhat different construction. The imperfect participles kaqie/ntes and a)pagxo/menoi denote what went on during the night, while the concluding aor. diefqa/rhsan regards the work of death as ended and complete.

e)s ta\s sfaga/s—‘into their throats’. sfagh/ is the spot where the victim is struck for sacrifice: Eur. Or. 291, tekou/shs e)s sfaga\s w)=sai ci/fos.

e)k klinw=n tinw=n...a) pagxo/menoi—they strangled themselves either with bed girths or with strips of their garments. e)k klinw=n goes with toi=s spa/rtois alone, which is governed by a)pagxo/menoi. In the next clause instead of another dative of the instrument we have the active construction parairh/mata poiou=ntes, which must be rendered ‘with strips made’. This use of the act. participle is a common way of varying the construction in the concluding clause of the sentence: Dem. Lept. 496, kai\ toiou/tous tina\s e)ceilegme/noi, ‘and such specimens’: Eur. El. 496, tala/rwn t' e)celw\n tureu/mata, ‘and cheeses taken from their baskets’.

panti/ te tro/pw|—‘and so in every fashion’. te is not found in the MSS. but is inserted by Poppo. We have in this book frequent instances of its use in summing up and concluding an account, e.g. ch. 4, 12. If te be not read, diefqa/rhsan is redundant, being added as if there had been no such main verb as die/fqeiron.

e)pege/neto tw=| paqh/mati—‘closed on the scene’: ch. 25, 9.

formhdo/n—‘like matting’, some lengthways, some across: ii. 75, formhdo\n tiqe/ntes: so Hdt. ii. 96, plinqhdo/n, ‘brickfashion’.

h)ndrapodi/santo—‘enslaved’: the middle, as Classen points out, possibly implying that the Corcyreans kept them in their own service. In all other passages Thuc. uses the active to describe the selling of captives, e.g. v. 32, pai=das de\ kai\ gunai=kas h/ndrapo/disan.

h( sta/sis pollh\ genome/nh—an English writer would have said, ‘this was the end of this great struggle’, but in Greek an accessory idea, as in this case of the height to which faction rose, is not as a rule expressed by an epithet but thrown into a predicative form.

sta/sis—the word used throughout of the Corcyrean revolution: so iii. 76, oi( *kerkurai=oi e)stasi/azon. It is applied to any struggle between men of the same blood, even if rising to the importance of a civil war: thus in ch. 61, 6, to the war in Sicily.

e)teleu/thsen e)s tou=to—so iii. 104, e)teleu/ta e)s ta/de ta\ e)/ph, ‘ended with these verses’: cf. i. 51, h( naumaxi/a e)teleu/ta e)s nu/kta, i.e. lasted till night and then ended: iii. 108, h\ ma/xh e)teleu/ta e(/ws o)ye/. There is a similar use of me/xri in i. 71, me/xri tou=de w(ri/sqw u(mw=n h( braduth/s, ‘let this be the limit of your inaction’.

o(/sa ge kata/—‘so far as relates to’: so viii. 70, o(/sa pro\s tou\s qeou/s: cf. ch. 16, 15, o(/sa mh/. o(/ ti kai\ a)cio/logon—so i. 15, o(/qen tis kai\ du/namis parege/neto.

i)/na per...w(/rmhnto—so ch. 74, 4, i(/na per kai\ to\ prw=ton w(/rmhto, e)kei= and e)ntau=qa are often similarly used with verbs of motion. Thuc. uses the perfect and plup. of o(rma=sqai to denote actual motion, as in these passages, or mental impulse, as in ch. 27, 24.

e)pole/moun—by the use of the imperfect the historian leaves the Athenians engaged in their operations in Sicily and passes to another subject. Nothing further is said of Sicily till the convention at Gela next year (ch. 58).

oi( e)n th=| *naupa/ktw|—for the order of the words cf. note on ch. 24, 1. The Athenians had a regular naval station at Naupactus. The Acarnanians had come to terms with the Ambrakiotes the year before (iii. 114).

e)kpe/myantes—a milder word than e)kbalo/ntes, probably implying the absence of a struggle: so v. 52, e)ce/pemyan, of an unsatisfactory governor: cf. Dem. Lept. 597, *qhbai/ous upospo/ndous a)pepe/myate.

oi)kh/tores a)po\ pa/ntwn—predicate in agreement with the subject, like ch. 14, 31, kai\ a)po\ pa/ntwn h)/dh bebohqhko/tes: some settlers came from every Acarnanian town. au)toi/—‘by themselves’ as opposed to the Athenians.

a)rgurolo/gwn new=n—‘sent to collect arrears, or to exact extraordinary contributions. The regular fo/ros appears to have been paid at Athens, at the great Dionysia’ (Jowett, citing Böckh). The same word is used in (iii. 19) of a squadron of twelve ships despatched in 428. Six ships were also sent in 430 (ii. 69). The absence of the article with *)aqhnai/wn is to be noticed: see note on ch. 18, 11.

para\ basile/ws—from the Persian court. basileu/s, without an article, is commonly used to denote the Persian sovereign: ii. 62, ou)/te basileu\s ou)/te a)/llo ou)de\n e)/qnos=neither the Persians nor any other nation: cf. i. 18 etc.

metagraya/menoi—‘having caused to be transcribed’: we have the act. i. 132, metagra/yai ti, ‘to make some alteration’. e)k tw=n *)assuri/wn gramma/twn—‘i.e. the cuneiform characters, which the Persians employed in their public inscriptions (Hdt. iv. 87), as here in a public document. They were, in various forms, the common alphabet of several langnages’ (Jowett). See also Poppo and Arnold. Here ‘transcription’ no doubt implies a translation.

pollw=n e(lqo/ntwn—at the beginning of the war we find the Lacedaemonians preparing to send envoys to the Persians and other ba/rbaroi (ii. 7); and in 430 a body of Peloponnesian ambassadors on their way to Persia were seized in Thrace and given up to the Athenians (ii. 67).

safe\s le/gein—so in vi. 21 the MSS. reading is a)/cion dra=n, where Arnold inserts ti.

pe/myai—‘they must send’, as if keleu/ein had gone before. A similar construction to that found in treaties etc.: cf. ch. 16, 5.

w(s au)to/n—referring to the primary subject, sc basile/a. When two subjects are expressed or implied, the former is often denoted by the oblique cases of au)to/s, when in Latin we should expect se. (Caesar frequently uses is in the same way, e.g. B. G. i. 5, Helvetii persuadent Rauracis ut una cum iis (=secum) proficiscantur.) In ii. 65 is a noticeable instance, e/peira=to tou\s *)aqhnai/ous th=s e/p' au)to\n o)rgh=s (=h(\n e)p' au)to\n ei)=xon) paralu/ein: cf. ch. 71, 3. For this idiom see Poppo on I. 17, and the appendix to Buttmann's Meidias ‘do formis au(to/n et au)to/n.’

periei=lon—for force of peri/ in composition see note on ch. 12, 7, perierru/h. The Chians took down the wall which surrounded their city.

kai\ u(popteusa/ntwn—the second participle gives the cause of the first: cf. note on ch. 97, 9.

e)s au(tou/s—‘against them’ sc. the Athenians, with newteriei=n. Another possible reading is e)s au)tou/s, ‘having formed some suspicion with regard to them’ viz. the Chians. For e)s cf. Ar. Plut. 361, su\ mhde\n ei)s e)/m' u(pono/ei toioutoni/.

poihsa/menoi—‘having effected for themselves’ i.e. stipulated for. The sense is that, before dismantling their works, they obtained the strongest guarantees which they could that the Athenians would do them no injury. pro\s *)aqhnai/ous—‘in regard to the Athenians’, i.e. between the Athenians and themselves. pi/steis kai\ bebaio/thta—‘pledges and security’.

e)k tw=n dunatw=n—‘to the best of their power’: ii. 3, w(s e)k tw=n dunatw=n.

tou= d' e)pigignome/nou qe/rous—cf. note on ch. 1, 1. eu)qu/s— ‘at its very beginning’.

e)klipe/s ti—apparently a partial eclipse; calculated to have happened on the 21st of March: cf. ii. 28, o( h)/lios e/ce/lipe. This took place noumhni/a| kata\ selh/nhn, ‘at the beginning of a lunar month’, and Thuc. adds that this seems the only possible time.

tou= au)tou= mhno\s i(stame/nou—in the first 10 days of the same month, viz. Elaphebolion, which began in the latter half of March. For the variation and uncertainty of the Greek calendar see Jowett on ii. 1.

e)/seisen—‘there was an earthquake’: cf. u)/ei, bronta=|, and the like, as we say, it rains, etc. o( qeo/s is to be understood: Ar. Ach. 510, *poseidw=n...sei/sas. We have the pass. of sei/w in ii. 8, (*dh=los) pro/teron ou)/pw seisqei=sa. Portents, such as earthquakes and eclipses, were especially frequent at the time of the Peloponnesian war (i. 23).

oi( *mutilhnai/wn fuga/des—the revolt of Mytilene and Lesbos is related in the earlier part of bk. iii.: the final reduction of the island in ch. 50.

oi( polloi/—partial apposition: cf. ch. 6, 4. e)k te—te and kai/ couple *peloponnh/sou and au)to/qen, the two districts supplying the force, te being somewhat out of place, as in ch. 28, 21, e)/k te *ai)/nou.. kai\ a)/lloqen.

e)pikouriko/n—‘an auxiliary force’: viii. 25, ceniko\n e)pikouriko/n: so o(plitiko/n, i(ppiko/n, nautiko/n, etc.

*(roi/teion—cf. viii. 101, e)s *(roi/teion h)/dh tou= *(ellhspo/ntou.

labo/ntes—as ransom for the place. stath=ras—the Phocaean stater was worth somewhat less than the Attic stater, the value of which was about 16 shillings. a)pe/dosan pa/lin ou)de\n a)dikh/santes—‘restored the town uninjured’ (Jowett).

*)aktai/as—so called because they were on the coast (a\kth/) near Lesbos. In iii. 50 we read that the Athenians took possession of the towns on the mainland o)/swn *mutilhnai=oi e)kra/toun.

pa/ntwn ma/lista—this use of the neuter is to be noted. Poppo compares Mark xii. 28, prw/th pa/ntwn e)ntolh/.

kratuna/menoi—construction in accordance with the sense, as if dienoou=nto had preceded instead of h)=n h( dia/noia: cf. ch. 23, 13, note. The middle form of kratu/nw is found ch. 114, 13: also iii. 82, ta\s pi/steis e)kratu/nonto: the active occurs i. 69, etc.

nau=s te ga/r—this parenthetical sentence extends to paraskeuh=|. te and kai/ coupling its two members nau=s and th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=|. Arnold however ends the parenthesis with e)pikeime/nhs, and takes th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=| with the following o(rmw/menoi.

au)to/qen—in sense may be joined with the words before or after it, and is probably connected with both.

th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=|—most probably dat. of the instrument, dependent by a change of construction on the sense derived from kratuna/menoi, sc. th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=| kratu/nesqai eu)/poron h)=n. Poppo proposes to read th\n a)/llhn paraskeuh/n governed by poiei=sqai. It has also been proposed to take the dative as dependent on eu)pori/a, ‘there were facilities for’ etc., or to alter the reading to th=s a)/llhs paraskeuh=s, giving the same meaning. Arnold regards the text as a mixture of two constructions, connecting the dat. with what follows, as if the words ran nausi/ te (nau=s ga\r eu)pori/a h)=n poiei=sqai k.t.l.) kai\ th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=|.

Instead of paraskeuh=| the manuscript authority is in favour of skeuh=|, which is accordingly retained by Jowett. skeuh/ however appears used exclusively of dress and personal appointments, e.g. i. 6: vi. 31, tw=n peri\ to\ sw=ma skeuw=n: and though it would apply to fitting out men for an expedition, is not so appropriate to the fortifying of a stronghold: cf. i. 2, ou)/te mege/qei po/lewn i)/sxuon ou)/te th=| a)/llh| paraskeuh=|.

o(rmw/menoi—cf. ch. i. 8: constructed like kratuna/menoi above.

kakw/sein. xeirw/sasqai—construction and variation of tense as in ch. 28, 29.

kai\ oi( me/n—cf. note on imp. e)pole/moun, ch. 48, 32: the account of these operations is resumed in ch. 75.

kai\ a)gago/ntes—for this use of the participle see note on ch. 48, 18, parairh/mata poiou=ntes.

e)pi/keitai th=| *lakwnikh=|—‘it lies off the coast of Laconia’: ch. 44, 28, e)s ta\s e)pikeime/nas nh/sous: ii. 27, with dat. th=| *peloponnh/sw| e)pi/keitai. kata/—‘opposite to’: i. 46, h( kata\ *ke/rkuran h)/peiros.

*lakedaimo/nioi d' ei)si/—sc. oi( *kuqh/rioi, ‘the people are Lacedaemonians of the class of Perioeci’ (ch. 8, 3): *lakedaimo/nioi is pred. the subject being understood from *ku/qhra: cf. note on ch. 1, 4. For the gen. denoting a class see Madv. § 51 c.

*kuqhrodi/khs a)rxh/—an ‘authority’ or official with this title: so i. 96, *(ellhnotami/ai a)rxh/, a ‘board’ so called: see note on ta\ te/lh, ch. 15, 2. In both passages Cobet proposes to omit a)rxh/ as being an explanatory gloss.

prosbolh/—cf. ch. 1, 7: here it means a port or landing-place. Merchantmen from Egypt are mentioned again in viii. 35: they probably imported corn.

pa=sa ga\r a)ne/xei—sc. either (1) h( *lakwnikh/, meaning that the Laconian coast lay open to attack from the sea on the S.W. and S.E.; or (2) h) nh=sos, meaning that Cythera commanded the coast on both sides, and therefore protected the country. a)ne/xei—‘juts out, extends’: i. 46, h( a)kra a)ne/xei: so viii. 35, a)/kra th=s *knidi/as prou)/xousa. Grote (vol. iv. ch. 53) renders it, ‘the whole Laconian coast is high projecting cliff where it fronts the Sicilian and Cretan seas’, being therefore only assailable at Malea. This agrees with the fact of the want of harbours on the Laconian coast, but the use of a)ne/xw is against it. For pe/lagos cf. ch. 24, 22.

disxili/ois—Classen suspects an error in the number, as so large a Milesian force seems improbable. Possibly *milhsi/wn ought to be omitted. Scandeia seems to have been the chief fortress of the island, and would be attacked by the main body.

*ska/ndeian—Pausanias calls Scandeia the arsenal (e)pi/neion) of Cythera, and says that it is ten stadia from the city of Cythera itself. The latter appears from Thucydides to have consisted of the harbour (h( e)pi\ qala/ssh| po/lis, line 7) and the upper city (h) a)/nw po/lis, line 11).

u(pe/sthsan—‘stood the attack’: ch. 59, 12, kindu/nous u\fi/stasqai: cf. note on ch. 28, 17. cune/bhsan—‘they agreed’, with e)pitre)yai: so ch. 69, 22, cune/bhsan e(/kaston a)poluqh=nai.

h)=san de/ tines kai\ geno/menoi—‘and some communications had actually passed between Nicias and some of the inhabitants’.

e)pithdeio/teron—‘on more favourable terms’: i. 58, ou)de\n eu(/ronto e)pith/deion: i. 144, toi)/s *lakedaimoni/ois e)pithdei/ws, ‘in the interests of’. to/ te parauti/ka k.t.l.—some MSS. read ta\ th=s o)mologi/as, but the best are without ta/. to\ parauti/ka th=s o(mologi/as then means the terms now granted, and to\ e)/peita the arrangements afterwards concluded by the Athenians (ch. 57).

a)ne/sthsan ga\r a)/n—‘for otherwise the Athenians, etc.’ i.e. but for the understanding with Nicias: so i. 102, bi/a| ga\r a)\n ei(=lon to\ xwri/on, ‘else they wonld have stormed the town’.

ou(/tws e)pikeime/nhs—referring to the situation of Cythera described in the previous chapter. This is the only instance in Thuc. of e)pikei=sqai with e/pi/: Hdt. vii. 235, e)p' au(th=| nh=sos e)pikeime/nh.

paralabo/ntes—‘taking into their own hands’: i. 19, nau=s tw=n po/lewn paralabo/ntes. The Athenians occupied Scandeia completely and probably garrisoned other points in the island.

e(/s te—te and kai/ here couple the two clauses of which e)/pleusan aud e/dh/|oun are the verbs.

e)naulizo/menoi...ei)/h—imperfect and opt. of repeated action. tw=n xwri/wn—part. gen. after ou(=, ‘on such spots as were favourable from time to time’. For kairo/s of place, cf. ch. 90, 14.

a)qro/a|...th=| duna/mei—a prominent position of the predicate, not uncommon where emphasis is desired: cf. iii. 63, ou)k i/shn au)toi=s th\n xa/rin a)ntape/dote.

fobou/menoi...kata/stasin—cf. ch. 41, 11. kata/stasin— the established order of things or ‘constitution’. What the Lacedaemonians chiefly dreaded was revolt on the part of the Helots. The slavery in which they held these was the ‘peculiar institution’ of which they were jealous and apprehensive.

e)xome/nhs—‘was in the enemy's hands’: ch. 108, 1, e)xome)nhs de\ th=s *)amfipo/lews. taxe/os kai\ a)profula/ktou—because it was impossible to guard against the sudden descents of the Athenians on their coasts.

e)s ta\ polemika/—‘for warlike operations’. ei)/per pote/— so ch. 20, 1; here made more emphatic by the superlative ma/lista dh/, ‘in the highest degree’. o)knhro/teroi—‘more backward than ever’.

cunestw=tes—‘being engaged’: so ch. 96, 11, cunesth/kei, of an army in actual battle. para\ th\n u(pa/rxousan i)de/an— the ‘existing form’ of their force consisting almost entirely of heavy-armed infantry.

oi(=s to\ mh\ e)pixeirou/menon—‘with whom whatever they were not actually attempting was so much subtracted from their expectation of success’: cf. i. 70, where the Corinthian envoys at Sparta enlarge on the ambition and activity of the Athenians, a(\ me\n a)\n e/pinoh/santes mh\ e/ce/lqwsin, oi)kei=a ste/resqai h(gou=ntai k.t.l.

ta\ th=s tu/xhs—so to\ th=s tu/xhs, ch. 18, 12.

pa=n a(marth/sesqai—they expected to fail in any active movement they made: for opt. cf. h)=| xwrh/seian, ch. 32, 22. The neuter adj. is a cognate accusative following the verb: so iii. 47, o(/son a)\n kai\ tou=to a(marta/noite.

a)nexe/lluon—lit. ‘affording no guarantee (of success)’. Their gnw/mh, or ‘mental conviction’, had lost its confidence, and they were, as we say, demoralized. Till the capture of Pylos the evils of the war had in no sense been brought home to the Spartans.

toi=s d' *)aqhnai/ois—this dat. is dependent on h)su/xasan, or rather is placed at the beginning of the sentence to denote what state of things the Athenians found resulting from the dispirited feeling of the Lacedaemonians: cf. note on ch. 10, 13, u=poxwrh/sasi. to/te—‘now’, at the time mentioned at the end of chapter 54.

th\n paraqala/ssion—so ii. 26, th=s paraqalassi/ou e)/stin a)\ e)dh/wse.

e)n tw=| toiou/tw|—‘under such circumstances, in such a condition’: cf. ii. 36, e/n tw=| toiw=|de, ‘in a case like this’. From h(gou/menoi ei)=nai we have to supply a sense equivalent to o)/ntes: so iii. 69, nh=es xeimasqei=sai kai\ spora/des=spora/des geno/menai: iii. 82, ou(k a)\n e)xo/ntwn pro/fasin ou)d' e(toi/mwn=e(toi/mwn o)/ntwn.

h(/per kai\ h)mu/nato—‘which did make a stand’. kai/ thus used implies an unexpected statement: ch. 11, 18, ei)/ ph| kai\ dokoi/h. peri\ *kotu/rtan kai\ *)afrodisi/an—places on the w. coast of Laconia near Cape Malea.

perie/pleusan—the Ath. now rounded Cape Malea and sailed upwards along the E. coast of Laconia. Epidaurus Limera was a short distance N. from Malea. The name signifies ‘the hungry’ or ‘the harbour-possessing’ according as it comes from li=mo/s or li=mh/n, both derivations being given.

h(/ e)sti me\n th=s—for gen. ‘belonging to’ of. iii. 106, ou)ke/ti *)akarnani/as. *kunosouri/as—the form of the word which has the best authority here and in v. 14 and 41. Another form is *kunouri/a (Hdt. viii. 73 etc.).

nemo/menoi—‘possessing’ or ‘occupying: i. 2, nemo/menoi ta\ au(tw=n e(/kastoi o(/son a)pozh=n. e)kpesou=sin—the expulsion of the Aeginetans was in 431; some settled in Thyrea, some were scattered throughout Greece (ii. 27).

u(po\ to\n seismo/n—the great earthquake and the revolt of the Helots which took place in 464 (i. 101). Thucydides here repeats what he has already said, ii. 27.

*(aqhnai/wn u(pakou/ontes—‘though subject to Athens’. pro\s e(/stasan—cf. vi. 34, pro\s ta\ lego/mena ai\ gnw=mai i(/stantai: so Soph. Ant. 299, (fre/nas) pro\s ai)sxra\ pra/gmat' i(/stasqai. e)kei/nwn—the Lacedaemonians, as locally remote from Athens and Aegina; cf. note on ch. 37, 10.

tei=xos—‘fort’: ch. 11, 22, etc.

tw=n peri\ th\n xw/ran—cf. ch. 55, 5.

e)n xersi/—‘in the fight’: ch. 113, 7: cf. ch. 43, 9. agontes a)fi/konto—we should say ‘took with them’; the usual Greek expression is a verb with the partic. of a)/gw.

kataqe/sqai e)s ta\s nh/sous—so iii. 28, katati/qetai e)s *te/nedon: iii. 72, kate/qento e)s *ai)/ginan. The middle voice is always used in this sense of depositing for safety: cf. note on e)/qento, ch. 18, 14.

kai\ tou\s a)/llous...fe/rein—the grammatical subject is changed in this clause, the original construction being resumed in the next clause. In sense the subject is still the Athenians, the meaning being ‘as for the rest to let them inhabit’, etc.

a)ei/ pote—‘of old standing’; commonly used by Thuc. with words implying friendship or enmity: i. 47, a)ei/ pote fi/loi ei)si/n, etc.: so ch. 78, 16: 103, 13: cf. i. 15, e)s to\n pa/lai pote\ geno/menon po/lemon.

para\ tou\s a)/llous—=para\ tou\s a)/llous a)gago/ntes katadh=sai par' au)toi=s, pregnant constr.: so tou\s e)n th=| nh/sw|=those who had been captured in the island.

The history now returns to affairs in Sicily, of which nothing has been recorded since the conclusion of the operations related in ch. 25.

*kamarinai/ois—Camarina, though Dorian, was opposed to Syracuse (iii. 86), while the neighbouring town of Gela, like the other Dorian colonies, took the Syracusan side. prw=ton pro\s a)llh/lous—note the order. The force of the sentence is that the pacification of Sicily began with Camarina and Gela, that the first step was a cessation of hostilities, and that this was first concluded between the two states in question.

pre/sbeis—in apposition to oi( a)/lloi *sikeliw=tai: so ch. 49, 6, oi)kh/tores a)po\ pa/ntwn. e)s lo/gous kate/sthsan—so iii. 8: iii. 70, e)s lo/gous katasta/ntwn: i. 23, e)s to\n po/lemon kate/sthsan, etc.

e)p' a)mfo/tera—ch. 17, 19; here it refers to counterarguments and claims, as is shown by w(s e(/kastoi k.t.l. diaferome/nwn kai\ a)ciou/ntwn—‘(the envoys) disputing and urging their respective claims’; gen. abs. without subject expressed.

e)lassou=sqai—‘to be at a disadvantage’, with cognate accus.: cf. ch. 59, 12.

*(ermokra/ths—the most eminent Syracusan of this time, and a man of singular energy and intelligence. His courage and wisdom undoubtedly saved his country from the Athenian invaders. The speeches which Thucydides puts in his mouth are marked by outspoken frankness and an unusual breadth of view. Their language is also striking in style, close and antithetical, and abounding in rhetorical mannerisms.

o(/sper kai\ e)/peise—this refers to the effect of Hermocrates's counsel, ch. 65.

e)s to\ koino/n—according to Classen ‘for the general interest’, as opposed to the private claims of individual states: so i. 91, e)s to\ koino\n bouleu/esqai: cf. Lat. in medium. Poppo considers to\ koino/n to mean ‘concilium legatorum ab omnibus Siciliensibus missorum’; so Krüger.

toiou/tous dh/—a variation from toia/de, with which speeches are commonly introduced, as in ch. 10 and 16. On the other hand, in vii. 78, toia/de parakeleuo/menos refers to a speech which has just been made.

ou(/te po/lews—for the gen. Classen compares Hdt. vii. 101, su\ ei)=s po/lios ou)/t' e)laxi/sths ou)/t' a)sqenesta/ths. The order of the words in this vigorous sentence gives it a force which it would not have if precise grammatical sequence had been observed. po/lews is put early, in contrast with the following e)s koino/n, to show that the speaker is not urging state claims but general interests; while ou)/te e)laxi/sths negatives the idea that fear could be his motive in urging peace, inasmuch as he was the representative of a country which had less to dread than others.

tou\s lo/gous poih/somai—the position of these words is in accordance with the manner of Thuc. who commonly separates two parallel expressions, such as ou)/te e)laxi/sths ..ou)/te ponoume/nhs, by an intermediate word or words belonging to both, e.g. i. 93, sidh/rw| pro\s a)llh/lous ta\ e)/cwqen kai\ molu/bdw| dedeme/noi.

ponoume/nhs—so ii. 51, to\n ponou/menon w)|kti/zonto, of sufferers from the plague.

e)s koino/n—‘for common consideration’ or ‘for the common interest’—cf. ch. 58, 10. belti/sthn—to be connected with th=| *sikeli/a|. a)pofaino/menos—‘declaring’, commonly used with gnw/mhn, etc. of setting forth one's own views: so without acc. Plat. Phaedr. 274 E. etc.

kai\ peri\ me/n—the converse of this me/n is de/ in line 13. Though there is no use in enlarging on the evils of war in general, it may be of service to shew the inexpediency of this particular war.

w(s xalepo/n—‘what a grievous thing it is’. pa=n to\ e)no/n—‘all that it involves’, or ‘all that is possible’, sc. e)kle/gein: so ii. 43. o(/sa e)/nesti. in a somewhat similar clause. e)kle/gwn—‘picking out’, not = e)cagoreu/wn. Only a)nti/, pro/, and e)pi/ are compounded with le/gw in the sense of speaking. Other prepositions are compounded with a)goreu/w or (poetically) au)dw= (R. S.). e)n ei)do/si—cf. ch. 17, 12, note. makrhgorei=n—i. 68: ii. 36.

a)nagka/zetai—‘is constrained’: viii. 41, a)nagka/zetai u(po tw=n *knidi/wn parainou/ntwn. au)to\ dra=n—to engage in war; cf. au)ta\ tau=ta, line 13: ch. 18, 7, e)pa/qomen au)to/.

cumbai/nei—‘the fact is’, connected with toi=s me\n... fai/nesqai so far as construction goes, but in sense applying no less to the second clause with oi) de/: for constr. cf. Plat. Rep. 505 C, sumbai/nei au)toi=s o(mologei=n, ‘the result is they admit’, or ‘they find themselves admitting’. toi=s me\n...oi( de/—these two clauses apply generally to aggressive and defensive warfare. The definite ta\ ke/rdh, tou\s kindu/nous refer to polemei=n, ‘its gains, its dangers’.

e)qe/lousin—‘are ready’,=dare: ii. 71, e)qelhsa/ntwn cuna/rasqai to\n ki/ndunon. pro\ tou= au)ti/ka—‘rather than suffer their rights to be infringed one jot’: cf. ch. 58, 8: i. 77, e)lassou/menoi e)n tai=s di/kais.

ei) mh\ e)n kairw=|—e)n has very slight MSS. authority and is omitted by Arnold. There is however no proof that kairw=| by itself can mean ‘in proper time’. Arnold quotes ii. 40, plou/tw| te e)/rgou ma=llon kairw=| xrw/meqa, which as his own note in loc. shews is in no way a case in point; while Krüger points out that Soph. O. T. 1516, pa/nta ga\r kairw=| kala/, means ‘by being seasonable’. e)n kairw=| occurs v. 61, etc.

tw=|n cunallagw=n—objective gen.: v. 69, th\n parake/leusin th=s mnh/mhs.

o(\ kai\ h(mi=n—o)/ referring to what immediately precedes, is the belief that this is a time for union rather than strife. In constr. it is a cogn. acc. after peiqome/nois and supplies the subj. to a)/cion ge/noito. As Poppo says, ‘pro peiqome/nois etiam pei/qesqai scribi potuit’, the sense being ‘such a conviction on your part would now be invaluable’.

bouleuo/menoi dh/—dh/ lays a sarcastic emphasis on bouleuo/menoi ‘deliberating, forsooth’. There seems therefore no reason for Cobet's suggestion of boulo/menoi, with which indeed dh/ would have no force. For inf. cf. vii. 60, e)bouleu/santo ta\ tei/xh e)klipei=n: Hdt. vi. 100, e)bouleu/onto e)klipei=n th\n po/lin.

qe/sqai—with eu)=: ch. 17, 14. Krüger finds a difficulty in the separation of adverb and verb and proposes to omit qe/sqai as a gloss, taking i)/dia as acc. after bouleuo/menoi, like vi. 23. polla\ eu)= bouleu/sasqai. The omission however, besides having no authority, spoils the rhythm of the sentence.

di' a:ntilogiw=n—‘we are trying to settle our differences by mutual recriminations’. It seems simplest to understand this clause as ironical, implying that the envoys in their selfish eagerness for advantage are defeating their own objects. Otherwise a)ntilogiw=n is simply ‘discussions’. peirw/meqa is taken as subj. by Classen.

h)\n a)/ra—‘if after all’; undoubtedly ironical, as such disappointment was inevitable. proxwrh/sh|—cf. ch. 18, 24, note.

i)/son—‘his just due’, as opposed to e)/lasson or ple/on: v. 31, mh\ i)/son e)/cein.

kai/toi—the next chapter begins in a similar way. ei) swfronou=men—cf. i. 40, o)/stis mh\ toi=s decame/nois, ei) swfronou=si, po/lemon poih/sei. Such expressions are elliptical, =‘as will be the case if, etc.’

h( cu/nodos—‘our conference’; followed by a double construction, ou) peri\..., a)ll' ei/: cf. v. 88, h( me/ntoi cu/nodos kai\ peri\ swthri/as h)/de pa/resti.

e)pibouleuome/nhn—pass. as in ch. 61, 7, though the active takes the dat. in the sense of plotting against. th\n a)poxw/rhsin e)pebou/leuon, iii. 109, means ‘made arrangements for the withdrawal’.

diallakta/s—‘peacemakers’: also in ch. 64, 21: Dem. de Symm. 189: Eur. Phoen. 468. a)nagkaiote/rous—‘more cogent’. The adj. being here used of a person has an active force=causing a)na/gkh: so v. 105, u(po\ fu/sews a)nagkai/as, where fu/sis is as it were personified. When used of a thing=such as a)na/gkh compels: i. 61, cummaxi/a a)nagkai/a: cf. note on ch. 32, 23.

throu=si—‘are on the look-out for’: ch. 27, 11.

to\ fu/sei pole/mion—‘are speciously ordering what is naturally hostile to them with a view to their own advantage’; i.e. are merely securing their own interests in dealing with those who are naturally enemies, though they may call them allies. According to this view to\ pole/mion nearly equals tou\s polemi/ous: cf. i. 76, ta\s po/leis e)pi\ to\ u(mi=n w)fe/limon katasthsa/menoi: vi. 85, ta)nqa/de pro\s to\ lusitelou=n kaqi/stasqai: cf. ch. 76, 33.

Classen takes to\ fu/sei pole/mion to mean the hostile and ambitious designs which the Athenians concealed under pretence of alliance; but this does not agree with kaqi/stasqai, a word which implies political arrangements.

e)pagome/nwn—ch. 1, 4. e)pistrateu/ousi—with acc.: so ch. 92, 32. Here it scarcely means attacking, but rather sending troops to. In this passage we have a rhetorical effect of sound produced by three consecutive compounds of e)pi/.

te/lesi toi=s oi)kei/ois—‘with our own revenues’: vi. 16, toi=s i)di/ois te/lesi, ‘at one's own expense’. th=s a)rxh=s—partitive gen. with prokopto/ntwn: vii. 56, tou= nautikou= me/ga me/ros proko/yantes. proko/ptein—lit. ‘to pioneer’: Eur. Hip. 23, ta\ polla\ de\ pa/lai proko/yasa. The Siceliots by their quarrels are destroying their resources, and preparing the way for Athenian domination.

tetruxwme/nous—‘worn out’: vii. 28, tw=| pole/mw| tetruxwme/noi. The present truxo/w (=tru/xw) is not found in classical Greek.

pote/—‘some day’: ch. 1, 9.

ta/de pa/nta—‘all we see’, i.e. all Sicily.

peira/sasqai—aor. after ei)ko/s, as is common: see note on ch. 9, 22. Krüger remarks (on ii. 5) that Thuc. differs from other writers in preferring the middle aor. form of peirw=mai. We have peiraqe/ntes in act. sense ii. 5, and 33: peiraqh=|, vi. 92: peiraqei/s, pass. vi. 54.

kai/toi th=| e(autw=n—if we must call in allies, let it be when we gain by it: dat. after e)piktwme/nous ‘gaining in addition to’: i. 144, a(rxh\n e)pikta=sqai.

ta\ e(toi=ma bla/ptontas—‘spoiling what we have’: so kta=sqai/ ti is contrasted with ta\ e(toi=ma bla/yai. i. 70. The compound proslamba/nein here means to take on yourselves: so v. 111: vi. 78, proslabei=n: i. 144, prosti/qesqai. etc.

kata\ po/leis—‘while taking our several cities we are divided’; kata/, distributive, one city takes one side, one the other: cf. i. 15, die/sthsan e)s cummaxi/an e(kate)rwn, = took one side or the other.

paresta/nai de/—sc. xrh/. The subject is changed in point of grammar, though in sense it remains the same, = ‘none of us ought to think’: ch. 95, 4, parasth=| de\ mhdeni/: Dem. Olynth. iii. 28, tau)ta\ pari/statai/ moi gignw/skein.

oi( me\n *dwrih=s h(mw=n—‘those of us who are Dorians’: ch. 126, 17, toi=s *makedosin au)tw=n. to\ de\ *xalkidiko/n—‘the Chalcidian element’,=oi/ *xalkidh=s. th=| *)ia/di cuggenei/a|—‘from their Ionian ties of blood’: so the Leontine allies appealed to Athens, o(/ti *)/iwnes h)=san, iii. 86; cf. vi. 3.

ou) ga\r toi=s e)/qnesi—dat. with di/xa pe/fuke, ‘in respect of its races’. The prominent position of the words however causes them to affect the whole sentence, and gives a sense equivalent to ‘it is not from a quarrel of races, etc.’

pe/fuke—sc. h( *sikeli/a; so Poppo and Classen: cf. Plat. Rep. 503 B, diespasme/nh fu/etai (unless diespasme/na should be read). Krüger and Donaldson take e)/qnesi as governed by e\pi/asi and e)/qnh as subject of pe/fuke, ‘they do not invade our races because their origin is different, through hatred of one of them’.

e)pi/asi—like e)pistrateu/ontai, ch. 60, 13, conveys the idea of armed intervention rather than actual hostility.

paraklh/sei—‘appeal’, with subjective genitive of those by whom it was made. The verb parakalei=n is common in the sense of inviting allies and the like, but the subst. is not used elsewhere by Thuc. with this meaning: in viii. 92 it means advice or exhortation.

au)toi/—‘of themselves’, contrasting the eagerness of the Athenians with the backwardness of their so-called allies. to\ di/kaion—what is justly due, meaning here the aid which they had covenanted to render. th=s cunqh)khs—either with to\ di/kaion, ‘the due requirements of the covenant’, or with ma=llon, ‘more than their covenant required’,=ma=llon h)\ kata/. Note the concluding alliteration, proqu/mws pare/sxonto.

kai\ tou\s me/n—corresponds to o(/soi de/, line 25. pollh\ cuggnw/mh—‘is fully excusable’, with inf. clause: so v. 83, ei/ko\s kai) cuggnw/mh.

e(toimote/rois—‘still more ready’, than toi=s a)/rxein boulome/nois: cf. ch. 18, 4, kuriwteroi: so iii. 63, a)ciw/teroi.

pe/fuke ga/r—for similar statements of the right of the strongest, cf. i. 76: v. 105. In the latter passage the Athenians say that they know that men always rule whatever they can, and they suppose that the deity does the same. dia\ panto/s—‘always’: i. 38, a)festa=si dia\ panto/s: so v. 105.

o)/soi—equivalent to ei)/ tines and therefore followed by mhde) tis=ei)/ tis h)/kei mh\ k.t.l. au)ta/—‘all this’: cf. note on ch. 18, 7. presbu/taton—‘of highest importance’: more commonly in comparative, e.g. Soph. O. T. 1365. Compare the Latin use of antiquior and antiquissimus.

eu)= qe/sqai—cf. note on ch. 17, 14. au)tou—sc. tou= koinw=s foberou=.

eu\prepw=s a)/dikoi—note the antithetical balance of two sets of three words with which the sentence concludes. Each member begins with an adverb compounded with eu)=, eu)prepw=s ‘with fair outside’ corresponding to eu)lo/gws ‘with good actual reason’: a)/dikoi ‘without justice’ corresponds to a)/praktoi ‘without success’; while e)lqo/ntes finds its converse in a)pi/asin. This sentence is a good example of the emphatic usage of adverbs, which is characteristic of Thucydides.

to\ me\n pro/s—either determinant accus. ‘as concerns the Athenians’ like the more usual plural (ch. 15, 10: ch. 85, 28, ta\ pro\s *)aqhnai/ous): or, according to Poppo, subject to eu(ri/sketai, ‘the (advantage we gain) in respect of the Athenians is found to be so great an advantage’. eu)= bouleuome/nois—‘if we take good counsel’, dat. commodi, grammatically connected with either a)gaqo/n or eu(ri/sketai. eu(ri/sketai—‘is found’ by due consideration, = ‘proves to be’: so iii. 47, to\ *kle/wnos...ou)x eu)ri/sketai dunato/n.

a)/riston—neut. predicate with ei/rh/nhn: Plat. Rep. 455 E, a)sqene/steron gunh\ a)ndro/s, cf. Madv. § 1 b, R. 4.

h)\ dokei=te—this sentence is irregular in construction. Following dokei=te we have two optatives with a)/n as if o)/ti had gone before, and then the inf. construction e)/xein th\n ei/rh/nhn dependent on dokei=te. This last clause too is worded as if ou( dokei=te had preceded, a sense which must be supplied from ou)x h(suxi/a ma=llon. For similar irregularities cf. i. 3, dokei= de/ moi ou)de\ tou)/noma tou=to cu/mpasa/ pw ei)=xen, a)lla\. ou)d' ei=nai h( e)pi/klhsis au)/th.

ei)/ tw|—i.e. tini/—addressing the individual envoys as representatives of their states. to\ me\n...to\ de/ correspond to ta\ e)nanti/a and a)gaqo/n respectively, the order being inverted by the grammatical figure called chiasmus.

cundiasw/sai—‘would help to preserve throughout’: so vii. 57, cundiasw/sontes, of the allies who helped to maintain the independence of Sicily: ii. 62, diasw/santes.

e)n mh/kei lo/gwn—cf. v. 89, lo)gwn mh=kos a)/piston. w(/sper peri\ tou= polemei=n—referring to what he had already said, ch. 59, 6.

u(peridei=n...proi+dei=n—=despicere, prospicere. We have a similar play on sound in a subsequent speech of Hermocrates, vi. 76, ou)k a)cunetwte/rou, kakocunetwte/rou de/: so i. 33, proepibouleu/ein au)toi=s ma=llon h)\ a)ntepibouleu/ein: ii. 62, mh\ fronh/mati mo/non a)lla\ kai\ katafronh/mati.

bebai/ws—usually connected with oi)/etai, ‘is assured’: cf. i. 132, pisteu/santes bebai/ws: i. 134, bebai/ws ei)do/tes, etc. Krüger however joins the word with pra/cein, quoting ch. 112, 10, bebai/ws e(lei=n: ch. 114, 2, bebai/ws th=s po/lews e)xome/nhs, and many similar instances.

tw=| dikai/w|—‘from the justice of his cause’, dat. of the efficient cause (Madv. § 41). Krüger quotes Soph. O. C. 880, toi=s toi dikai/ois xw) braxu\s nika=| me/gan. For di/kaion contrasted with bi/a, right as opposed to might, cf. i. 77, bia/zesqai oi)=s a)\n e)ch=| dika/zesqai ou)de\n prosde/ontai.

tw=| par' e)lpi/da—‘let him not be grievously disappointed if he fail’: cf. vii. 66, tw=| par' e)lpi/da sfallo/menoi.

xalerw=s=w(s xalero\n o)/n: cf. ch. 20, 14, a)safw=s. rlei/ous h)/dh—‘many men before now’, lit. ‘more (than he)’. plei/ous is subdivided into two classes, kai\ timwri/ais and kai\ e)lpi/santes, the repeated kai/ having a disjunctive force, ‘either...or’, like te and kai/, ch. 32, 14. The subdivision is continued in the clauses with oi/ me\n...toi=s de/.

timwri/ais—dat of the instrument. Krüger cites i. 34, pole/mw| ta\ e)gklh/mata metelqei=n: cf. also ch. 86, 21.

e(/teroi—‘in other cases’, in partial apposition with plei/ous: for a striking example of this construction cf. v. 96, a)/poikoi o)/ntes oi/ polloi\ kai\ a)posta/ntes tine/s, ‘being colonists for the most part and having revolted in some cases’.

ou)x o(/son ou)k— ‘not only failed to avenge their wrongs’: so ii. 97, ou)x o(/ti. We have also mh\ o(/ti, ou)x o(/pws, etc. in a similar sense: see Madv. § 212.

proskatalipei=n—‘to leave behind them besides’, i.e. to lose: in ii. 36 the word is used of those who bequeathed an accession of territory to their descendants.

dikai/ws— ‘in accordance with justice’, i.e. as our ideas of justice would lead us to expect. o(/ti kai\ a)dikei=tai—kai/, ‘also’, connects the two notions of wrong received and just revenge. ‘The antecedent, and not as in English would be more natural the consequent, is emphasized’ (Jowett): so infr. kai\ eu)/elpi: ch. 64, 1, kai\ a)rxo/menos. The nom. to a)dikei=tai is timwri/a personified, sc. the injured man. It is to be noted that the present tense of a)dikw= is used in both active and passive so long as the wrong done is not atoned for: i. 38, diafero/ntws ti a)dikou/menoi, ‘suffering a great wrong’.

w(s e)pi\ plei=ston kratei=—‘prevails to the utmost’: Krüger quotes Soph. O. T. 977, a)/nqrwpos, w(=| ta\ th=s tu/xhs kratei=, pro/noia d' e)sti\n ou)deno\s safh/s.

tou= a)fanou=s—put first for the sake of emphasis and clearness. The two main reasons for union are the uncertainty of the future, and the actual presence of the Athenians. a)te/kmarton—used in Hdt. v 92 (3) of an obscure oracle; from te)kmar, a fixed mark or limit, hence a sure sign.

dia\ to\...paro/ntas—a confusion between dia\ to\...parei=nai and dia\ tou\s...paro/ntas: so v. 7, dia\ to\...kaqhme/nous. In viii. 105 most manuscripts have dia\ to\...diw/kontes.

to\ e)llipe\s th=s gnw/mhs—lit. ‘the coming short of our plans’, i.e. of the schemes of advantage which the several states had formed: cf. ch. 55, 18, e)llipe\s th=s dokh/sews. w(=n—i.e. tou/twn w(=n, dep. on to\ e)llipe\s th=s gnw/mhs. e(/kasto/s ti—this has the best manuscript authority, but e(/kasto/s tis is also a well supported reading and gives a good sense.

ei)rxqh=nai—with to\ e)llipe\s th=s gnw/mhs, lit. ‘was restrained’, i.e was brought about by restraint. We should say, ‘satisfied that the failure in our hopes had an adequate cause in these obstacles’: cf. ch. 98, 22, kateirgo/menon, ‘done under constraint’.

It is also possible to take to\ e)llipe/s as determinant accusative with ei)rxqh=nai, understanding h(mei=s as the subject, ‘in the failure of our plans convinced that we were sufficiently prevented’. In support of this construction Poppo cites Ar. Vesp. 333, ti/s e)sq' o( tau=ta/ d' ei)/rgwn;

e)festw=tas—=instantes: Dem. de Cor. 287, to\n e)festhko/ta ki/ndunon. a)pope/mpwmen—‘dismiss’: so Dem. Androt. 597, *qhbai/ous u(pospo/ndous a)pepe/myate, of compelling an enemy to evacuate a district: cf. ch. 49, 5, e)kpe/myantes.

ma/lista me\n...ei) de\ mh/—of the best and next best alternative: i. 32: ii. 72, etc. e)s a)i/=dion—so ii. 64: cf. ch. 20, 5; where also we have the concurrence of sound a)i/=dion...i)di/an.

e)s au)=qis a)nabalw/meqa—cf. Plat. Symp. 174 E, ei)sau=qis a)nabalou=: id. Euthyphr. 15 E, ei)sau=qis toi/nun. Thuc. has e)s a)ei/, i. 22 and 129: e)s e)/peita, i. 130.

to\ cu/mpan te—adverbial: cf. i. 144, kaq) e(/kasta/ te kai\ to\ cu/mpan.

a)reth=|—referring to eu)= as well as kakw=s drw=nta, ‘like true men’ (Jowett): cf. ch. 19, 18, a)ntapodou=nai a)reth/n. a)munou/meqa—‘requite’: cf. i. 44, toi=s o(moi/ois h(ma=s a)mu/nesqai.

ou) peri\ tou=—sc. o( lo/gos or o( a)gw\n e)/stai, ‘it will be no question of punishing another’: cf. Dem. Androt. 607, ou) peri\ pra/cews ei)sforw=n e)sti/n: id. Tim. 701, peri\ au)tou= tou/tou nu=n u(mi=n e)sti/.

kai\ a)/gan ei) tu/xoimen—‘if we were ever so successful’: iii. 39, tuxo/ntes me\n...sfale/ntes de/: iii. 42, mh\ tuxw/n, opp. to pei/sas: cf. ch. 22, 15.

fi/loi me\n a)/n—the sentences begins as if the principal verb would be in the optative; instead of which by a change of construction a)/n is left without a verb and the second clause concludes with the present indicative gigno/meqa. The sense thus given is ‘we might indeed become friends with our deadly foes, but we are actually becoming at variance with our true friends’; the change of expression being a rhetorical device to arrest the attention.

We have a similar variation in Dem. Lept. 461, para\ d) u(mi=n a)\ a)\n la/bh| tis e)/xein u(ph=rxe to\n gou=n a)/llon xro/non, ‘in your city whatever a man has once received he used at any rate to be allowed to keep’. In this passage, in which the speaker is discussing a change of the laws for rewarding public services, he makes a sudden change of tense, and instead of saying e)/xein u(pa/rxei, throws the sentence into an imperfect form.

po/lin...parexo/menos—pare/xesqai means to put forward as one's own, or on one's own part. Hence, applied to an envoy, it means either to represent, or to offer the alliance of the city from which the speaker comes. The former view seems to give the better sense in the present passage and in ch. 85, 24, po/lin a)cio/xrewn parexome/nous: while the latter agrees better with such expressions as iii. 36, e)/stin a(\ parexo/menon, ‘making certain offers’.

e)piw/n tw|—‘more likely to be an assailant than to have to defend myself’; sing. because the speaker identifies himself with the state which he represents.

proeido/menos...au)to/s—a correction adopted by all editors for the manuscript reading proeidome/nous...au)tou/s, ‘e)gw\ me\n...a)ciw= is clearly opposed to tou\s a)/llous dikaiw= tau)to/ moi poih=sai, and distinguishes what Hermocrates thinks should be done by others from what he was prepared to do himself’ (Arnold). The augmented participle proeido/menos is abnormal and open to question; on the other hand there seems to be no authority here for the regular form proi)do/menos. In Dem. fals. leg. 413, proi)do/menos is now read, but in Aesch. Timarch. 23, 71, proeido/menos is still retained: see Veitch's Greek Verbs.

proeido/menos au)tw=n—‘taking thought beforehand for these things’, i.e. for the interests which he has been urging: cf. note on au)to/, ch. 18, 5. The gen. is to be explained like fulassome/nous tw=n new=n, ch. 11, 19: elsewhere we have the accusative construction, with the sense of foreseeing.

mwri/a| filoneikw=n—‘in a foolish spirit of contentiousness’: v. 43, fronh/mati filoneikw=n.

o(/son ei)ko\s h(ssa=sqai—‘to make all reasonable concessions’: cf. ch. 19, 22.

u(f' u(mw=n au)tw=n—the manuscript reading, retained by most editors, to be taken with paqei=n. Arnold however approves of Dobree's correction a)f' u(mw=n, connecting it with poih=sai. tou=to paqei=n—sc. h(ssa=sqai, which implies either to yield to friends or to be worsted by enemies.

to\ de\ cu/mpan—‘while we are all neighbours and joint possessors of one island home’. In this clause the speaker passes from the individual ties of race to the universal bond of a common country. The accusatives correspond to the construction with ou)de\n ai)sxro/n with which the sentence begins. Instead of de/ Krüger reads ge and Classen te, but neither correction is an improvement. This is not the place for a resumptive te, and de/ is required to mark the opposition between the particular and the general obligations to mutual concession.

kai\ perirru/tou—‘and that an island’; a further reason for union. peri/rrutos is rare in prose: Hdt. iv. 42, *libu/h dhloi= e(wuth\n e)ou=sa peri/rrutos. o)/noma e(/n—cf. ii. 37, o)/noma... dhmokrati/a ke/klhtai: i. 122, to\ e)nanti/on o)/noma a)frosu/nh metwno/mastai.

duoi=n a)gaqoi=n—‘there are two blessings of which we shall not rob Sicily’. ou) sterh/somen is practically equivalent to a single expression: cf. ch. 106, 10: Eur. Or. 1151, e(no\s ga\r ou) sfale/ntes e(/comen kle/os.

au)toi\ me/n—opp. to oi( de\ tw=n *)aqhnai/wn, line 7: cf. ch. 49, 6. The Athenians were not communicated with till the Siceliots had settled their policy.

cunhne/xqhsan—‘agreed, came to terms’: vi. 13, kaq' au(tou\s kai\ cumfe/resqai. gnw/mh|—‘in a resolution’, denoting the views which finally prevailed and the determination which was formed. w(/ste—cf. ch. 37, 10.

e)/xontes—so ch. 118, 15, e)/xontes a)/per nu=n e)/xomen.

*kamarinai/ois *morganti/nhn—Morgantine was situated on the Symaethus between Syracuse and Catana on the east of Sicily, while Camarina was on the south coast. There seems therefore some error in one of the names. Possibly *katanai/ois should be read instead of *kamarinai/ois, unless indeed there was another Morgantine of which we do not know.

oi( de\. cu/mmaxoi—they had of course taken part in the conference. The real opposition is therefore between the Sicilian convention and its effect on the Athenians: cf. note on ch. 24, 1, oi( e)n th=| *sikeli/a| *surako/sioi.

ka)kei/nois—the Athenians: ch. 37, 10. e)painesa/ntwn... e)poiou=nto—the same tenses are used in a similar sentence, ch. 16, 1.

xrh/mata e)pra/canto—=e)zhmi/wsan xrh/masin, ii. 65: cf. vi. 54, ei)kosth\n prasso/menoi, of a tax: pass. viii. 5, pepragme/nos fo/rous.

th=| parou/sh|—the manuscripts are in favour of th=| te parou/sh|: Bekker suggests th=| to/te. h)ci/oun—‘expected’; with two constructions, mhde\n e)nantiou=sqai and katerga/zesqai: in i. 43 we have a converse change of subject, to\ au)to\ a)ciou=men komi/zesqai, kai\ mh\...h(ma=s bla/yai. sc. u(ma=s, subj. to bla/yai.

ai)ti/a d' h)=n—the same construction as in ch. 26, 16. Classen points out that Thuc. elsewhere uses ai)/tion: e.g. i. 11: ai)/tion...h\ o)liganqrwpi/a.

u(potiqei=sa—‘inspiring’: i. 138, e)lpi/da h(\n u(peti/qei: iii. 45, e)lpi\s...th\n eu)pori/an th=s tu/xhs u(potiqei=sa, ‘giving hopes of’. i)sxu\n th=s e)lpi/dos—cf. ii. 62, e)lpi/di...h)=s e)n tw=| a)po/rw| h) i)sxu/s, where hope is contrasted with judgment founded on actual resources (gnw/mh a)po\ tw=n u)parxo/ntwn): so in v. 103, we have the Athenians denouncing the dangers of mere visionary hopes.

The ideas of the Athenians at this period may possibly have been extravagant, but there was certainly good reason for their indignation against Pythodorus, who had handled the fleet badly and lost Messene. We are not told that Eurymedon and Sophocles effected anything to improve the position of affairs; so that, although the generals might not have had it in their power to prevent the Sicilian convention, the displeasure with which they were received is not to be wondered at.

kata\ e)/tos e(/kaston di/s—cf. ii. 31, where we have the first invasion under Pericles in the autumn of 431. Plutarch (Per. ch. 30) records a decree that the strategi should swear to invade Megara twice a year, and speaks of the strong feeling of Pericles against the Megarians. In i. 67 and 139 reference is made to their exclusion from Attic ports and markets. For their starving condition vid. Ar. Ach. 535 and 729—818. This play was exhibited in Feb. 425.

tw=n e)k *phgw=n—Pegae was the Megarian harbour on the gulf of Corinth; ch. 21, 14. We are not told before this of its occupation by the fuga/des. They were possibly the same as those who were allowed to settle for a year or so in Plataeae, iii. 68. As the Athenians commanded Nisaea the hostility of Pegae was a serious evil.

stasiasa/ntwn—cf. ch. 3. 8, a)ntilego/ntwn. e)kpeso/ntes— ‘having been expelled’: e)kpi/ptw is virtually pass. of e)kba/llw, and so constructed with u(po/: cf. i. 131, e)s th\n ei(rkth\n e)spi/ptei u(po\ tw=n e)fo/rwn, ‘is thrown into prison’. The same constr. is common with a)poqnh/skw, plhga\s lamba/nw, kakw=s a)kou/w, etc.

a)mfote/rwqen—by intestine as well as foreign war; or possibly from Pegae as well as Minoa.

to\n qrou=n—‘the general talk’: v. 7 and viii. 79 with ai)sqo/menos: v. 30, ai/sqo/menoi to\n qrou=n kaqestw=ta: v. 59, e)s qrou=n kaqi/stato.

h)ci/oun—‘thought fit’, i.e. felt themselves in a position to urge the question of recalling their friends lo/gou—the proposal for the restoration of the exiles. e)/xesqai—cf. v. 49, tou= au)tou= lo/gou ei)/xonto, ‘held fast to, insisted on’.

oi( tou= dh/mou prosta/tai—cf. ch. 46, 17.

e(ndou=nai—so ch. 76, 15, *xairw/neian e)nedi/dosan: v. 62, e(nedi/dosan ta\ pra/gmata. For other uses of e)ndi/dwmi cf. ch. 35, 17; iii. 37, oi)/ktw| e)n dw=te, ‘concede’: ii. 49, spasmo\n e)ndidou=sa, ‘causing, bringing with it’.

katelqei=n—cf. periplei=n, v. 53.

h)=n de\ stadi/wn—gen. of measure. Xen. Anab. i. 2. 8, to\ eu)=ros ei)/kosi kai\ pe)nte podw=n: Madv. § 54. As regards the length of the walls Thucydides differs from Strabo, according to whom the distance to the port was 18 stades. These walls were constructed and garrisoned by the Athenians in 455, when Megara joined their alliance (i. 103).

th\n *ni/saian to/n—so ch. 46, 14, th\n nh=son th\n *ptuxi/an: ch. 67, 7, tou= *dhmosqe/nous tou=: v. 46, peri\ to\n *cena/rh to\n e)/foron, etc.

bebaio/thtos e(/neka—‘in order to secure’ with object. gen. *mega/rwn. peira=sqai—sc. themselves; change of subject, as in ch. 65, 20.

e)/mellon—sc. oi( *megarh=s.

a)po/ te tw=n—lit. ‘on the side of’, i.e. ‘so far as regards’: cf. ii. 77, a)po\ tw=n paro/ntwn deinw=n, ‘with their present means of offence’: vi. 102, a)po\ th=s parou/shs duna/mews: see also note on a)po/, ch. 18, 8. pareskeu/asto—so i. 46, e)peidh\ au)toi=s pareskeu/asto, ‘when their arrangements were complete’.

th\n *megare/wn nh=son—so iii. 51, e)pi( *minw/an th\n nh=son h(\ kei=tai pro\ *mega/rwn. The definite article is used because the situation of the island was well known, or because it has been mentioned before. Minoa was occupied by the Athenians in 427, as a convenient station for maintaining the blockade against Megara (iii. 51).

o(/qen e)pli/nqeuon—‘from which they got bricks for the walls’, i.e. clay to make them: so Hom. Od. xviii. 359. ai(masi/as le/gwn. ‘picking (stones for) walls’. For e)pli/nqeuon Classen suggests e)pli/nqeusan: the imperfect however gives a good sense, as repairs and additions were probably made from time to time.

kai\ a)pei=xen—sc. from the walls: it was plainly on the main land. We should say ‘and which was distant’, and possibly o(/ is to be understood from o(/qen. In Greek however the second clause in a relative construction is commonly thrown into a demonstrative form; cf. ii. 4, oi)/khma, o(\ h)=n tou= tei/xous, kai\ ai\ qu/rai a)new|gme/nai e)/tuxon au)tou=: Plat. Gorg. 452 D, ti/ e/sti tou=to o(\ fh\|s su\ me/giston a)gaqo\n ei)=nai, kai\ se\ dhmiourgo\n ei)=nai au)tou=. This seems also the simplest explanation of such sentences as the present, which are of common occurrence; e.g. i. 106, w)=| e)/tuxen o)/rugma me/ga periei=rgon kai\ ou)k h)=n e)/codos.

*plataih=s—of those who escaped to Athens, iii. 24. kai\ e(/teroi peri/poloi—‘and besides them certain of the frontier guard’. The Athenians on attaining eighteen years of age were enrolled among the e)/fhboi, and after some preliminary training, served till the age of twenty in the peri/poloi or national guard. It seems probable that their first term of service was in Athens itself, while during the second year they formed a moveable force, employed in garrisoning fortified places in Attica, and in the defence of any point which might be threatened. They were armed with the hoplite's spear and shield. On the present occasion they seem to have been employed on service beyond the frontier of Attica, or to have been stationed at Minoa. Some authorities therefore doubt if peri/poloi is to be understood here in its usual sense: see Arnold's and Poppo's notes.

e)s to\ *)enua/lion—so Poppo, Krüger, etc. for the manuscript reading e)s to/n. The neuter o(/ which follows makes the correction imperative, otherwise to/n might possibly be retained on the analogy of iii. 3, e)s to\n *malo/enta e)ch=lqon, ‘to the temple of (Apollo) Maloeis’: Ar. Av. 619, ei)s *)/ammwn' e)lqo/ntes. In both these passages however there is an idea of worshipping or consulting the deity beyond the mere notion of locality, as is natural when the name of the god is used to designate his temple; vid. Arnold: cf. however ch. 118, 21, para\ tou= *ni/sou. The form *)enua/lion is neut. adj. sc. i(ero/n.

e)/lasson a)/poqen—nearer (than the brick pit) to the walls.

w(s lh|stai/—in iii. 51 we find that the Athenians hoped by occupying Nisaea to suffer less from lh|stw=n e)kpompai/ on the part of the Megarians. e)k pollou=—‘for some time back’, connected with both teqerapeuko/tes and ei)w/qesan, and opposed to kai\ to/te, line 22: cf. ch. 103, 15. teqerapeuko/tes—‘having managed, secured’: v. 11, cummaxi/an qerapeu/ontes: vi. 61, qerapeu/ontes (to\) mh\ qorubei=n. tw=n pulw=n—at the end of the long walls. These gates, like Nisaea itself, were held by the Peloponnesian garrison.

dia\ th=s ta/froi—this seems to have been a dry trench outside the walls of Nisaea, extending from the long walls to the sea. Rutherford rejects the words, kata\ th/n being Attic.

e)s to\ tei=xos—sc. within the long walls: so ch. 68, 2: 69, 9. o(/pws...a)fanh/s—i.e. that the Athenian garrison might not know what they had to look out against. For a)fanh/s in the sense of uncertain and doubtful, cf. ii. 42, opp. to to\ o(rw/menon: viii. 92, opp. to a settled arrangement. dh/ implies pretence: cf. ch. 23, 8.

kai\ to/te—‘so now’, resuming the account of the actual attempt.

cugklh|sqh=nai—Bekker and Arnold have cugklh|qh=nai, but the aor. pass. seems always to have s: vid. Poppo, and Veitch's Greek Verbs. All editors have cugklh|sqe/n, v. 72, and kateklh/|sqhsan, i. 117.

kw/luma...prosqei=nai—‘a hindrance to shutting’; vid. Goodwin § 92, note 2. In i. 16 we have kwlu/mata mh\ au)chqh=nai. Similarly kwlu/w and other verbs of kindred meaning take an inf. with or without mh/. prosqei=nai—cf. Hdt. iii. 78, prosqei=nai ta\s qu/ras: in Ar. Vesp. 201 th=| dokw=| prosqei/s possibly means ‘shutting (the door) by means of the bar’.

kai\ au)toi=s—from its position virtually dat. commodi, though it may be connected grammatically with cumpra/ssontes: iii. 36, oi( au)toi=s tw=n *)aqhnai/wn cumpra/ssontes. kata\ ta\s pu/las—there is good authority for the article, which however is omitted by many editors: cf. note on me/son, ch. 31, 9.

ou)= nu=n to\ tropai=on—so v. 10, h)=|per nu=n tropai=on e)/sthke. Jowett points out that although the Megarians recovered the walls and destroyed them (ch. 109), yet the trophy was not molested. h)/|sqonto ga/r—explains maxo/menoi: notwithstanding the surprise the Athenians did not win the gates without fighting (Arnold).

o(pli/tais—the troops under Hippocrates, supr. line 4.

o( a)ei\ e)nto\s gigno/menos—as each got in: iii. 77, ta\s a)ei\ plhroume/nas (nau=s) e)ce/pempon, sent out their ships as fast as they could man them.

to\ me\n prw=ton—this finds its corresponding clause in a)/ma d' e)/w|, line 16, or perhaps in oi( d' w(s, line 13. The latter however seems rather to belong to the loosely-worded parenthetical sentences which describe the general panic.

a)ntisxo)ntes—‘held out, made a stand’: vi. 22, o)/pws pro\s to\ i(ppiko\n a)nte/xwsi: ii. 49, with dat., of the body holding out against disease: i. 65, abs. of supplies holding out. o)li/goi— partial apposition: ch. 6, 4: 62, 17.

e)s fugh\n kate/sthsan—so ch. 100, 22, and often. prospeptwko/twn kai\ nomi/santes—two different constructions giving the reasons of the panic; the second clause having a subordinate parenthesis tw=n prodido/ntwn a)ntimaxome/nwn. sfa=s— the Peloponnesians, gov. by prodedwke/nai.

cune/pese—see note on cu/mptwma, ch. 36, 16: Hdt. viii. 15, sune/pipte de\ w)/ste gi/gnesqai, of two coincident events. a)f' e(autou= gnw/mhs—‘of his own idea’, an unusual expression, of which Poppo cites instances from Dio. Cass.: in iii. 92 we have a)po\ toia=sde gnw/mhs, ‘with this idea’: cf. Dem. de Cor. 281, a)po\ th=s e/mautou= gnw/mhs, ‘from my own judgment’.

qhso/menon ta\ o(/pla—to be taken with i)e/nai, the inf. depending on khru=cai: so ch. 105, 12: cf. ii. 2, a)nei=pen o) kh/ruc, ei)/ tis bou/letai cummaxei=n, ti/qesqai par' au(tou\s ta\ o)/pla. The phrase of course is not to be taken literally, but simply means ‘to join the Athenians’; see note on ch. 44, 6.

polemei=sqai—pers. ‘that they were attacked’: so i. 37, au(toi\ ou(k ei)ko/tws polemou=ntai: or perhaps impers. like ch. 23, 12, ta\ peri\ *pu/lon e)polemei=to.

oi( pro\s ..pra/cantes—‘those who had conducted the intrigue with the Athenians’: i. 131, pra/sswn pro\s tou\s barba/rous. Instead of a)/lloi Krüger and Classen read a)/llo in agreement with plh=qos. The main body of the democratical party is denoted, the arrangement having been made by their prosta/tai (ch. 66).

cune/keito—see note on ch. 23, 4: for inf. cf. viii. 52, cugkei=sqai kratei=n basile/a.

dia/dhloi—‘distinguished from the others’, dia/ denoting disjunction, as in dialu/w, diagignw/skw, etc.

li/pa—so i. 6, li/pa h)lei/yanto. li/pa is regarded as either (1) a dat. (=li/pai or li/pa|) from an old noun li/pa, or (2) an adv. or cogn. accus. from a supposed nom. li/y. See Lidd. and Scott, and notes on Hom. Il. x. 577, a)leiyame/nw li/p' e)lai/w|: Od. iii. 466, e)/xrisen li/p' e)lai/w|. It only occurs once in Homer without e)lai/w|, Od. vi. 227.

a)lei/yesqai is constructed in accordance with the sense as if ‘they agreed’ had preceded. a)dikw=ntai—harmed by their friends (the Athenians): the word implies unfair or wrongful injury.

a)sfa/leia—‘they could open the gates with more safety’, because the main Athenian army was now at hand. Classen suspects that this sentence, as far as parh=san, is out of place, and ought to follow e)pecie/nai e)s ma/xhn, line 20. It certainly seems clear that by tou\s *)aqhnai/ous (line 21) is denoted the force which came from Eleusis, and not the troops in possession of the long walls.

oi( a)po/—the def. article is explained by kata\ to\ cugkei/menon, though the arrangement has not been mentioned before. oi( th\n nu/kta poreuo/menoi—‘those troops, that is, which were marching (or were to march) during the night’, as opposed to those already in ambush at Megara. If the def. article be retained it is used to give a further definition, as in ch. 1, 19, a)/llai ai( plhrou/menai. Most editors however reject oi(, which is absent from several manuscripts, and may have got into the text from the last syllable of e(cako/sioi.

kai\ oi(/—cf. note on ch. 33, 13. Here the demonstrative form seems required by the sense.

tis—a common usage in threats and warnings: cf. ch. 13, 21, h)\n e)sple/h| tis: iii. 2, ei) mh/ tis prokatalh/yetai. au)tou=...e)/sesqai—sc. they threatened to fight it out on the spot.

i)sxuri/zonto—‘insisted’: ch. 23, 6.

e)nanti/wma—only here in Thuc.: Dem. de Cor. 328, para\ th=s tu/xhs ti sumbe/bhken e)nanti/wma. perietei/xizon—imp., =began the circumvallation.

si/dhros—according to the scholiast the same as sidhria liqourga/, ch. 4, 6.

a)rca/menoi d'—the construction of this sentence is loose and irregular; the chief difficulty being with what verb a)rca/menoi and the following participles are to be connected. Krüger and Arnold refer them to the preceding perietei/xizon: but the de/ with a)rca/menoi is against this view, and marks the beginning of a new sentence. Accordingly Poppo connects all the participles with a)pestau/roun in line 14. This verb however does not contain the main idea of the sentence, but only describes a small part of the siege operations. There remains therefore the explanation suggested in Classen's critical note, that some general word such as perietei/xizon was intended to follow a)rca/menoi, and must be understood with i\p' e/kei/nou...*nisai/as and what follows. A similar view is taken by Jowett.

a)po\ tou= tei/xous—the long walls and the space enclosed, which had been taken at daybreak (ch. 66). For sing. tei/xous cf. ch. 67, 19: also ii. 13, where tou= makrou= means the double wall to the Piraeus. dioikodomh/santes—‘walling off’, by a cross work, to prevent interruption from the city: cf. viii. 90, diw|kodo/mhsan stoa/n: so in iii. 34 and vii. 60 diatei/xisma means a separate space walled off, a separate fortified work.

a)p' e)kei/nou e(kate/rwqen—the Athenians extended their works on both sides, so as to enclose Nisaea from sea to sea. e)s qa/lassan—sc. perietei/xizon, note on line 9. *nisai/as— dep. on e(kate/rwqen: ch. 31, 5, th=s nh/sou e(kate/rwqen.

ta/fron...dielome/nh—the sentence, which began with oi( strathgoi/, has now expanded its subject, and applies to the whole Athenian force, with which the collective stratia/ stands in apposition. For dielome/nh see note on ch. 11, 11: so v. 75, dielo/menoi th\n po/lin perietei/xizon.

proastei/ou—‘an open space like the parks in London. partly planted with trees, and containing public walks, colonnades, temples, and the houses of some of the principal citizens. It was used as a ground for reviews of the army, and for public games’ (Arnold).

kai\ ko/ptontes—most editors take this as a fresh sentence. Probably however as no finite verb has yet been expressed, though intended, the main sentence closes with a)pestau/roun, although in sense this verb applies to the final clause alone. The clue has in fact been dropped in a maze of participles and parentheses. According to this view the kai/ which precedes ko/ptontes corresponds to the te which follows e)k in the previous line; otherwise dielome/nh and xrw/menoi are connected by (ta/fron) te...（e)/k) te.

ta) de/ndra—esp. the fruit trees, which would be found in the proa/steion, mainly olives and figs: see Arnold on ii. 75. u(/lhn—‘brushwood’, for fascines and to interlace with the palisades. See the account of the siege of Plataeae, ii. 75, 76; where we find that cu/la is the word used for timber from forest trees, as in ch. 13, 3 and 52, 16: cf. Xen. Anab. i. 5, 1, ei) de/ ti kai\ a)/llo e)nh=n u(/lhs h)\ kala/mou (shrub or plant)...de/ndron d' ou)de\n e)nh=n.

ei)/ ph| de/oito/ ti—‘if at any point any part needed it’; ti being the subject of the verb; so Poppo. Krüger proposes to read de/oi, as in ch. 4, 9, ei)/ pou de/oi. Classen and Jowett take de/oito=de/oi, citing Soph. O. C. 570, w)/ste braxe/a moi dei=sqai fra/sai: Dem. de Cor. 276, ou)de\n...ei)sh/geto w)=n e)dei=t' au)tw=|. Veitch gives Plat. Meno 79 c, and Hdt. iv. 11, as instances in which dei=sqai and deo/menon ‘may be thought to have rather an appearance of impersonality’. All these passages however can be explained without depriving de/omai of its usual meaning.

e)pa/lceis lamba/nousai—‘with the addition of battlements’: ch. 115, 3, a)p' oi)kiw=n e)pa/lceis e)xousw=n. In the same ch., line 14, we have labo\n mei=zon a)/xqos: cf. Hdt. ix. 7, to\ tei=xos ...h)/dh e)pa/lceis e)la/mbane. au)tai\ u(ph=rxon—‘of themselves’, cf. ch. 4, 15.

o(/son ou)k—‘all but’: i. 36, o(/son ou( paro/nta po/lemon: ch. 125, 11, o(/son ou)/pw. si/tou te—the first reason for their surrender; two others are then given with nomi/zontes and h)gou/menoi.

e(/kaston...parado/ntas—acc. because the subject of a)poluqh=nai is not identical with the subject of cune/bhsan, but corresponds to e(/kaston put collectively. The convention was made by the Lacedaemonian officers on behalf of the whole force. ‘The a)/rxwn here spoken of was the Spartan commander of the Peloponnesian garrison, like Tantalus at Thyrea, ch. 57; Pasitelidas at Torone, v. 3; Menedaeus and his colleagues in Acarnania, iii. 100’ (Arnold).

xrh=sqai—so ii. 4, cune/bhsan paradou=nai sfa=s au)tou\s... xrh/sasqai o(/ ti a)\n bou/lwntai. a)porrh/cantes—by destroying a portion of the walls; thus securing their occupation of Nisaea, and the rest of the walls.

paralabo/ntes—ch. 54, 21.

*brasi/das o( *te/llidos—Brasidas was spoken of in chapter 11 without any description; while here we have his country and father named, as in ii. 25. So Cleon is twice described in similar words, ch. 21, 10 note.

stratei/an—so Poppo, etc. for stratia/n, cf. ch. 74, 10. The two words are frequently confused in the manuscripts; see Krüger on i. 3, and Poppo and Classen on i. 9. Aristophanes undoubtedly uses stratia/ for an expedition, e.g. Vesp. 354, but the usage is very doubtful in prose. In vii. 17 and viii. 108 stratia\n e)pagge/llein is ‘to require a military force’.

e)/s te tou/s—corresponds to kai\ au)to/s, line 10, showing what Brasidas and the Boeotians were to do respectively. te is slightly out of place: cf. ch. 52, 6.

o)/noma tou=to—see note on ou(=tos, ch. 41, 7.

e)celqw/n—‘having marched out’, sc. to relieve Megara: v. 8, kaqaro\n e)ch=lqe, of Cleon's expedition: v. 54, e)celqo/ntes: Classen however takes it to mean coming out from the mountain pass. e(/tuxe ga/r—showing why he could act without discovery. pri\n e)/kpustos gene/sqai—so iii. 30, pri\n e)kpu/stous gene/sqai.

tw=| lo/gw|—his professed object was the recovery of Nisaea, and he might possibly really attempt it, but his main purpose was to enter the city and secure Megara itself against the democratical party. The definite article with lo/gw| shows that this motive was actually put forward, while it is absent with the merely hypothetical e)/rgw|. to\ me/giston is a frequent appositional construction: ii. 65, to\ de\ me/giston po/lemon a/nt' ei)rh/nhs e)/xontes.

sfa=s—himself and his men: ch. 9, 21. e)n e)lpi/di ei)=nai—so vii. 25, e/n e)lpi)sin ei)si/n. The aor. inf. follows in accordance with the general construction of such phrases; in vii. 46 however we have e)n e)lpi/di ei)=nai...ai(rh/sein, denoting a result not immediately looked for.

oi( me\n...oi( de/—‘the one party...the other’, in apposition with sta/seis: iii. 105, oi( *)akarna=nes oi( me\n...oi( de/. sfi/sin— dat. incommodi with e)sagagw/n. au)tou/s—‘themselves’=sfa=s: ch. 50, 13 note.

e)pi/qhtai—ch. 1, 17.

e)fedreuo/ntwn—‘waiting to attack them’; viii. 92, e)fedreuo/ntwn tw=n polemi/wn: Eur. Or. 1627, cifh/rhs th=|d' e)fedreu/eis ko/rh|.

h(suxa/sasi—‘to stop their quarrel and await the issue’: note the force of the aorist participle. perii+dei=n, which in the act. usually means ‘to overlook’, here means ‘to look round for’, i.e. await: this is the meaning of the mid. present, as in ch. 73, 6, periorwme/nous: in vi. 93 and vii. 33, periorw/menoi means ‘standing aloof, waiting the event’: cf. ch. 124, 29.

a)sfaleste/rws—so ch. 39, 11, e)ndeeste/rws: i. 130, meizo/nws. oi)=s=o(pote/rois: so ch. 128, 1, o(/n, meaning one of two. ei)/h—see Goodwin § 74, for the use of the optative in compound sentences. krath/sasi—‘when they had won the day’.

parh=san—arrived at Tripodiscus. The rest of the sentence as far as a)ph=lqon pa/lin is parenthetical, and relates to what passed before this: cf. iii. 2, boulhqe/ntes me\n kai\ pro\ tou= pole/mou, k.t.l. dianenohme/noi me/n—the construction is slightly irregular, as the corresponding clause with de/ has a finite verb e)rrw/sqhsan, line 6; the participial and subordinate character of the parenthesis is in fact lost sight of.

ou)k a)llotri/ou—cf. note on ch. 6, 5, oi)kei=on.

e)rrw/sqhsan—‘were ardent’: ii. 8, e)/rrwnto e)s to\n po/lemon: ib. e)/rrwto pa=s with inf.: viii. 78, e)/rrwnto ma=llon. a)postei/lantes—they despatched at once a large force to cooperate with Brasidas: the rest of their army was no longer required. This explains who were oi( *boiwtoi/, line 1.

ou)k e)/lasson—so vi. 95, e)pra/qh tala/ntwn ou)k e)/lasson pe/nte kai\ ei)/kosi. ‘When a magnitude expressed in numbers is increased by ple/on (plei=on, plei=n), or diminished by e)/latton (mei=on), these words, with or without h)/, are attached to the denomination of the magnitude without influencing its case’ (Madv. § 92). So in Latin with plus, minus, etc., e.g. Liv. xlii. 7, pugnatum est amplius tres horas.

e)n ga/r—explanatory of a)prosdokh/tois. e)n tw=| pro\ tou=—so i. 32 with pw: cf. ch. 12, 18, e)n tw=| to/te.

a)ntepecela/santes—a compound like a)ntepanago/menoi, ch. 25, 4: cf. ch. 131, 1, a)ntepecelqo/ntes: viii. 104, a)ntepech=gon. oi( tw=n *)aqhnai/wn—sc. i(pph=s, understood from line 14 and implied by a(ntepecela/santes. e)pi\ polu/—of time, as in v. 16, xrh=sai ta/de e)pi\ polu/. The phrase more commonly denotes extent of space rather than of time, while in such passages as the following its meaning is doubtful; i. 6, e)pi\ polu\ au(/th h) skeuh\ kate/sxe: i. 7, dia\ th\n lhstei/an e)pi\ polu\ a)ntisxou=san.

a)ciou=sin e(ka/teroi—‘both sides claim the victory’: i. 105, e)no/misan au(toi\ e(ka/teroi ou)k e)/lasson e)/xein: cf. i. 54, e(ka/teroi nika=n h)ci/oun.

prosela/santas—a conjecture of Portus for prosela/santes, so Classen. The latter shows that the word is used of cavalry ‘riding up’ or ‘pushing on’; vi. 63, i(pph=s proselau/nontes pro\s to\ stra/teuma: vi. 65, oi( i(pph=s prosela/santes e)s th\n *kata/nhn. It therefore applies exactly to the Boeotians, who pushed their advance as far as the walls of Nisaea. One manuscript has prosela/santa, which might possibly be retained in agreement with i(/pparxon. The only objection to reading prosela/santas is the awkwardness of the following kai/, which must be taken in the sense of ‘both’, connecting a)poktei/nantes e)sku/leusan with kai\ tw=n te...e)/sthsan, instead of simply joining two participles of the same construction.

Poppo retains prosela/santes, which he considers may mean that the Athenians retired on Nisaea, so as to draw the enemy in that direction. Arnold, followed by Krüger, reads pro\s au\th=| th=| *nisai/a|, ‘under the walls of Nisaea’, and explains prosela/santes of the Athenians ‘charging the enemy’.

ou) me/ntoi—the general action however had no decisive result. e)n tw=| panti\ e)/rgw| is opposed to the success of the Athenians at a single point. bebai/ws—with teleuth/santes, ‘certum pugnae eventum adepti’, Poppo. If the text be right we must adopt this explanation. Classen takes teleuth/santes adverbially, ‘in the end’; but I believe that the present participle only can be thus used. Krüger and others suspect an error in teleuth/santes.

a)pekri/qhsan—‘separated’; so diekri/qhsan, ch. 14, 24, etc. Lid. and Scott give no other instance of apokri/nomai thus used. In ii. 49 e)s tou=to pa/nta a(pekri/qh means ‘all diseases ended in this alone’. a)ll' oi( me/n—sc. a)pekri/qhsan, neither side got the victory, but they retired to their respective camps. The disjunction is awkward, and the whole sentence somewhat unsatisfactory. It would seem as if a)pekri/qhsan ought to follow a)lla/, some finite verb being lost in the first clause.

periorwme/nous—cf. ch. 71, 8, perii+dei=n.

a)mfo/tera—explained by the clauses with a(/ma me/n and e)n tw=| au(tw=| de/ line 12: cf. iii. 11, a(/ma me\n ga/r...e)n tw=| au)tw=| de\ kai/ k.t.l. e)pixeirei=n prote/rous—both words used of taking the initiative in attack: ch. 29, 21, e)p' e)kei/nois ga\r a)\n ei)=nai th\n e)pixei/rhsin: i. 123, oi( pro/teroi e)pio/ntes.

e)peidh/ ge—having shown that they were ready to defend themselves, there was no need to begin the attack. For nom. e/toi=moi o)/ntes cf. v. 72, e)/deican perigeno/menoi: i. 21, o( po/lemos dhlw/sei mei/zwn gegenhme/nos: Soph. Ant. 20, dhloi=s ti kalxai/nous' e)/pos: see Goodwin, § 113.

kai\ au)toi=s—‘and so the victory might be justly put down to them as it were without a struggle’. This is a parenthetical clause dependent on e)no/mizon. For au)toi=s cf. ch. 50, 13: so infr. line 18. a)koniti/—Dem. de Cor. 295, tau=ta proei=to a)koniti/: cf. Hor. Ep. i. 1, 51, condicio dulcis sine pulnere palinae.

ti/qesqai—pass. in the sense of attributing or reckoning. Krüger and Classen regard this use of ti/qesqai with suspicion, no instance of such a phrase as tiqe/nai tini\ ni/khn being found. Krüger therefore reads a)nati/qesqai for a)\n ti/qesqai: cf. Dem. de Cor. 230, ta\ pepragme/na e(autw=| a)natiqei\s e)moi/, etc. Classen considers that in sense also the whole clause is out of place. It seems, he thinks, like an explanatory gloss of a)maxei\ w)=n e(/neka h)=lqon, line 18, or a second clause in connexion with those words.

e)n tw=| au)tw=| de/—‘and moreover as regards the Megareans things turned out well’. o)rqw=s cumbai/nein is a repetition of kalw=s e)/xein, line 7, and in construction depends on e)no/mizon. Had strict regularity been observed the two clauses would run thus, kalw=s e)no/mizon a)mfo/tera e)/xein, a(/ma me\n to\ mh\ e)pixeirei=n k.t.l., e)n tw=| au)tw=| de\ to\ pro\s *megare/as.

ou)k a)\n e)n tu/xh|—i.e. they would not have had even a chance; ‘non fuisse futurum ut res in aleam daretur’, Poppo. e)n tu/xh| gi/gnesqai, sc. ta\ pra/gmata, is a very unusual phrase: it may be illustrated by such expressions as i. 137, e)n tw=| a)sfalei= me\n e)moi/ (e)gi/gneto), ‘I was in safety’: vi. 60, ou)k e)n pau/lh| e)fai/neto, ‘there was no sign of stopping’. Poppo explains in the same way iii. 33, ou)ke/ti e)n katalh/yei e)fai/neto, ‘there seemed no hope of catching (the foe)’: here however *)alki/das, who has been mentioned before, may be the subject of the verb.

w(/sper h(sshqe/ntwn—gen. abs. sc. sfw=n: cf. v. 33, e)s *parrasi/ous...e)pikalesame/nwn sfa=s, sc. tw=n *parrasi/wn: vi. 7, oi *)argei=oi...e)celqo/ntwn, sc. tw=n *)argei/wn. In all these passages we might have expected a nom. or acc. participle. Possibly the subject of h(sshqe/ntwn, ‘after a defeat’, is to be considered as not absolutely identical and co-extensive with the subject of e)no/mizon and sterhqh=nai, though referring to the same side, and the other passages may be similarly explained.

ka)\n tuxei=n...boulhqe/ntas—for tugxa/nw with particip. cf. ch. 115, 5, e)/tuxon kaqeu/dontes: and see Goodwin § 112, 2. The aorist boulhqe/ntas can not be equivalent to boulo/menoi, but must give the sense ‘it might even be the case that the Athenians had shrunk from an engagement’, i.e. had been dismayed when they saw the Lacedaemonians advance towards Megara. Note the absence of the article with au)tou\s *)aqhnai/ous, a construction only admissible with proper names: cf. ch. 80, 25, au)to\n *brasi/dan: so Plat. Menex. 241 D, au)to\s *basilei/s, of the Persian king.

perigene/sqai—of the accruing of advantage: cf. vi. 8, h)/n ti perige/nhtai au)toi=s.

oi( ga\r *megarh=s—the subject of the main sentence. It is followed by a long parenthesis as far as line 32, and it is repeated in the words oi( tw=n feugo/ntwn fi/loi *megarh=s. mh) e)pio/ntwn—sc. tw=n *lakedaimoni/wn. kai\ oi( e)kei/nwn strathgoi/— partial apposition: cf. note on ch. 6, 4.

a)nti/palon—lit. ‘equally matched’: the Athenians reflected that they would risk more in a battle than their adversaries. e)peidh\ kai/—cf. e)peidh/ k.t.l. line 9. ta\ plei/w— the capture of Nisaea and the long walls.

a)/rcasi—sc. sfi/si, ‘to begin’ or ‘if they began’. pro\s plei/onas—the enemy had 6000 heavy-armed men, the Athenians 4600 (ch. 68, 4: 72, 25) besides the light-armed Plataeans and peri/poloi.

h(\ labei=n...h)\...blafqh=nai—these alternative clauses are explanatory of to\n ki/ndunon. tw=| belti/stw|—to be taken with blafqh=nai, the dat. denoting the part in or with which the loss would be incurred. This construction is not elsewhere found with bla/ptw, with which ‘poetae, cum in vim privandi transeat, genitivo utuntur’ (Poppo); but it may be defended on the analogy of such passages as ii. 65, sfale/ntes...paraskeuh=|: vi. 10, sfale/ntwn a)cio/xrew| duna/mei: ib. metew/rw| po/lei kinduneu/ein. Possibly in the present passage the construction may be somewhat affected by sfale)ntas.

For the 1st aor. form blafqh=nai cf. ch. 87, 29: blabh=nai occurs i. 141. There is good authority for both aorists, but the second is the more common: see Veitch's Irregular Greek Verbs.

toi=s de/—eth. dative, the construction of the sentence depending on logizo/menoi: ‘while on the side of the enemy each part of their whole force and of the troops on the field was naturally ready to dare to risk a battle’. This is Poppo's translation, and it gives a fairly satisfactory sense. The Peloponnesian army was composed of contingents from different states: each contingent was only a portion of the whole available military force (cumpa/shs th=s duna/mews) and of the army now under Brasidas (tw=n paro/ntwn). Therefore a defeat would not cripple the Peloponnesian confederacy as a whole, while the several contingents might be willing to risk a battle with the chance of their neighbours suffering more than themselves. On the other hand any loss sustained by the Athenians would fall on the flower of their national troops.

me/ros e(/kaston, according to this view, is the subject of e)qe)lein, and kinduneu/ein depends on tolma=n. The redundancy of infinitives is certainly awkward: cf. however iii. 56, e)qe/lontes de\ tolma=n meta\ kindu/nwn: v. 9, to\ e)qe/lein kai\ ai)dxu/nesqai kai\ toi=s a)/rxousi pei/qesqai: i. 71, boulome/nwn proqu/mwn ei)=nai.

It has been proposed to take me/ros as the object of kinduneu/ein and e(/kaston as masc., ‘each (commander) was naturally willing to hazard a portion’, etc. But this use of kinduneu/ein is doubtful, being only supported by such phrases as vi. 57, pa/nta e)kindu/neuon, and the improvement in sense is not great.

For kai\ tw=n paro/ntwn Donaldson adopts the conjecture o)li/gwn paro/ntwn gen. abs., which gives a good sense and construction, but does not seem necessary. Classen follows Göller in altering e(/kaston into e)ka/stwn in agreement with paro/ntwn, giving the sense ‘a portion of the several powers present on the field’, i.e. represented by their contingents. We have then to supply a subject to e)qe/lein from the general sense, sc. the enemy, or else toi=s de/ must be changed into tou\s de/.

xro/non de\...kai\ w(s—‘after they had waited some time, and since there was no sign of movement on either side’. For a)f' e(kate/rwn we should have expected ou)dete/rwn or ou)d' a)f' e(te/rwn.

ou(/tw dh/—‘upon this, then at last’; ‘introducing the apodosis after a long protasis’ (Lid. and Scott); so ch. 75, 13. The subject of the sentence is again defined in the words oi( tw=n feugo/ntwn fi/loi *megarh=s, see line 19.

In viii. 99 there is a very similar sentence, where oi( *peloponnh/sioi is the original subject, and after a series of clauses introduced by w)s, which take up more than half the chapter, we have ou(/tw dh\ o) *mi/ndaros...e)/plei.

tw=| me\n *brasi/da|—there is no corresponding clause with de/: some mention of receiving back the exiles was probably intended to follow.

dialuqe/ntwn—Classen points out that in all the fourteen instances in which this word is used of the separation of a confederate force the aor. pass. is the tense employed. kata/ is distributive, ‘to their several cities’.

i(/na per—cf. ch. 48, 31.

o)/soi me\n...oi( de\ a)/lloi—two coordinate divisions of oi( e)n th=| po/lei *megarh=s: cf. i. 89, oi)ki)ai ai( me\n pollai\...o)li)gai de/. pragma/twn—‘dealings, intrigues’. an unusual sense of the substantive, though common with the verb: cf. ch. 73, 38, tw=n pro\s tou\s' *aqhnai/ous praca/ntwn: also ch. 76, 6. For pro\s tou/s we might expect tw=n pro/s, but in such constructions the article is sometimes omitted before a preposition, and pro/s may also be regarded as belonging to the whole clause rather than to pragma/twn alone.

u(pech=lqon—cf. vi. 51, of a defeated party, oi( ta\ tw=n *surakosi/wn fronou=ntes eu)qu\s u\pech=lqon: in iii. 34 it takes the acc. u(pecelqo/ntes tou/tous: cf. constr. ch. 28, 14. We find 120 of these Megarians serving in the Athenian expedition to Sicily, vi. 43.

kata/gousi—the regular word for restoring an exile: Aesch. Sept. 647, kata/cw d' a)/ndra to/nde: cf. Ar. Ran. 1165, feu/gwn d' anh\r h(/kei te kai\ kate/rxetai.

o(rkw/santes—in viii. 75 we have cogn. acc. w(/rkwsan pa/ntas tou\s stratiw/tas tou\s megi/stous o)/rkous, h)= mh\n o)monoh/sein.

e)ce/tasin o(/plwn—an inspection or review: vi. 96, e)ce/tasin o(/plwn e)poiou=nto. This would give an opportunity of selecting and securing the disaffected, especially if, as Arnold supposes, the men had laid down their arms in order to listen to an address from their commanders. Hippias in a similar way seized his enemies, who appeared without their arms, oi)o/menoi/ ti e)rei=n au)to/n (vi. 58). diasth/santes tou\s lo/xous —the several divisions were apparently reviewed in different parts of the town.

yh=fon dienegkei=n—=diayhfi/sasqai, dia/ implying a vote on this or that side: Eur. Or. 49. dioi/sei yh=fon *)argei/wn po/lis: in Hdt. iv. 138, oi( diafe/rontes th\n yh=fon seems to mean those who differed in their vote. fanera/n—opp. kru/fa, ch. 88, 2.

kategnw/sqhsan—passive, though the active takes a genitive of the person. Lysias, de caede Erat. 94, has the act. with acc. tou=ton katagignw/skein fo/non. Lid. and Scott give Dion H. xi. 22, katagnwsqei\s deili/an, ‘found guilty of cowardice’: and Hdt. vi. 2, katagnwsqei\s prh/ssein, ‘thought to be doing’. So too Andocides, de Myst. 2, has para\ tw=n kathgoroume/nwn, ‘from the accused’. In fact verbs which govern the genitive or dative are not uncommonly personally constructed in the passive, Greek being more elastic than Latin in this point.

plei=ston dh/—so ch. 55, 15, ma/lista dh/: i. 1, ki/nhsis ga\r au(/th megi/sth dh\ e)ge/neto. au(/th...meta/stasis—‘this was a change which’, lit. ‘this, though a change’ or ‘as a change’, not ‘this change’, which would require the article: so in the passage cited above ki/nhsis is the predicate.

u(p' e)laxi/stwn—‘a few daring men effected the revolution, tacitly countenanced probably by the aristocratic party in general, who thought the worst oligarchy better than the ascendancy of the popular party. What Thucydides notices is the long duration of a government which owed its existence to a violent revolution effected by a very small number of active instruments’ (Arnold).

e)k sta/sews meta/stasis—a play on the sound of words: Classen compares ii. 62, mh\ fronh/mati mo)non a)lla( katafronhmati: iii. 39, e)pane/sthsan ma=llon h)\ a)pe/sthsan. meta/stasis is used of a political revolution in vi. 20 and viii. 86. For cune/meinen cf. viii. 73, h( a)rxh\ cune/meinen: also i. 18, of the lasting of an alliance.

w(/sper dienoou=nto—‘as (we saw) was their intention’: see ch. 52. For the impf. cf. ch. 2, 8, w)/sper pareskeua/zonto. kataskeua/zw and kataskeuh/ are used especially of permanent appliances, such as walls, dockyards and arsenals, in the case of a fortress: so in vi. 17 of the plant and stock of farmers and settlers: in vi. 31 of the fittings of a ship: see Arnold on i. 10.

a)rgurolo/gwn—either agreeing with *)aqhnai/wn or with new=n understood. nau=s is understood with i(ppagwgo/s in vi. 43; with penthko/ntoros ib.: so with triako/ntoros ch. 9, 9.

deino\n mh/—‘reason to dread that’: cf. iii. 102, deino\n ga(r h)=n mh\...ou)k a)nti/sxwsin.

ta\ *)/anaia—iii. 32, and viii. 19: *)anaiitw=n, iii. 19. The Athenians feared that Antandros would be a standing menace to Lesbos as Anaea was to Samos. For e)pi\ th=| *sa/mw| cf. ch. 14, 32, e)pi\ th=| *pu/lw|.

katasta/ntes—‘established themselves’: iii. 86, katasta/ntes e)s *(rh/gion. e)s ta\ nautika/—‘for their fleets’, or ‘in naval matters’, connected with both w)fe/loun and kubernh/tas pe/mpontes.

tou\s e)cio/ntas e)de/xonto—so i. 40, tou\s e\te/rwn a)fistame/nous de/xesqai, of receiving disaffected allies.

ou) polu\ u(/steron—with a(po/llusi, for Lamachus had already entered the Pontus, line 6. *(hraklew/tidi—the district of Heraclea on the coast of Bithynia; founded in the sixth century by colonists from Megara and Tanagra. o(rmh/sas. fr. o)rme/w, ‘having come to an anchor’, is the better supported reading, and though o)rmei=n is constructed with e)n when it means lying at anchor (i. 52 etc.), the aorist might certainly take e)s with a pregnant idea of motion. The aor. form itself is however considered extremely doubtful by Classen, who (with Krüger) reads o(rmi/sas, sc. ta\s nau=s.

u(/datos a)/nwqen—according to Poppo=u(/dwr e)c ou)ranou=, ii. 77: Xen. Mem. Socr. iv. 3. 14, kerauno\s a)/nwqen a)fi/etai. Arnold however believes the words to mean ‘rain having fallen in the interior, in the upper country’, quoting Hdt. viii. 12, e)ge/neto d' u(/dwr a)/pleton dia\ pa/shs th=s nukto/s, to show that the addition of e)c ou)ranou= is not required to denote rain. May not the meaning be ‘floods having come down from the upper country’? ‘The river Calex, or Cales, is hardly more than a mountain torrent; or at least has its source in the mountains at so short a distance from the sea that its floods must be exceedingly sudden and violent; and, like the fiumare in Sicily, they would come down with such a body of water, sweeping trees and rocks along with them in their course, that vessels drawn up on the shore, just at the mouth of the river, might very easily have been swamped or dashed to pieces’ (Arnold).

pe/ran—from an European point of view. th\n *megare/wn a)poiki/an—‘that (well-known) colony’. Chalcedon, opposite Byzantium, was said to have been founded by the blind, ‘quod priores illuc advecti, praevisa locorum utilitate, peiora legissent’ (Tac. Ann. xii. 63): cf. Hdt. iv. 144.

pra/gmata—‘public affairs, interests’; the whole phrase means that a plot was going on to betray Boeotia. pra/ssein is perpetually used of political intrigues; it is constructed with the dative, as in ch. 106, 12; ch. 110, 10: with pro/s, as in i. 128, pro\s basile/a pra/gmata pra/ssein: and even with e)s, as in i. 132, e)s tou\s *ei(/lwtas pra/ssein ti.

a)po/—‘on the part of’: i. 17, e(pra/xqh a)p' au)tw=n ou)de\n e)/rgon. As distinguished from u\po/, a)po/ denotes the ‘personal origin’ of anything, not the agent. It is found especially with passive verbs of doing and saying (see Shilleto on i. 17); and in later Greek becomes more and more common with the passive generally.

to\n ko/smon—cf. viii. 48, e)k tou= paro/ntos ko/smou th\n po/lin metasth/sas: viii. 67, e)k tou= au)tou= ko/smou. w(/sper oi( *)aqhnai=oi—sc. dhmokratou=ntai: or perhaps referring to mete/sthsan or e)/treyan.

e)shgoume/nou—‘being the prime mover’: with acc. iii. 20, e)shghsame/nou th\n pei=ran: cf. vi. 90, peri\ w(n e)moi\ e)shghte/on: so generally of bringing forward proposals and the like, as in vii. 73. au)toi=s—either=pro)s au(tou/s ‘with them’, sc. the Athenians, or ethical dat. referring to both sides, ‘these were their schemes’. I have adopted Classen's punctuation, as ta/de refers to what follows; otherwise we should have tau=ta as in line 22.

*si/fas me/n—the three points selected would command three several sides of Boeotia; Siphae was on the south coast, Chaeronea on the north-west frontier, and Delium on the eastern coast.

*minu/eion—Hom. Il. ii. 511, oi(\ d' *)asplhdo/n' e)/naion i)d' *)orxomeno\n *minu/eion: Theocr. xvi. 104. (*xa/rites) *minu/eion *)orxomeno\n file/oisai: cf. Pind. Ol. xiv. 4. It was the capital of the ancient clan of the Minyae; see Class. Dict. There was another Orchomenos in Arcadia. cuntelei=—‘belongs to, is dependent on’. ‘The Boeotian confederacy consisted of a number of free and sovereign states, each of which elected its Boeotarch, or member of the supreme executive government of Boeotia. The sovereign states had each a number of smaller states subject to their authority; as Chaeronea was dependent on Orchomenos; Leuctra and Siphae on Thespiae; Acraephia, Glisas, Therapne, and others, on Thebes. These smaller states were called cu/mmoroi, or cuntelei=s, to the larger ones; and were obliged to furnish troops and money, to make up the contingent of the state to which they belonged, to the general confederacy of Boeotia’ (Arnold).

e)nedi/dosan—‘were to give up’; the imperfect denoting what was intended by the conspirators: cf. ch. 7, 5, prodidome/nhn: for e)ndi/dwmi see ch. 66, 17 note.

e)/sxaton—for neut. cf. i. 10, *mukh=nai mikro\n h)=n: i. 63, (*)/olunqos) e)sti\ katafane/s: i. 138, e)do/kei (*la/myakos) poluoino/taton tw=n to/te ei)=nai. pro\s *fano/tidi—‘hard by the district of Phanoteus’, see ch. 89, 12: the city was twenty stades from Chaeronea. metei=xon—‘were in the plot’.

e)/dei—‘the Athenians were to’, sc. according to arrangement: ch. 89, 4: ii. 84, nh=es a(\s e)/dei tau/tais cummi/cai. *dh/lion— cf. Liv. xxxv. 51, templum est Apollinis Delium imminens mari: quinque milia passuum ab Tanagra abest. Minus quatuor milium inde in proxima Euboeae est mari traiectus. For katalabei=n see note on ch. 1, 4.

cumbohqh/swsin—of joint action. The simple verb is to be understood in the following clause with e(/kastoi: cf. ii. 81, ou)/te cuneboh/qoun, e)fu/lasso/n te ta\ au(tw=n e(/kastoi.

r(a|di/ws—this word affects the whole sentence generally, implying that the conspirators anticipated no difficulty in carrying out their plans; it belongs however more particularly to katasth/sein, line 33.

newteri/zoito—the reading adopted by almost all editors for newteri/zoi, which is found in most manuscripts. Arnold thinks that h( pei=ra might be the nominative to newteri/zoi ‘would effect a change’, or else that the verb might be neuter in sense. It is however invariably transitive in Thuc. For the pass. cf. ch. 41, 14.

e(ka/stois—the disaffected in different places, who would find a refuge at hand (dia\ braxe/os) when the three points were occupied by the Athenians. For a)postrofh=s cf. viii. 75, a)postrofh\ swthri/as. The Athenians intended to carry out the system of establishing fortified positions in the enemy's territory, which had already proved so successful in annoying the Lacedaemonians. kata\ xw/ran—cf. ch. 14, 32.

prosio/ntwn—‘joining’: cf. ch. 85, 22, e)moi\ pro/seisi. e)s to\ e)pithdeion—cf. ch. 54, 15, e)pithdeio/teron: ch. 60, 10, e)s to\ cumfe/ron kaqi)stantai.

o(po/te kairo\s ei)/h—opt. because of the past tense e)/melle =o(/tan kairo\s h)=| with present: see note on ei)/ ti pa/sxoien, ch. 38, 11. e)s tou\s *boiwtou/s=into Boeotia; cf. ch. 78, 42: i. 108, e)stra/teusan e)s *boiwtou/s: Hdt. iv. 28, e)pelau/nousin e)s tou\s *sindou/s. In v. 49, fa/skontes sfa=s e)pi\ *fu/rkon o)/pla e)penegkei=n probably ought to be e)s sfa=s (R. S.).

proape/steile—‘had sent in advance’; see the beginning of ch. 76: tai=s tessara/konta nausi/n are the ships there mentioned. e)c e)kei/nwn tw=n xwri/wn—Acarnania and its neighbourhood, where Demosthenes was well known since his campaign in 426 (iii. 94 etc.).

ei)/rhto—the usual word for instructions and arrangements: i. 129, ta/ te a)/lla e)poi/hsen, w)/sper ei)/rhto. For e)/dei and tau=ta cf. ch. 76, 20 and 22.

o( me\n *dhmosqe(nhs—the corresponding particle to me/n is de/ at the beginning of the next chapter. *oi)nia/das de/—there is an awkwardness about this de/ (one manuscript has te); possibly it may be explained, like polemi/an de\ ou<*>san, ch. 7, 3, as denoting what was not looked for; for Oeniadae stood apart from the other Acarnanian towns in opposition to Athens, ii. 102; iii. 94. It was situated at the mouth of the Achelous and was surrounded by water in winter.

u(po/ te...kai\ au)to/s—the connecting particles show what was effected by the Acarnanians and Demosthenes respectively, te being out of place: cf. 28, 21, e)/k te *ai)/nou...kai/: ch. 70, 7, e)/s te tou\s...kai/. Such an irregularity of construction is especially common when the juxtaposition of de/ and te is thereby avoided; e.g. ch. 95, 2: i. 16, e)pege/neto de\ a)/llois te kwlu/mata kai\ *)/iwsi *ku=ros e)pestra/teuse.

kathnagkasme/nous e)s—‘forced into’; masc. because the city is designated by the name of the inhabitants: so ii. 102: cf. vi. 3, met' au)tou/s, of the town of Leontini: see Poppo on i. 111, e)s *oi)nia/das.

a)nasth/sas—‘having called to his standard’, of summoning troops for an expedition: so ch. 90, 1: cf. ii. 68, au)toi/ te kai\ tw=n barba/rwn pollou\s a)nasthsa/ntes, etc. In ch. 93, 3, it is used of setting an army in motion.

*salu)nqion kai\ *)agrai/ous—mentioned in iii. 106 and 111 as neighbours of the Acarnanians but friendly to the Peloponnesian interests. prospoihsa/menos—‘having reduced’ or ‘brought over’: i. 8, prosepoiou=nto u(phko/ous, etc. For the act. see ch. 47, 10. a)panthso/menos—with e)pi/, of appearing at a given place: cf. ch. 89, 6: so ch. 70, 8. An analogous use denotes appearing at a trial, presenting one's self in court, see Lid. and Scott. The middle form of the future is classical; a)panth/sw is later, Polyb. Plut. etc.

The historian now passes to another point, concluding with an imperfect construction, as in ch. 48.

From this point the fortunes of the war begin to turn against the Athenians, who seem to have been entirely unprepared for Brasidas' bold enterprise against their Thracian allies.

*brasi/das de/—in sense this sentence is descriptive enough. Brasidas begins his march—reaches Heraclea—is joined by friends whom he had previously sent to—continues his march. The wording however is awkward and involved. There are two subordinate clauses, e)peidh\ e)ge/neto, and kai\ (e)peidh\)...h)=lqon k.t.l., the latter clause being complicated by a parenthetical explanation with gen. abs., prope/myantos...stratia/n: the whole concludes with the main verb to/te dh\ e)poreu/eto.

poreuo/menos—‘beginning his expedition’; he was last seen at Corinth, ch. 74, 3: the construction with e)peidh\ e)ge/neto somewhat resembles w(s e)ge/nonto ple/ontes, k.t.l. ch. 3, 1.

e)n *)hraklei/a|—in 426 the Lacedaemonians established a colony and place of arms at Heraclea near Trachis, and began the construction of docks at Thermopylae, 40 stades distant (iii. 93, 94). Cf. Liv. xxxvi. 22, sita est Heraclea in radicibus Oetae montis: ipsa in campo arcem imminentem loco alto et undique praecipiti habet. The town or district of Trachis gives the name to the Trachiniae of Sophocles, and the whole neighbourhood was associated with the memory of Heracles.

prope/myantos—parenthetical; Brasidas had already sent his messenger in advance. We find in ii. 22 that Pharsalus (ā) and Larissa like the other Thessalian towns were in alliance with Athens; oi( e)pith/deioi were therefore an oligarchical faction.

*)axai/as—Achaea Pthiotis, north of the Malian gulf. For the limits of the district see Arnold's note.

a)/llws te—i.e. under any circumstances, much less with an armed force in the face of an unfriendly people. kai\ meta\ o(/plwn ge dh/—either (1) to be taken with the following u)/popton kaq...diie/nai, kai\ strengthening pa=si: or (2) to be regarded as completing the sentence, sc. ou)k eu)/poron h)=n diie/nai. The majority of editors are in favour of the latter view, and put a stop after dh/. The sense of (1) seems however the better; and the passing from the particular *qessali/an to the general toi=s pa=si is thoroughly Thucydidean. No doubt there is an awkwardness in the repetition ge dh/...pa=si/ ge; but this is not more objectionable than the harsh and abrupt ending involved by (2).

kaqesth/kei—cf. ch. 26, 29. a)ei/ po/te—ch. 57, 26.

dunastei/a|—a narrow oligarchy or poluke/falos turanni/s: iii. 62, e)gguta/tw de\ tura/nnou dunastei/a a)ndrw=n o)li/gwn: so Aristotle Pol. iv. 5, 2 speaks of a dunastei/a as the counterpart of a tyranny, o(/tan a)rxh=| mh\ o( no/mos a)ll' oi( a)/rxontes. It is opposed to a politei/a or constitutional government: cf. Tac. Ann. vi. 42, paucorum dominatio regiae libidini propior, ‘borders on arbitrary monarchy’. The government in Thessaly was held by ‘a class of rich proprietors distributed through the principal cities possessing most of the soil, and constituting separate oligarchies loosely hanging together’: the rest of the inhabitants were in a condition somewhat resembling that of the Laconians and Helots; see Grote, vol. ii. ch. 3, on the state of Thessaly. Some at any rate of the dominant families were naturally not ill disposed to the oligarchy of Sparta.

i)sonomi/a|—cf. iii. 82, where i)sonomi/a politikh/ is an euphemism for dhmokrati/a: in iii. 62 we have o)ligarxi/a i)so/nomos, i.e. constitutional. to\ e)gxw/rion—adverbial: so ch. 3, 22, to\ a)rxai=on.

boulome/nwn—so ii. 79, tw=n ou) tau=ta boulome/nwn, of political feeling. e)pi\ tw=| *)enipei=—at his entrance into Thessaly proper; see Arnold's note on the line of march probably taken by Brasidas.

a)/neu—without the consent or authority of: i. 128, a)/neu *lakedaimoni/wn etc.: Soph. O.T. 1464, a)/neu tou=d' a)ndro/s. to\ pa/ntwn koino/n is the general confederacy of Thessaly. It had little cohesion, and though strong if united, seldom was.

au)toi=s—the people themselves. ou)...a)ci/oun=‘he called on them not to stop him’: cf. the instances given on ch. 40, 5.

to\ kwlu=son—when the future participle is used to denote purpose or intention the article is usually prefixed. iii. 83, ou) ga\r h)=n o( dialu/swn ou)/te lo/gos ou)/te o(/rkos=o)/stis dia lu/sei: cf. Plat. Menex. 235 D, a)gaqou= a)/n r(h/toros de/oi tou= pei/. sontos: Soph. Ant. 260, ou(d' o( kwlu/swn parh=n.

a)fw/rmhsen—only here in Thucydides in the active, though the uncompounded verb is common: mid. vii. 74 etc. Soph and Eur. have the active in intr. sense. e)te/lese—‘accomplished (his march)’: ii. 97, e)c *)abdh/rwn e)s *)/istron telei=. Lid and Scott compare the use of a)nu/w, which like telw= is a trans. verb: e.g. Soph. Trach. 657, pro\s po/lin a)nu/seie.

Brasidas seems to have marched northwards down the valley of the Enipeus as far as Pharsalus, and a little beyond, to its junction with the valley of the Apidanus. His troops probably did not enter Pharsalus. He then marched down the valley of the Apidanus, in a north-westerly direction as far as Phacium, which was at its lower extremity, where it joins the valley of the Peneus (Arnold).

e)s *peraibi/an—between the Peneus and the Cambunian mountains. Brasidas seems to have marched across this district leaving Tempe on his right and bearing towards Dium. a)po) tou/tou—‘from this point’.

kate/sthsan e)s—‘brought him to’, or ‘set him down at’: so ch. 103, 19. *di=on—on the Thermaic gulf: there was another place so called in Chalcidice, ch. 109. *makedoni/as— ‘in, or belonging to Macedonia’. pro\s *qessalou/s—‘looking towards Thessaly’, i.e. on the frontier.

w(s *perdi/kkan—Perdiccas is first mentioned in 432 as trying to get up a league against Athens, cu/mmaxos pro/teron kai\ fi/los w)/n (i. 57). He was alternately the nominal friend and the enemy of Athens. Some account of the rise and extent of the Macedonian kingdom is given in ii. 99.

oi(...a)festw=tes *)aqhnai/wn—Chalcidians and Bottiaeans who joined in the revolt of Potidaea in 432 (i. 58).

e)ch/gagon—‘promoted the expedition’: Arnold points out that e)ca/gw ‘is applied with great propriety in the present case, for the getting the Peloponnesians to move out of Peloponnesus was the great difficulty’. For the force of the active see note on cunepago/ntwn, ch. 1, 14: so infr. cuneph=gon.

plhsio/xwroi—apparently governs au)tw=n, for the position of which word see note on ch. 5, 10: Ar. Vesp. 393, to\n sautou= plhsio/xwron.

dia/fora—with gen.: so iii. 54, ta\ *qhbai/wn dia/fora.

*lugkhstw=n—cf. ii. 99, where we find that the kingdom of the Lyncestae was subordinate to Macedonia. Arrhibaeus seems to have defied his suzerain Perdiccas. parasth/sasqai— ‘to reduce, bring to terms’: so parasth=nai means to yield or surrender: Dem. Androt. 597, tw=| pole/mw| pare/sthsan.

cune/bh—‘opportune cecidit’: in construction this sentence resembles ch. 47, 4, cunela/bonto de\...w(/ste k.t.l.

e)gkeime/nwn—by the occupation of Pylos and Cythera; see ch. 55. For a)postre/yai some manuscripts have a)potre/yai, the two words being easily confused: see ch. 97, 9. There is also some slight authority for a)potre/yein: the aor. construction however is quite regular.

ei) a)ntiparalupoi=en—this compound, which only occurs here, implies ‘parallel (i.e. simultaneous) counter-annoyance’: for paralupw= cf. ii. 51, a)/llo parelu/pei ou)de/n, i.e. nothing besides the plague. Classen gives a list of upwards of 40 compounds with a)nti/ which Thuc. only uses once; and concludes that this prefix was connected at pleasure with any following verb: cf. Plat. Gorg. 521 E, a)nt' eu)= poiei=n...a)nt' eu)= pei/setai.

e(toi/mwn o)/ntwn—sc. twn cumma/xwn: cf. note on gen. abs. ch. 73, 15. tre/fein te—the usual irregularity or ‘trajection’ of te.

tw=n *ei(lw/twn—partitive gen. with e)kpe/myai: i. 30, th=s gh=s e)/temon: Xen. Hel. ii. 3, 14, tw=n frou/rwn cumpe/mpontos. boulome/nois h)=n—cf. iii. 2, tw=| plh/qei ou) boulome/nw| h)=n: so ch. 28, 27, a)sme/nois e)gi/gneto: see Madvig 38 d. So in Latin we have volenti, volentibus esse, Liv. Tac. etc.

e)pi\ profa/sei—‘on a (good) pretext’: like paraskeuh=|, ch. 27, 30. pro\s ta\ paro/nta—lit. ‘looking to’, i.e. in the present circumstances and in consequence of them; like pro\s tau=ta, ‘therefore’, one of the many phases of meaning with pro/s expressing relation between two things.

e)pei/—often thus used in elliptical expressions, where the context supplies the meaning; here the sense is ‘it is plain that they always dreaded the Helots, for’, etc.; cf. a similar use in ch. 78, 19, e)pei\ kai\ to/te.

to/de e)/pracan—probably ‘they once did, or had done’ at some time not stated, so Thirlwall. ‘That this atrocity should have been committed at the very time when the Spartans were sending out a body of Helots on a foreign expedition is improbable in itself, and is contradicted by the words kai\ to/te k.t.l. (line 22), which clearly imply that Thucydides is led by association to speak of what had occurred on some former occasion. Shortly after the expedition of Brasidas the Spartans changed their policy towards the Helots, and emancipated those of them who had served with him, v. 34. They had previously given promises of emancipation which were believed, and therefore probably fulfilled, to Helots conveying food into Sphacteria, ch. 26’ (Jowett). Grote however (vol. iv. ch. 53) considers that the massacre took place immediately after the capture of Sphacteria, which was in July or August of the previous year, and that there was an interval of several months before the government formed the idea of employing the Helots on foreign service, an interval ‘quite sufficient to give a full and distinct meaning to the expression kai\ to/te’.

neo/thta—either abstract, ‘their youth (and vigour)’, as in vi. 17, h( e)mh\ neo/ths: ib. 18, contrasted with gh=ras: or with a concrete meaning (iuventus=iuvenes), as in ii. 8, pollh\ neo/ths: so ii. 21. In the latter case plh=qos means the general number, or the two words give a ‘hendiadys’=to\ plh=qos tw=n ne/wn.

Instead of neo/thta some manuscripts have skaio/thta, which is adopted among other editors by Classen. He understands it to mean the rash stupidity and wrong-headedness (stoliditas, importunitas), which would make bondsmen rise in insurrection, even with little prospect of success: cf. Soph. Ant. 1028, au)qadi/a toi skaio/tht' o)fliska/nei: Hdt. vii. 9, u(po\ a\gnwmosu/nhs kai\ skaio/thtos.

a)ei\ ga/r—the predicate of this sentence is th=s fulakh=s pe/ri, the sense being that ‘most of the relations between the Lacedaemonians and the Helots always were of an eminently precautionary character’: not that ‘most of the Lacedaemonian institutions were intended mainly to guard against the Helots’. This latter statement, besides not being true, would require a different wording: cf. Shilleto on i. 17, pro\s perioi/kous toi=s au(tw=n e(ka/stois, ‘between each state and its neighbours’: so i. 127, diabolh\n au)tw=| pro\s th\n po/lin, ‘prejudice between him and the city’: cf. ch. 54, 14. Dem. Lept. § 68 fin. is a parallel.

Arnold compares the situation of the Spartans to that of an army of occupation in a conquered country, perpetually on its guard to prevent the inhabitants from breaking out into insurrection.

e)n toi=s polemi/ois—probably masc., the preposition denoting the sphere of operation of the adjective=‘on the persons of, in dealing with’ etc.; Verg. Aen. ii. 540, talis in hoste fuit: Soph. Aj. 1092, e)n toi=s qanou=sin u(bristh/s: ib. 1315, e)n e)moi\ qrasu/s: Ar. Eth. iv. 3, 26, e)n e)kei/nois semnu/nesqai, ‘to give one's self airs at their expense’. Classen takes e)n toi=s polemi/ois to be neuter. ‘in matters of war’; citing ch. 126, 9: so i. 18, and vi. 80. These however are all instances of the acc. of reference; we should therefore expect the same construction here, or else e)n tw=| pole/mw|.

kri/nesqai—‘should be selected’, a common meaning of kri/nw in Homer: so Hdt. vi. 129, kri/noi e)k pa/ntwn.

u(po\ fronh/matos—‘from their high spirit’; u)po/ expresses the cause, as in i. 49, u(po\ plh/qous kai\ o)/xlou tw=n new=n: so possibly in v. 31, periorw/menoi u(po\ *lakedaimoni/wn, ‘looking about them (i.e. refusing to commit themselves) from Lacedaemonian influence’ (R. S.); unless indeed ta\ a)po\ should be read. For fro/nhma cf. ii. 43, a)ndri/ ge fro/nhma e)/xonti; v. 40, e)n fronh/mati o)/ntes, ‘proudly aspiring’.

kai\ h)ci/wsan...kai\ e)piqe/sqai—a good instance of kai/ with both clauses. prw=tos e(/kastos—resolved sing. in apposition with plur.: Plato Gorg. 503 E, ble/pontes pro\s to\ au)tw=n e)/rgon e(/kastos: so quisque.

kai\ prokri/nantes...oi( me\n...oi( de/—there is no difficulty in understanding this sentence; and an exact parallel to it occurs in iii. 34, o( de\ (Paches) prokalesa/menos e)s lo/gous *(ippi/an...o( me\n (Hippias) e)ch=lqe par/ au)to/n, o( de\ (Paches) e)kei=non e)n fulakh=| ei=xen. Poppo compares Dem. in Callip. 1244, ou\(tws e)rrwme/nos e)sti\n w)/ste pe/rusi/ moi laxw\n th\n di/khn...e)gw\ me\n...ou)=tos de\ k.t.l.: so Xen. Cyr. iv. 6. 3, etc. In all these sentences the ‘anacoluthon’ arises from stating in a primary clause with me/n a fact which is really accessory to the main subject of the sentence. Thus in the passage before us the sense is ‘they chose out some 2000 Helots, and while they decked themselves with garlands on the strength of being set free, the Lacedaemonians etc.’ This is an extension of the ordinary idiom of expressing the contrast between two things by coordinate clauses with me)n and de/, the clause with me/n being in sense subordinate to that with de/ (e)gw\ me\n...su\ de/, ‘although I ...yet you’, etc.); see Madv. § 189.

e)s disxili/ois—cf. ch. 48, 2.

ou)dei\s h)/|sqeto—Diodorus (1st cent. B.C.) says that the chief Spartans were commissioned to put them to death at their own homes, a mere guess. ‘The government had now made the selection which it desired; presently every one among these newly enfranchised Helots was made away with— no one knew how. A stratagem at once so perfidious in the contrivance, so murderous in the purpose, and so complete in the execution, stands without parallel in Greek history—we might almost say without a parallel in any history. The Ephors must have employed numerous instruments, apart from each other, for the performance of this bloody deed. Yet it appears that no certain knowledge could be obtained of the details—a striking proof of the mysterious efficiency of this Council of Five, surpassing even that of the Council of Ten at Venice—as well as of the utter absence of public inquiry or discussion’ (Grote iv. ch. 53).

kai\ to/te—‘so now’, resuming the account from line 9. tou\s d' a)/llous—1000 in number, ch. 78, 2. misqw=| pei/qein is the regular term for engaging mercenaries, as in i. 31: ii. 96.

prou)qumh/qhsan de/—sc. that Brasidas should be sent; a clause parenthetically inserted and not affecting the construction: proqume/omai takes an acc. of the object, as v. 17, prou)qumh/qh th\n cu/mbasin (so freq. neut. ti, tou=to, etc.); but this constr. does not extend to persons. Arnold compares vii. 86, tou\s a)/ndras prou)qumh/qh...w)/ste a)feqh=nai, ‘he was anxious with regard to the men...that they should be set free’.

dokou=nta—‘held, accounted’, imperf. part. drasth/rion—‘a man of energy and enterprise’: ii. 63, to\ drasth/rion.

to/ te ga/r—corresponding to this te we have e)/s te, line 11, these particles connecting the two main divisions of the sentence.

cnmbai/nein te boulome/nois—‘this answers to kai\ tou= pole/mou k.t.l. When they wanted to come to terms they had places to offer in exchange, and as long as they continued the war it did not press so heavily upon Peloponnesus’ (Jowett).

o(/per e)poi/hsan—sc. cune/bhsan ‘made peace’, in 421 (v. 17). Krüger suggests e)po/qhsan, but o)/per, ‘which in fact’, agrees better with the reading of the text. a)ntapo/dosin kai\ a)podoxh/n=exchange.

ta\ e)k *sikeli/as—so iii. 102. meta\ ta\ e)k th=s *ai)twli/as: viii. 2, th\n e)k *sikeli/as kakopragi/an: all these passages refer to a disastrous withdrawal. a)reth/—probably generosity and humanity, as in ch. 19, 15, rather than valour.

prw=tos—to be taken with e)celqw/n, as both rhythm and sense clearly show. Brasidas was ‘the first of a series of Lacedaemonian generals who, in accordance with a new policy, were regularly sent to the dependencies of Athens either that they might raise revolt or that they might govern a town already revolted (ch. 132, 21). prw=tos contrasts Brasidas not with Pausanias, Salaethus, etc. but with Astyochus, and the Harmosts, who were afterwards so notorious’ (Jowett). Classen takes prw=tos with e)gkate/lipe, ‘he was the first who left behind him an assured hope’. But what were the grounds of the ‘assured hope’ if other generals had come before Brasidas and not proved equally good?

do/cas—‘having won the name, proved himself’. e)gkate)lipe—in the minds of the allies, or in the districts which he visited.

to/te d' ou)/n—d' ou)=n like ceterum, is perpetually used to resume the narrative after a digression, frequently after a very short one: i. 3, oi( d' ou)=n w(s e)/kastoi *)/ellhnes.

poiou=ntai—i. 28, fi/lous poiei=sfai: so cumma/xous etc.

paro/dou—the same word is used ch. 108, 5: so in iii. 92 the situation of Heraclea was considered th=s e)pi\ *qra/|khs paro/dou xrhsi/mws e(/cein. Part of the route at any rate was a ‘passage along’ the coast.

fulakh(n ple/ona—‘a closer watch’; they do not appear to have despatched any fresh troops as yet; see ch. 108, 37.

th=| e)sbolh=| th=s *lu/gkou—for gen. cf. ch. 1, 7. For the description of the ‘pass into Lyncus’ see Arnold. The pass crossed a chain of mountains, and descended by a gorge and stream: cf. ch. 127, 17.

lo/gois—with poih=sai, line 11. kai\ ga/r ti kai/—we have a somewhat similar order infr. line 16: so ch. 5, 4: 54, 13. For the force of e)pekhrukeu/eto see note on ch. 27, 14.

me/sw| dikasth=| e)pitre/pein—‘to entrust the matter to the mediation of Brasidas’. me/sos dikasth/s is an arbitrator, me/sos implying interposition as well as impartiality; see Arnold. e\pitre/pw is regularly used without an object expressed of referring a question to arbitration: i. 28, h)/qelon tw=| e)n *delfoi=s mantei/w| e)pitre/pein: so Dem. passim.

mh\ u(pecelei=n—‘not to remove from (lit. for) Perdiccas his grounds of apprehension’; i.e. not to make his position too secure. u(pecairw= means to remove secretly or gradually, or to remove to begin with (ch. 4, 15, note); hence to clear from one's path: Plat. Rep. 519 B, u(pecairei=n tou/tous dei= to\n tu/rannon ei) me/llei a)/rcein.

koinh=| ma=llon—(1) ‘in a more impartial spirit’ (Poppo, Classen, etc.). The adjective is not unusual with this meaning, e.g. iii. 53, mh\ ou) koinoi\ a)pobh=te, ‘lest you should not prove impartial judges’. No instance is however given of this sense of the adverb. Arnold and Krüger therefore take it to mean (2) that Brasidas claimed ‘a joint voice’ in dealing with Arrhibaeus; whereas Perdiccas insisted that he was merely engaged to act as his auxiliary.

h)ci/ou—‘felt himself entitled’. ‘Perdiccas had promised to make his neighbours allies of the Lacedaemonians. This gave Brasidas a right to interfere. For, he would argue, you are not making an ally but an enemy of Arrhibaeus’ (Jowett).

ou)/te—with te line 23. kaqaire/thn—‘to overthrow’; a common sense of kaqairw=. The subst. is not found elsewhere in Attic Greek: it is used by Dio Cassius.

e)k diafora=s—probably ‘after a quarrel’, as in ch. 125, 6: v. 42, e)k diafora=s peri\ au)tou=. Arnold however considers this to be one of the many adverbial expressions with e)k, equivalent to ‘in decided opposition to Perdiccas’.

a)dikei=sqai—note the use of the present, lit. ‘to be the victim of a wrong’: the pres. of a)dikw= ‘to be a wrong doer’ is used in the same way as nikw=, ‘to be victorious’, feu/gw, ‘to be in exile’, etc.

The short account here given shows the broad and generous spirit of Brasidas, as well as the arrogance and fickleness of Perdiccas, who was always ready to quarrel with his allies.

*)/akanqon—Acanthus was situated on the Strymonian gulf, a short distance to the north of the point where the canal of Xerxes cut the peninsula of Athos. th\n *)andri/wn a)poiki/an —founded in the middle of the seventh century. The def. article probably means ‘the (well-known) colony’, as in ch. 67, 4, or it may be used to distinguish the town from others of the same name. Same, Stageirus, and Argilus were Andrian colonies in the same district. Andros itself had been colonized from Eretria.

trugh/tou—‘vintage’; it was now late in the summer. tou= karpou=, line 7, therefore means the grapes, though by itself it more naturally denotes corn: cf. iii. 15, e)n karpou= cugkomidh=|. Note in these passages the collective use of karpo/s, like ke/ramos ch. 48, 13.

tou= karpou= to\ de/os—a very uncommon construction for peri/ tou=, see ch. 88, 5: de/os, like fo/bos, usually takes gen. of the thing feared.

a)kou/santas bouleu/sasqai—‘to hear him before deciding’: for plur. cf. 7, 34, o( pezo\s...bebohqhko/tes, etc.: we should expect a)kou/santes, but the acc. may be explained as referring to both parties and not only to the plh=qos: cf. ch. 69, 24.

katasta\s e)pi\ to\ plh=qos—‘presenting himself before the popular assembly’: cf. ch. 97, 10.

ou(de\ a)du/natos—‘not a bad speaker either’, besides his other merits; ou(de/ ‘also not’ as in ch. 48, 11. w(s *lakedaimo/nios—‘for a Lacedaemonian’; i.e. taking that into account. This is (a) a limiting use of w(s, showing that the main statement is modified by reference to the condition which w(s introduces: Soph. O. C. 20, makro\n ga\r w(s ge/ronti prou)sta/lhs o(do/n, ‘you have come a long way (not absolutely, but) for an old man’: so vi. 20, w(s e)n mia=| nh/sw|. Hdt. uses w(s ei(=nai and w(s a)/n ei)=nai in the same way, see Lidd. and Scott. So in Lat., Cic. de Sen. 4. 12, multae, ut in homine Romano, literae: Liv. xxxii. 33, vir, ut inter Aetolos, facundus.

This usage must not be confused with its converse (b) w(s in the sense of ‘as being’, which introduces a general statement in accordance with a particular fact stated; Eur. Ion, 1190, o( de\, w(s e)n i(erw=| trafei/s: so Cic. Tusc. i. 8. 15, Epicharmi, acuti nec insulsi hominis, ut Siculi; intelligence and wit being characteristic of the Sicilian Greeks.

Both (a) and (b) come under a general head, the comparison of a particular statement with a general one introduced by w(s or ut. In most instances the context shows to which division a passage should be assigned, but there is at times a doubt: thus Soph. O. T. 1078, fronei= ga\r w(s gunh\ me/ga, probably belongs to (b), ‘she is proud, like a woman’; but possibly to (a), ‘her thoughts are lofty for a woman’: ib. 1118, pisto\s w(s nomeu/s, probably comes under (a), ‘loyal, for a herdsman’, i.e. in such things as a herdsman is capable of: see also ch. 14, 5.

Rhetorical speaking was not cultivated at Sparta, but rather a terse and pregnant form of expression; see note on ch. 17, 6: cf. i. 84, and Plat. Protag. 342 E. The speech here attributed to Brasidas is both forcible and politic: as Grote observes, it is especially interesting as a manifesto of the principles professed by Sparta.

h( me\n e)/kpemyis—cf. i. 73, h( me\n pre/sbeusis...e)ge/neto. me/n finds its apodosis in line 6, or possibly in line 12, ei) de\ xro/nw| k.t.l. in the latter case being parenthetical.

th\n ai)ti/an—cf. Shilleto on i. 23, ai( e)s to\ fanero\n lego/menai ai\ti/ai, which he renders ‘the openly alleged recriminatory charges’, ai\ti/a being not merely a cause, but a ground of complaint put forward as a cause: cf. ch. 86, 21, e)gklh/masi. e\palhqeu/ousa—so viii. 52, to\n lo/gon e)phlh/qeusen.

proei/pomen—ii. 8 (of the Lacedaemonians), proeipo/ntwn o(/ti th\n *(/ellada e)leuqerou=sin.

e)ph/lqomen—‘came to’, not necessarily in a hostile sense: cf. e)pi/w, line 22.

a)po/—‘arising from, grounded on’. h(=|—‘in accordance with which, by which’.

mhdei\s memfqg=|—for the mood and tense used in prohibitions, see Goodwin, § 86.

o(/te pare/sxen—impers. ‘when a chance offered’: i. 120, eu)= parasxo/n, neut. partcp. used abs.: so v. 14, kalw=s parasxo/n: vi. 86, parasxh/sein a)mu/nasqai.

th=| a)poklh/|sei—‘I wonder at’, dat. with qauma/zw expressing the ground or cause, a very rare construction: in vii. 63, there is a dat. with the passive e)qauma/zesqe, ‘you were admired by reason of’, but it is not an analogous instance, though so cited by editors. We have a better illustration in iii. 97, th=| tu/xh| e)lpi/sas. The gen. mou corresponds to the acc. with the verb=‘the exclusion of me from your gates’: cf. vi. 101, au)tou\s a)poklh/|sasqai th=s diaba/sews.

oi)o/menoi/ te—the sentence presents two irregularities of construction with te. The first te and kai/ couple para\ cumma/xous h)/cein and boulome/nois e)/sesqai, ‘we thought that you were our allies in feeling, and would welcome us when we came’. The second te connects ki/ndunon a)nerri/yamen with pa=n to\ pro/qumon, the sense being ‘we ran the risk of marching into Thrace, and are now showing all zeal on your behalf’. dia\ th=s a)llotri/as i)o/ntes is explanatory of ki/ndunon: after this the participial construction is continued and parexo/menoi written instead of parexo/meqa. This explanation gives the most forcible sense, but it is of course a possible view that te and kai/ simply connect the two participles. te is bracketed by Poppo and Krüger and omitted by Classen.

th=| gou=n gnw/mh|—‘at least in feeling’ with cumma/xous. boulome/nois e)/sesqai—sc. our coming: for dat. cf. ch. 28, 27.

a)nerri/yamen—ch. 95, 6: in v. 103 without an acc. toi=s e)s a(/pan to\ u(pa/rxon a)narriptou=si, ‘those who stake their all on the cast’: this is a metaphor from dice. In iii. 38, au)th\ tou\s kindu/nous a)nafe/rei, is ‘takes on herself the risks’: and this may be the meaning of Aesch. Sept. 1028, ka)na\ ki/ndunon balw=. For pres. form r(ipte/w see Lid. and Scott.

parexo/menoi—‘showing’, on our part: see note on ch. 64, 2: cf. infr. line 24.

e)n nw=| e)/xete—‘purpose, intend’: ch. 8, 24. deino\n a)\n ei)/h—less direct than the ind.; the speaker hopes for better things.

ou) mo/non o(/ti—so Plat. Symp. 179 B, ou) mo/non o(/ti a)/ndres a)lla\ kai\ gunai=kes: in ii. 97 we have ou)x o)/ti...a)ll' ou)de/. ou)x o(/pws...a)lla/ is far more common. e)pi/w does not here imply hostile approach, and we might expect the accusative rather than the dative: cf. v. 110, o)/sous mh\ *brasi/das e)ph=lqen, ‘if Brasidas failed to visit any’.

dusxere\s poiou/menoi—‘taking it ill’, i.e. refusing to listen to us: cf. dusxerai/nw: neither the adj. nor the verb is used elsewhere by Thucydides. In the next clause with ei), Brasidas quotes the objection which would be urged, ‘that you refused to receive me’: cf. ch. 122, 21.

parexome/nous—see ch. 64, 2.

th\n ai)ti/an—probably used with the same force as in line 3, the sense being ‘I shall not be able to satisfy men that I am come, as I profess, to deliver them from Athens’. Others take it ‘I shall not be able to give a credible reason for your rejection of me’. pisth/n is of course pred. ‘so as to gain belief’. a)ll' h)/—either (1) ‘but (I shall be thought) either etc.’, where we must supply the sense from the context, or perhaps take ai)ti/an e)/cw again in a different connexion and meaning=‘I shall incur the imputation’: or (2) after neg. a)ll' h)/ taken together=‘except’, explaining ai)ti/an, i.e. this will seem the only possible reason. This latter view necessitates taking ai)ti/an in the second and less forcible of the two senses given above, and also does away with the parallelism h)\ e)pife/rein, h)\...a)fi=xqai. I therefore incline to (1).

a)/dikon—‘no true freedom’; this point is discussed in the following chapter. e)pife/rein—lit. to bring to or upon, more than to proffer: so ch. 87, 10: iii. 56, in a bad sense, doulei/an e)pe/feren o( ba/rbaros.

ta\ pro\s *)aqhnai/ous—acc. of ref. as in ch. 108, 7.

kai/toi—Brasidas first rebuts the imputation of weakness. The Athenians had already refused to encounter him at Nisaea, and they could only send an inferior force now.

stratia=| ge th=|d'—Poppo observes on the absence of the article with th=|de that it gives the pronoun an adverbial force, =‘I have here an army which the Athenians refused to face’: so ii. 74, e)pi\ gh=n th/nde h)/lqomen, e)n h(=|, ‘we now invade a land in which’, etc. This statement, as well as the words ple/ones o)/ntes, is untrue. Besides his own troops Brasidas had a large force of allies before Nisaea, and was superior in numbers to the Athenians; see note on ch. 73, 24.

w(/ste ou)k ei)ko/s—instead of saying that the Athenians would certainly not attack Brasidas with an inferior force such as they could send by sea, the speaker says that such a force would not be equal to the army at Nisaea, leaving the hearers to draw the conclusion.

nhi+/th|—adj. ii. 24, h)\n nhi+/th| stratw=| e)piple/wsi. Here one manuscript has stratw=| before au)tou/s, which would give an identical construction, dat. of the force employed. If we do not adopt the transposition, stratw=| or the like must be understood from what follows. Arnold proposes to omit the words tw=| e)n *nisai/a|. So Rutherford, who reads nhi/thn...strato\n i)sopalh=.

katalabw/n—i. 9, o(/rkois kateilhmme/nous: cf. ch. 19, 13. ‘Not because Brasidas himself distrusted the Lacedaemonian magistrates as Grote supposes (vol. iv. ch. 52 fin.), but as a security to which he could appeal when addressing the allies’ (Jowett). For ta\ te/lh see ch. 15, 3.

prosaga/gwmai—‘bring over, win to my side’: ii. 30, proshga/gonto a)/neu ma/xhs: vi. 94, prosagago/menoi o(mologi/a|; sometimes implying force ‘reduce’, i. 99, prosa/gesqai tou\s a)fistame/nous: so iii. 91. In these words Brasidas seems to hint at the Athenian practice of treating their so-called allies as subjects.

cummaxh/sontes—instead of cummaxh/swn, the plural being used after the intervening i(/n' e)/xwmen.

ou)/t' au)to/s—‘Brasidas opposes one aspect of himself, i.e. his personal honesty, to another aspect not equally personal, his ability to help the Acanthians. My personal character ought not to be suspected by you, nor my power to assist you undervalued’ (Jowett). Note the force of the aor. in qarsh/santas, ‘you must take courage’.

kai\ ei)/ tis—a third point, Brasidas is not a partizan. For ara cf. ch. 8, 24. mh/ tisi prosqw=—‘to this or that faction’; the people might not unnaturally fear that Brasidas would establish an oligarchy in the interests of Sparta. prosti/qhmi, ‘to make over’: iii. 92, *)aqhnai/ois prosqei=nai sfa=s au)tou/s, ‘to join, surrender’.

a)safh=...ei)—‘doubtful, (as it would be) if’ etc.; the freedom would be a)safh/s on the supposition which ei) introduces. ‘I am not minded to offer you a dim and doubtful liberty by making the many the slaves of the few, or the few of the many’ (Arnold).

Analogous instances are not uncommon, e.g. iii. 11, martu- ri/w| e)xrw=nto mh\ a)\n tou/s ge i)soyhfous a)/kontas, ei/ mh/ ti h)di/koun oi(=s e)ph/|esan custrateu/ein: Dem. Con. 1266, ou)de/pot' a)\n ta\ yeudh= marturei=n h)qe/lhsan, ei) mh\ tau=q' e(wrwn. There is therefore no need to adopt the conjecture ou)d' a)\n safh=, or Classen's ou)d' a)spasth/n, ‘welcome’.